MiCOM P220 TechnicalGuide en

MiCOM P220
Motor protection
Technical Guide
P220/EN T/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN T/B43
Page 1/2
MOTOR PROTECTION
MiCOM P220
CONTENT
Safety Section
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Getting Started
P220/EN GS/B43
Connection Diagram
P220/EN CO/B43
Technical Data
P220/EN TD/B43
Application Guide
P220/EN AP/B43
User Guide
P220/EN FT/B43
Menu of the HMI
P220/EN HI/B43
Communication
P220/EN GC/B43
Default Setting Value
P220/EN SV/B43
Installation Guide
P220/EN IN/B43
Commissioning and Maintenance
P220/EN CM/B43
Test Report
P220/EN RS/B43
P220/EN T/B43
Technical Guide
Page 2/2
MiCOM P220
BLANK PAGE
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
SAFETY SECTION
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Safety Section
Page 1/10
CONTENTS
1.
INTRODUCTION
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY
3.
SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
3.1
Symbols
3.2
Labels
4.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
6.
EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS
7.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
7.1
Protective fuse rating
7.2
Protective Class
7.3
Installation Category
7.4
Environment
8.
CE MARKING
9.
RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Page 2/10
Safety Section
BLANK PAGE
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Safety Section
1.
Page 3/10
INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment
provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment and
also includes descriptions of equipment label markings.
Documentation for equipment ordered from AREVA Energy Automation & Information is
despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time.
Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information normally present on
equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with
the contents of this Safety Guide.
Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some
equipment.
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with
the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may
endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who
are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and
of the system to which it is being connected;
are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment
and to isolate, ground, and label it;
are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices;
are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The operating manual for the equipment gives instructions for its installation, commissioning,
and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales
office and request the necessary information.
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Page 4/10
3.
Safety Section
SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the
equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the
equipment is installed or commissioned.
3.1
Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.
Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal

Note This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.
*NOTE:
3.2
THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT

EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
Labels
See "Safety Guide" (SFTY/4L M) for equipment labelling information.
4.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should
commissioning or servicing the equipment.
be
consulted
before
installing,
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may

present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge
(ESD) precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp
terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained
for safety.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate
connection diagram.
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Safety Section
Page 5/10
Protection Class I Equipment
-
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective

conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since

the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would
be lost.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm

(3.3 mm for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section
of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring
regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as
short as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary
inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
-
Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);
CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections;
Protective fuse rating;
Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where

applicable);
Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the

application.
Equipment Use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
UL and CSA Listed or Recognized Equipment
To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL
and/or CSA Listed or Recognized parts of the following type: connection cables,
protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and
replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before
opening any connections to it.
For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block
for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the
module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the
equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.
For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for
current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on
removal of the module.
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Page 6/10
Safety Section
External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)
Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are
fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if
touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the
recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible
damage to the equipment, buildings and persons.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At
the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero,
to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and pcb cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energised, since this may result in damage.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used,
this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is
energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live
voltages may be accessible on the extender card.
Insertion and withdrawal of integral heavy current test plugs
It is possible to use an integral heavy current test plug with some equipment.
CT shorting links must be in place before insertion or removal of heavy current
test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
External test blocks and test plugs
Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such
as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be
accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the
insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
*Note when a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test
Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them
safe.
Fibre optic communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean
water, when no connections are energised. Contact fingers of test plugs are
normally protected by petroleum jelly which should not be removed.
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Safety Section
5.
Page 7/10
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Decommissioning:
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
decommissioning.
Disposal:
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of batteries.
6.
EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS

Electrical adjustments
It is possible to change current or voltage settings on some equipment by direct
physical adjustment e.g. adjustment of a plug-bridge setting. The electrical power
should be removed before making any change, to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Exposure of live parts
Removal of the cover may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts,
these should not be touched before removing the electrical power.
7.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
7.1
Protective fuse rating

The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A,
high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent, unless otherwise
stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation. The protective fuse
should be located as close to the unit as possible.
DANGER
7.2
CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may

produce lethal hazardous voltages.
Protective Class
IEC 61010-1: 2001
EN 61010-1: 2001
7.3
Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment

documentation). This equipment requires a protective
conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.
Installation Category
IEC 61010-1: 2001
EN 61010-1: 2001
Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):

Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 500, 0.5J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Page 8/10
7.4
Safety Section
Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree Pollution
Degree 2
Altitude operation up to
2000 m
IEC 61010-1: 2001
EN 61010-1: 2001
8.
Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety

standards.
CE MARKING
Compliance with all
Community directives:
Marking
relevant
European
Product safety:
Low Voltage Directive - 73/23/EEC
amended by 93/68/EEC
EN 61010-1: 2001
EN 60950-1: 2001
EN 60255-5: 2001
IEC 60664-1: 2001
Compliance demonstrated by reference to

safety standards.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

(EMC) 89/336/EEC amended by
93/68/EEC.
Compliance demonstrated via the Technical

Construction File route.
The following Product Specific Standard

was used to establish conformity:
EN 50263 : 2000
Where applicable :
II (2) G
ATEX Potentially Explosive

Atmospheres directive
94/9/EC, for equipment.
The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of

European directive 94/9/EC. It is approved for operation
outside an ATEX hazardous area. It is however
approved for connection to Increased Safety, Ex e,
motors with rated ATEX protection, Equipment Category
2, to ensure their safe operation in gas Zones 1 and 2
hazardous areas.
CAUTION Equipment with this marking is not itself
suitable for operation within a potentially explosive
atmosphere.
Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body certificates
of compliance.
Radio and
Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment (R & TTE)
directive 95/5/EC.
Compliance demonstrated by compliance to the Low

Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC,
down to zero volts, by reference to safety standards.
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Safety Section
9.
Page 9/10
RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA

CSA - Canadian Standards Association
UL
- Underwriters Laboratory of America
UL Recognized to UL (USA) requirements

UL Recognized to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements
UL Listed to UL (USA) requirements
UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements
Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements
Pxxxx/EN SS/B11
Page 10/10
Safety Section
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
P220/EN GS/B43
MiCOM P220
Getting Started
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 1/22
CONTENTS
1.
RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT
1.1
Reception of the relay
1.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
2.
HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
3.
INSTALLING THE RELAYS
4.
UNPACKING
5.
STORAGE
6.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220
6.1
MiCOM series relay
6.2
MiCOM P220 Functions
6.3
Front view
6.4
Relay rear description
7.
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
10
8.
STARTING THE MiCOM P220 IN 5 MINUTES
11
8.1
Check the wiring of your installation
11
8.2
Connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage
11
8.3
MINIMUM CONFIGURATION TO START UP THE MiCOM P220
12
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.4
OP PARAMETERS Menu
CONFIGURATION Menu
COMMUNICATION Menu
PROTECTION G 1 Menu
COMPLETE CONFIGURATION OF THE MiCOM P220
12
14
19
19
21
9.
COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
22
P220/EN GS/B43
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
Page 2/22
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
1.
RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT
1.1
Reception of the relay
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 3/22
Protection relays are generally robust. However it is appropriate to treat them with
care before installing them on site. As soon as they arrive, the relays should be
examined immediately, looking for any deterioration which could have occurred
during transport. If there is any deterioration, make a claim against the forwarding
company and inform AREVA T&D as soon as possible.
Relays not intended for immediate installation must be stored in their protective
polyethylene packaging.
1.2

Relays use components sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are
well protected by the metal housing. Consequently, the internal module must not be
taken out pointlessly. When handling the module outside its housing, be very careful
to avoid any contact with electrical connections and components. If it is removed
from its housing for storage, the module must be placed in electrically conductive
antistatic packaging.
No configuration setting is possible in the module. We therefore advise you not to
dismantle it pointlessly. The printed circuit boards are interconnected. They are not
designed for disconnection by the user. Avoid touching the printed circuit boards.
They are made with complementary metal-oxide semiconductors (CMOS) and the
static electricity discharged by the human body has an adverse effect on them.
2.

The usual movements of a person easily generate electrostatic energy which may
reach several thousand volts. The discharging of this voltage into devices comprising
semiconductors, when handling electronic circuits, can cause severe deterioration.
Such damage is not necessarily visible immediately. Nevertheless, it reduces the
reliability of the circuit.
Electronic circuits are completely protected against any electrostatic discharge when
inside their housing. Do not expose them to any risk by needlessly taking the
modules out of their housings.
Each module has the best possible protection for its devices consisting of
semiconductors. However, should it be necessary to withdraw the module from its
housing, please take the following precautions to preserve the great reliability and
long service life for which the equipment was designed and manufactured.
1.
Before taking the module out of its housing, touch the housing to balance your
electrostatic potential.
2.
When handling the module, hold it by its front plate, or by its frame or by the
edges of the printed circuit board. Do not touch the electronic components, the
printed circuit conductors and the connectors.
3.
Before passing the module to another person, shake hands with him or her for
example to balance your electrostatic potential
4.
Place the module on an antistatic surface or an electrically conductive surface

with the same potential as yourself.
5.
To store or transport the module, place it in conductive packaging.
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 4/22
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
If you carry out any measurements on the internal electronic circuits of a device in
service, earth yourself to exposed conductive parts by linking yourself to the housing
by a conductive strap attached to your wrist. The resistance to earth of the conductive
strap which you attach to your wrist and to the housing must be between 500 k and
10 M. If you do not have a device of this type, you must remain permanently in
contact with the housing to prevent any static energy accumulating. The instruments
used to take the measurements must be earthed to the housing insofar as this is
possible.
For further information on the procedures for safe working with all the electronic
equipment, please consult standards BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. In a special handling
area we strongly advise you to undertake a detailed analysis of the electronic circuits
and working conditions according to the BS and IEC standards mentioned above.
3.

The relays are supplied either individually or mounted in a cubicle. If separate relays
have to be installed according to a particular drawing, please follow the mounting
details indicated in publication R7012. If a MMLG test unit has to be incorporated,
position it to the right of the set of relays (looking at them from the front). The
modules must still be protected in their metal housings during installation on a
cubicle. The design of the relays makes it possible to reach the mounting holes easily
without taking off the cover. For individually mounted relays, a positioning diagram
is normally supplied to indicate the centre of the holes and the layout of the cubicle.
The corresponding dimensions are also indicated in the corresponding sales
publication (N 1550-B).
4.
UNPACKING
When unpacking and installing relays, take great care to avoid damaging the parts
and changing the settings. Relays must be handled only by people who are experts
in this field. As far as possible, the installation must remain clean, dry, free from dust
and free from excessive vibration. The site must be well lit to facilitate inspection.
Relays removed from their housings must not be exposed to dust or humidity. To this
end, it is necessary to take great care when installing relays whilst construction work is
taking place on the same site.
5.
STORAGE
If the relays do not have to be installed immediately on reception, they must be stored
protected against dust and humidity in their original carton. If dehumidifying crystals
are placed in the relay packaging, it is advisable not to remove them. The effect of
the dehumidifying crystals is reduced if the packaging is exposed to ambient
conditions. To restore their original effectiveness, you need only to heat the crystals
slightly for around an hour, before replacing them in their delivery carton.
As soon as the packaging is opened, the dust which has accumulated on the carton
risks settling on the relays. In the presence of moisture, the carton and the packaging
can become humidified to the point where the effectiveness of the dehumidifying
crystals is reduced.
The temperature for storage should remain between - 25 C and + 70 C.
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
6.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220
6.1
MiCOM series relay
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 5/22
The range of MiCOM protection relays follows on from the success of the MIDOS, K
and MODN ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. The
MiCOM P220 is fully compatible and use the same modular box concept. MiCOM
P220 provides more protection elements for the most demanding applications.
This relay has a large number of control functions and collecting data. This can form
part of a fully integrated system covering protection, control, measurements data
acquisition and recording of faults, events, and disturbances. The relay is equipped
on the front panel with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2x16 back-lit
alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 push keypad (to gain access to all the
parameters, alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs simply displaying the state of the
relay.
In addition, the use of the RS485 communication port makes it possible to read,
reinitialise and change the settings of the relay, if required, from a local or remote PC
computer equipped with appropriate software.
Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow
the MiCOM P220 to provide an evolving solution for the problems of the protection
of motors.
P220/EN GS/B43
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
Page 6/22
6.2
MiCOM P220 Functions

Function
MiCOM P220
[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD
[50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT
[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT
[46] UNBALANCE
[48] EXCESS LONG START
[51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR
[37] LOSS OF LOAD
[49/38] RTD (optional)
[49] THERMISTANCE (optional)
[66] START NUMBER
MIN TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS
EMERGENCY START
RE-ACCELERATION. AUTORISATION
SETTING GROUPS
MEASUREMENTS (True RMS + direct Current,

indirect + MAX Value )
PROCESS MENU
Circuit Breaker SUPERVISION
Circuit Breaker MONITORING
TRIP STATISTICS
LATCHING RELAYS
AND LOGIC EQUATIONS
FAULTS RECORDS
EVENTS RECORDS
DISTURBANCE RECORDS
COMMUNICATION PORT FRONT PANEL (RS232)
COMMUNICATION PORT REAR FACE (RS485)
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
6.3
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 7/22
Front view
The front panel is described in figure 1. Extra physical protection for the front panel
can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. This allows read access only
to the relay settings and data but does not affect the relay IP rating. When full access
to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be
unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open.
P0176ENb
FIGURE 1 - RELAY FRONT VIEW
The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in the figure1:
a 16 character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD)
a 7-Keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (!, ", #, $,.an ENTER key %, a CLEAR
key &, and a READ key ').
8 LEDs ; 4 fixed function LEDs and 4 programmable function LEDs on the left
hand side of the front panel.
Under the top hinged cover:
The relay serial number, and the relay voltage rating information
(see figure 3 in this chapter)
Under the bottom hinged cover:
battery compartment to hold the AA size battery which is used for

memory back-up for event, fault and disturbance records.
A 9 pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally

to the relay (up to 15m distance) via a RS232 serial data connection
(SK1 port).
P220/EN GS/B43
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
Page 8/22
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate
the following conditions:
LEDs
Colour
Labels
Significance
LED 1
RED
TRIP
LED 1 indicates when a trip order has been issued by

the relay to the cut-off element (circuit breaker,
contactor). This LED recopies the trip order issued to
the trip output contact (RL1). Its normal state is unlit.
It will light as soon as a trip order is issued. It goes
out when the associated alarm is acknowledged (by
pushing the & key).
LED 2
Yellow
Alarm
Upon detection of a fault (thermal O/V) or an alarm

(CB state) by MiCOM P220 relay, the LED will start
flashing. After reading of the alarm(s) message(s) by
pressing the ' key, the LED will change from flashing
to constant illumination, and will extinguish when all
the alarms are cleared (Key &).
The alarms are either threshold crossings
(instantaneous), or tripping orders (time delayed).
LED 3
Orange
Warning
LED 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms of MiCOM

P220 relays. When a non critical internal alarm
(typically communication Fault) is detected, the LED
flashes continuously. When the fault is classified as
critical, the LED is illuminated continuously. The
extinction of this LED is only possible by the
disappearance of the cause that caused its function
(repair of the module, disappearance of the fault).
LED 4
Green
Healthy
LED 4 indicates that MiCOM P220 relays are working

correctly.
LED 5 to
LED 8
Red
Aux1 to
Aux4
These LEDs can be programmed by the user on the

basis of information on available thresholds
(instantaneous and time-delayed). The user selects the
information he wishes to see associated with a LED.
Each LED illuminates when the associated information
is valid. The extinction of each LED is linked to the
acknowledgement of the associated alarms.
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
6.4
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 9/22
Relay rear description

Connector 1
Connector 2
OPTION:
This connector (Orange) is designed for the use of
- 6 RTD or 2 Thermistances.
- Analogical Output.
P0177ENa
FIGURE 2 - MiCOM P220 RELAY REAR VIEW
Connector 1
Connector 2
Common TC4
Common TC1
Case Earth
29 RS485
(Resistance)
30
TC4 (NC)
TC1 (NC)
RS485 (+)
31 RS485 (-)
32
TC4 (NO)
TC1 (NO)
Auxiliary
Supply (+)
33 Auxiliary
Supply (-)
34
Common TC5
Common TC2
WD (NO)
35 Common WD
36
TC5 (NC)
TC2 (NC)
10
WD (NC)
37
38
TC5 (NO)
11 TC2 (NO)
12
39
40
Input L3 (+)
13 Common TC3
14
IA (Input Ph.A /5 amps)
41 Common IA
42
(Ph.A/ 5 amps)
Input L3 ( - )
15 TC3 (NC)
16
IB (Input Ph.B /5 amps)
43 Common IB
(Ph.B/ 5 amps)
Input L4 (+)
17 TC3 (NO)
18
IC (Input Ph.C /5 amps)
45 Common IC
46
(Ph.C/ 5 amps)
Input L4 ( - )
19
20
I0 (E/F input)
(5 amps)
47 Common E/F
(5 amps)
48
Input L5 (+)
21 Input L1 (+)
22
IA (Input Ph.A /1 amp)
49 Common IA
(Ph.A/ 1 amp)
50
Input L5 ( - )
23 Input L1 ( - )
24
IB (Input Ph.B /1 amp)
51 Common IB
(Ph.B/ 1 amp)
52
25 Input L2 (+)
26
IC (Input Ph.C /1 amp)
53 Common IC
(Ph.C/ 1 amp)
54
27 Input L2 ( - )
28
I0 (E/F input)
(1 amp)
55 Common E/F
(1 amp)
56
NOTE:
The terminals of MiCOM P220 are represented with power

supply off.
44
P220/EN GS/B43
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
Page 10/22
7.
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
Prior to applying power, unclip the top cover and check that the model number of the
relay listed on the front panel (top left) corresponds to the model ordered.
CE
P220 C00M11100
No. 2501511
Cde 37982/007
0,002 - 1 Ion
Modbus
Vx 130 - 250Vcc / 100 - 250Vca

P0178ENa
FIGURE 3 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION
The significance of each information is described below:
P220 C00M11100 : cortec code. In particular, this code allows the user to
know what is the protocol used for remote communications (code 1 means
MODBUS).
No 2501511 and Cde 37982/007: these numbers are the serial number and
the reference number of the order: they are necessary in case of problems.
0.002 1 Ion : This is referred to the sensibility of the E/F current input.
Modbus: Communication protocol available through the rear RS485

communication port.
Vx 130 250Vdc / 100 250Vac : Power supply range . In this example, the
power supply can be either ac or dc voltage.
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
8.
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 11/22
STARTING THE MiCOM P220 IN 5 MINUTES

The object of this chapter is to enable you to make the MiCOM P220 operational in 5
minutes before starting the motor.
8.1
8.2
Check the wiring of your installation
First check that you have thoroughly taken note of Handling and Safety, chapter
T00.
Check that the wiring of your installation is in compliance with the connection
diagram shown in chapter.2
Check that the output relay No. 1 (terminals 2-4-6) is correctly inserted into the
trip circuit of the breaking device.
Verify that the logic input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is correctly connected to an o/o
interlock copying the position of the breaking device.
Connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage

Before energising the MiCOM P220 relay, check that the electrical characteristics of
the MiCOM P220* protection correspond to those of the auxiliary voltage of the
installation.
Switch on the auxiliary source.
Push the live part of the MiCOM P220 relay into its housing. Once the relay is
plugged in and the auxiliary source is energised, the green LED marked
"Healthy" (or "Uaux" in French) should light up. This is the 4th LED down from
the top.
ATTENTION :
THE EXTRACTION OF THE ACTIVE PART OUT OF THE CASE COULD BE

DONE BY OPENING THE TWO FLAPS (THE UPPER AND THE LOWER), THEN
WITH A SCREWDRIVER OF 3MM,BY MAKING A SWIVEL OF THE EXTRACTOR
LOCATED UNDER THE UPPER FLAP AND FINALLY BY EXERTING A
TRACTION ON THE TWO NOTCHES SITUED BEHIND THESE SHUTTERS.
(IT IS NECESSARY - AFTER PIVOTING THE EXTRACTOR - TO WAIT 2 OR
3 SECONDS BEFORE MAKING COME OUT THE ACTIVE PART, TO
LEAVE DISCHARGING THE CAPACITORS IN THE ACTIVE PART THUS
AVOIDING POSSIBLE ELECTRIC ARCS IN THE EVENT OF DIRECT
CONTACT OF THE CONNECTOR BLOCKS WITH METAL LIMP).
P220/EN GS/B43
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
Page 12/22
8.3
MINIMUM CONFIGURATION TO START UP THE MiCOM P220
8.3.1
OP PARAMETERS Menu
8.3.1.1 Activation of the parameter mode

From the default display of the menu which appears when connecting the MiCOM
P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage, double click on the " button, the PASSWORD cell
appears.
OP PARAMETERS
PASSWORD =
****
Click on the % button, and the flashing cursor appears. The following cell appears:
PASSWORD =
AAAA
There are two possibilities:
The relay leaves the factory with the default password AAAA. Press the % button
again. The following message appears for 2 seconds to indicate that the
password has been entered correctly. The MiCOM relay thus goes into
parameterisation mode.
PASSWORD OK
If a password other than the AAAA has already been loaded since MiCOM P220
relay left the factory, enter this new password by using the buttons %, $,! and
". After the validation of the new password using the % button, the cell below
appears for 2 seconds. The MiCOM P220 relay goes thus into the
parameterisation mode.
PASSWORD OK
NOTE :
PASSWORD =
The parameterisation mode is deactivated if no button has been

pressed for 5 minutes.
If the relay was already in parameterisation mode when the
password was entered; the cell
AAAA
will be replaced by
NEW PASSWORD OK
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 13/22
8.3.1.2 Indication of the motor frequency

Once the password is confirmed, press the " button 4 times. The following cell
appears:
FREQUENCY =
50 Hz
Then there are two possibilities:
If the motor has a rated frequency of 50Hz, do nothing.
If the motor has a rated frequency of 60Hz, then press the % button.
A flashing cursor appears under the 0 of the term 50 Hz.

FREQUENCY =
50 Hz
Press the ! button, and the cell below appears:
FREQUENCY =
60 Hz
Confirm this by pressing the % button.
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 14/22
8.3.2
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
CONFIGURATION Menu
After having entered the motor frequency, press the ! button 5 times.
The following menu heading appears:
OP PARAMETERS
Press the $ button, and the heading of the CONFIGURATION menu appears:
CONFIGURATION
8.3.2.1 CONFIG SELECT Submenu

Press the " button once. The heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu appears:
CONFIG SELECT
Selection of the type of analog output
This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "analog output"
option.
Starting with the heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 5
times, and the following cell appears :
ANALOG. OUTPUT
0 - 20 mA
Two possibilities arise:
If you need an analog output signal on a 0-20 mA current loop, do nothing
If you need an analog output signal on a 4-20 mA current loop, press % button
and then the ! button.
The following cell appears:

ANALOG. OUTPUT
4 - 20 mA
Confirm by pressing the % button.
Selection of the information available on the analog output
This can be parameterised only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the
"analog output" option.
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 15/22
Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button, and the following cell appears:
TYPE OF ANA. INFO
IA RMS
Using the % and ! buttons, select the type of information you wish to bring onto the
analog output, then confirm by pressing the % key.
Selection of the type of RTD
This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "monitoring of 6
RTDs" option or monitoring of 2 thermistors + 4 RTD option.
Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button, otherwise starting from the
heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 7 times.
Type RTD =
PT100
Using the % and ! buttons, select the type of RTD with which the motor is equipped,
then confirm by pressing the % key.
Selection of the type of thermistors
This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "monitoring of 2
thermistors and 4 RTD" option.
The MiCOM P220 relay is not equipped with the "analog output" option; starting
from the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 5 times. The following
cell appears:
Type Thermist 1 =
PTC
The MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "analog output" option; starting from the
following cell:
TYPE OF ANA. INFO
IA RMS
(The type of information to be brought onto the analog output can be different from
IA RMS).
P220/EN GS/B43
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
Page 16/22
Press the " button once. The following cell appears:
Type Thermist 1 =
PTC
If the No.1 group of thermistors equipping the motor is of the PTC (positive
temperature coefficient) type, do nothing. On the other hand, if the motor is
equipped with a group of thermistors of type NTC (negative temperature coefficient),
press the % button then the ! button. The following cell appears:
Type Thermist 1 =
NTC
Confirm by pressing the % button.

Press the " button , then the following cell appears :
Type Thermist 2 =
PTC
Repeat the same operation if the No. 2 thermistor group of the motor is of type NTC.
8.3.2.2 CT RATIO Submenu: adjustment of the primary and secondary ratings of the current
sensors
From inside the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button as many times as
necessary to reach the heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. As indicated
below:
Press the $ button once. The heading of the CT RATIO submenu appears:
CT RATIO
Value of the primary rating of the phase CTs
Press once on the " button. The following cell appears:
PRIM PH =
1000
In this cell, indicate the value of the primary rating of the phase CTs. For example,
for a CT with a ratio of 200/5, set the value 200 as explained below.
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 17/22
Press the % button. A flashing cursor appears under the last 0 of 1000:
PRIM PH =
1000
Using the ! and " buttons, increase and/or decrease the 1st digit. Then press the
# button.
The cursor moves under the 2nd digit. Using the ! and " buttons, increase and/or
decrease the 2nd digit. Then do the same for the 3rd and 4th digits. Confirm by
pressing the % button.
Value of the secondary rating of the phase CTs
SEC PH =
1
If the current circuits coming from the secondaries of the phase CTs are connected to
the phase current inputs with a rating of 1 A (terminals 49-50; 51-52; 53-54) of the
MiCOM P220, do nothing. This implies that the secondaries of the phase CTs have
the rating of 1 A. On the other hand, if the current circuits are connected to the
phase current inputs with a rating of 5 A (terminals 41-42; 43-44; 45-46) of the
MiCOM P220, this implies that the rating of the secondaries of the phase CTs is 5 A,
press the % button. A cursor appears under the 1:
SEC PH =
1
Press the ! button. Confirm by pressing the % button. The following cell appears:
SEC PH =
5
Value of the primary of the earth sensor.
Press once on the " button. The following cell appears:
PRIM E =
1000
Press the % button. A cursor appears under the last 0 of 1000:
PRIM E =
1000
P220/EN GS/B43
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
Page 18/22
The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT. In this cell, set the
value of the ratio of the core balanced CT using the buttons !, " and #.
Confirm by pressing % .
The earth current input is connected to the residual connection of the three
secondary circuits coming from the phase CTs. In this cell, set the value of the
primary rating of the phase CTs using the buttons #, !, and ". Confirm by
pressing % .
Value of the secondary of the earth sensor

SEC E =
The earth input is connected to a core balanced CT. Do nothing, leave this value
at 1.
The earth input is connected to the residual connection of the three secondary
circuits coming from the phase CTs. In this cell, set the value of the secondary
rating of the phase CTs (this implies that the residual connection circuit is cabled
to the earth current input corresponding to the secondary rating of the phase
CTs).
If the rating is 1A, do nothing. On the other hand, if the rating is 5 A, press the %
button, and a flashing cursor appears.
SEC E =
1
Press the ! button. Confirm by pressing the % button.
SEC E =
5
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
8.3.3
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 19/22
COMMUNICATION Menu
Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button once. The heading of the CT
RATIO submenu appears. Press the ! button once. The heading of the
CONFIGURATION menu appears. Then press the $ button 4 times. The heading of
the COMMUNICATION menu appears.
COMMUNICATION
COM. OK =
YES
You wish to use the MiCOM P220 relay for communication, so check that the word
YES appears. If it does not appear, press % once and then ! once. YES appears,
so confirm with % .
If the relay MiCOM P220 is used for communication (via the RS485 port at the rear),
set the various parameters of the COMMUNICATION menu using the buttons:
" to move from one line to another and also to reduce the value of a
parameter;
% to select a parameter to be modified and also to confirm the entry of a

parameter,
! to increase the value of a parameter.
Then press the " or ! button as many times as necessary, to return to the heading
of the COMMUNICATION menu.
8.3.4
PROTECTION G 1 Menu
Press the $ button once. The heading of the PROTECTION group 1 menu appears.
PROTECTION G1
8.3.4.1 Setting the threshold of thermal current I>

Press the " button once.
appears :
The heading of the THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu
[49] THERMAL OVER-LOAD

Press the " button once, the following cell appears.
THERMAL OVERLOAD
FUNCT ?
YES
Check that the word YES actually appears. If not, press once on %, then once on
! the word YES appears, confirm with %.
Press the " button twice. The following cell appears :
P220/EN GS/B43
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
Page 20/22
I > =
0.2 In
Press the % button. A flashing cursor appears:

I > =
0.2 In
Using the !, " and # buttons, set the value of the thermal current threshold I>
corresponding to the machine. Confirm by pressing the % button.
From this point, a minimum configuration has been given for starting up the MiCOM
P220 relay.
This minimum configuration makes it possible to start up the MiCOM P220
relay. It is not in any way sufficient to ensure that the motor is protected. For
this, it is appropriate to configure the MiCOM P220 relay completely.
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
8.4
P220/EN GS/B43
Page 21/22
COMPLETE CONFIGURATION OF THE MiCOM P220

The MiCOM P220 relay can be completely configured:
Either by using the interface on the front (buttons !, ", $, # and % and the
display unit);
or by using the control and setting software MiCOM S1.
You can set the protections and automatic controls of the MiCOM P220 you wish to
use in the following submenus:
[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD.
[50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT.
[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT.
[46] UNBALANCE.
[48] EXCES LONG START
[51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR.
[37] LOSS OF LOAD.
[49/38] RTD (optional).
[49] THERMISTOR + RTD (optional).
[66] START NUMBER.
MIN TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS.
RE-ACCELER AUTORISATION.
You can also set :
the binary inputs, INPUTS submenu;
the AND logic equations, AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu;
the time delays associated with AND logic equations, AND LOGIC EQUAT T
DELAY submenu;
the auxiliary output relays, AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu;
the holding of the auxiliary output contact, LATCH OUTPUT Submenu;
the tripping output relay, TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu;
the holding of the tripping command, LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu.
Other parameters can be configured:
monitoring of the breaking device, CIRDCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION
submenu;
characteristics of the disturbance recording, DISTURB RECORD submenu;
motor feeder reference name, OP PARAMETERS submenu;
motor start detection criterion, CONFIG. SELECT submenu;
allocation of illuminated indicator LED 5, LED 5 submenu;
allocation of illuminated indicator LED 8, LED 8 submenu.
For further information, refer to chapter 4 and 5 of the MiCOM P220 User Guide.
Do not forget to configure the trip output relay (Relay No. 1, terminals 2-4-6)
in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY. Submenu.
P220/EN GS/B43
Technical Guide
Getting Started
MiCOM P220
Page 22/22
9.
COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION

If you need information regarding the operation of the MiCOM product that you
have, please contact your local AREVA agent or the After Sales Service Department of
AREVA T&D. and mention the reference of your MiCOM product.
The MiCOM product references are mentioned under the upper flap of the product
front plate.
PLEASE MENTION THE FOLLOWING DATA WHEN YOU CALL US :
CORTEC code of the MiCOM relay
Serial number of the MiCOM relay
AREVAs order reference
AREVAs operator reference
AFTER SALES SERVICE DEPARTMENT ADDRESS AND PHONE/FAX NUMBER:

Service Aprs Vente/After Sales Service
AREVA T&D
95 avenue de la Banquire BP75
34975 Lattes Cedex
FRANCE
Phone : 33 (0)4.67.20.55.58 ou 33 (0)4.67.20.55.55
Fax : 33 (0)4.67.20.56.00
E-mail :franois.chupot@areva-td.com
Technical Guide
P220/EN CO/B43
MiCOM P220
Connection Diagram
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
P220/EN CO/B43
Page 1/14
CONTENTS
1.
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
1.1
MiCOM P220 typical connection
1.2
Typical application diagram
1.3
MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 6 RTD and analogue output options)
1.4
MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 2 thermistors and 4 RTD option and
analogue output options)
2.
CONNECTION
2.1
Earth connection
2.2
Auxiliary power
2.3
Current inputs
2.4
Binary inputs
2.5
Output relays
2.6
Front port connection (RS232)
2.7
RS485 rear port
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.8
Description
Connection
RS485 cable
Protocol convertor: RS232 -> K-Bus
RS232 / RS485 converter
Analogue output
9
9
10
10
10
11
2.9
RTDs
11
2.10
Thermistors
12
2.10.1 PTC type thermistors

2.10.2 NTC type thermistors
13
13
P220/EN CO/B43
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
Page 2/14
BLANK PAGE
5A
5A
5A
5A
1A
1A
1A
1A
49
S2
P2
S1
1
S2
S1
P1
5A
5A
5A
5A
1A
1A
1A
1A
49
a
22c 22a
a
24c 24a
26a
a
a
28c 28a
a
30c 30a
a
32c 32a
24
26
28
23
25
27
S1
S1
Pins terminals (pcb type)
RS 485
communication
port
Case earth
connection
Programmable
input L5
Programmable
input L4
30
23
-
19
+
21
15
+
17
28
+
13
24
+
26
(6) Important : the analogue output option shall be used either in active source mode or in passive source mode
(5) The shielding is bonded to the earth point located next to the connector.
(4) The MICOM P220 relay is shown with power supply off
5A
5A
Speed switch signal

input L2
Programmable
input L3
+
22
MiCOM
P220
(6) If analogue
output option :
If thermistor option :
If 6 RTD option :
RL5
5A
5A
RL4
RL3
RL2
RL1
WD
The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT.
1A
1A
1A
1A
Auxiliary
voltage
Switchgear status 52a

input L1
P1
CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect
(3) Earth connection are typical only
(d)
(c)
(b)
(a)
7
12
11
Module terminal bl
viewed from rear
(with integral case earth link)
Orange connector
Nota :
Earth connection (5)
(1)
2a
4a
6a
8a
10a
a
a
14c 14a
a
16c 16a
a
18c 18a
2c
4c
6c
8c
10c
S2
Case earth
P2
37
32a
30a
RTD6
RTD5
Analogue output
active source mode
common
common
RTD4
RTD3
RTD2
RTD1
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
Programmable tripping
output relay
Watch dog (4)
common
2-24 Volt
Analogue
g output
passive source mode
32c -
30c
4a
2a
2c
16a
14a
18c
16c
12a
10a
8a
12c
10c
8c
4a
2a
6c
4c
11
14
18
10
12
36
35
MiCOM P220 typical connection
S1
1.1
Alternative : Connection to 2 phase CTs + a core blanced CT.
S2
P1
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
P2
Orange connector
1.
Orange connector
Alternative :The earth current input is connected to the sommation of the three phase CTs.
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
P220/EN CO/B43
Page 3/14
P0186ENb
On
Fuse blown
External reset
Emergency
g
y startup
p
the auxiliary power could be Ac or DC according to the

model number of the relay
48
56
44
52
45
53
+ Programmable
- Input L5
+ Programmable
- Input L4
Programmable output
RL5 relay
Programmable output
RL3 relay
Watchdog
Programmable output
RL4 relay
+
-
+
-
11
14
18
36
35
37
32 a/c
26
Communication +
RS485
- 32
Speed switch signal

input L2
Programmable output
RL2 relay
Analogue output
(orange connector)
+ Programmable
- Input L3
46 5A
A
54 1A
A
2 thermistors and 4 RTD +

(orange connector) -
43
51
MiCOM P220
42
50
CT phase C
The MiCOM P220 is shown with power supply off.
23
21
19
17
15
13
10
12
41
49
Programmable
tripping
output relay
+ Contactor
status 52a
- Input L1
22
24
power
55
34
33
Emergency stop
Vaux
Signalling lamp
Klaxon
Off
Contactor coil
52a
CT phase B
Stator
temperature
Signalling
Signalling
Signalling
PLC
PC/PLC
supervisor
Ambient
temperature
Bearings
temperature
Motor
14
Vaux
Page 4/14
ATTENTION : the logic input shall be supplied by a DC auxiliary voltage only
(see
see note below))
Auxiliary
voltage
Vaux
Core balanced CT
CT phase A
1.2
Fuse
P220/EN CO/B43
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
Typical application diagram
P0187ENa
S2
S1
P1
5A
5A
5A
5A
1A
1A
1A
1A
49
S2
P2
S1
1
S2
S1
P1
5A
5A
5A
5A
1A
1A
1A
1A
49
P2
a
22c 22a
a
24c 24a
26a
a
a
28c 28a
a
30c 30a
a
32c 32a
24
26
28
23
25
27
S1
S1
RS 485
communication
port
Case earth
connection
Programmable
input L5
Programmable
input L4
30
23
-
19
+
21
15
+
17
28
+
13
24
+
26
5A
5A
Speed switch signal

input L2
Programmable
input L3
+
22
MiCOM
P220
(6) If analogue
output option :
If 6 RTD option :
RL5
5A
5A
RL4
RL3
RL2
RL1
WD
1A
1A
1A
1A
Auxiliary
voltage

input L1
P1
(d)
(c)
(b)
(a)
7
12
11
S2
P2
Case earth
Module terminal bl
viewed from rear
Orange connector
Nota :

(1)
2a
4a
6a
8a
10a
a
a
14c 14a
a
16c 16a
a
18c 18a
2c
4c
6c
8c
10c
37
32a
30a
RTD6
RTD5
Analogue output
active source mode
common
common
RTD4
RTD3
RTD2
RTD1
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
output relay
Watch dog (4)
common
2-24 Volt
Analogue
g output
passive source mode
32c -
30c
18a
16a
14a
18c
16c
12a
10a
8a
12c
10c
8c
4a
2a
6c
4c
11
14
18
10
12
36
35
Orange connector
1.3
Orange connector
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
P220/EN CO/B43
Page 5/14
MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 6 RTD and analogue output options)
P0188ENb
S2
S1
P1
5A
5A
5A
5A
1A
1A
1A
1A
49
S2
P2
S1
1
S2
S1
P1
5A
5A
5A
a
22c 22a
a
24c 24a
26a
a
a
28c 28a
a
30c 30a
a
32c 32a
24
26
28
23
25
27
S1
S1
RS 485
communication
port
Case earth
connection
Programmable
input L5
Programmable
input L4
30
23
-
19
+
21
15
+
17
28
+
13
24
+
26
5A
5A
Speed switch signal

input L2
Programmable
input L3
+
22
MiCOM
P220
(6) If analogue
output option :
If 2 thermistors and
4 RTD option :
RL5
5A
5A
RL4
RL3
RL2
RL1
WD
1A
1A
1A
1A
Auxiliary
voltage

input L1
P1
(d)
(c)
(b)
(a)
7
12
11
Module terminal bl
viewed from rear
Orange connector
Nota :
(1)
2a
4a
6a
8a
10a
a
a
14c 14a
a
16c 16a
a
18c 18a
2c
4c
6c
8c
10c
S2
Case earth
P2
37
32a
30a
32c
RTD4
Analogue output
active source mode
common
RTD3
RTD2
RTD1
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
output relay
Watch dog (4)
common
2-24 Volt
Analogue
g output
passive source mode
30c +
18a
16a
14a
18c
16c
12a
10a
8a
12c
10c
8c
4a
2a
6c
4c
11
14
18
10
12
36
35
Page 6/14
5A
1A
1A
1A
1A
49
P2
Orange connector
1.4
Orange connector
P220/EN CO/B43
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 2 thermistors and 4 RTD option and
analogue output options)
P0189ENb
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
2.
P220/EN CO/B43
Page 7/14
CONNECTION
The rear face of the MiCOM P220 relay comprises at least 2 connectors. The relay
may have an optional orange third connector dedicated to the connection:
2.1
of 6 temperature RTD sensors or 2 thermistors + 4 RTD sensors
and one analogue output
Earth connection
The case shall be earthed according to the local standards.
2.2
Auxiliary power
The auxiliary power for the MiCOM P220 relay can be either Direct (range 24 - 60
Vdc, 48-150Vdc, 130-250Vdc) or Alternating (100-250Vac 50/60Hz). The range of
voltage is specified on the relay indicator plate under the top flap of the front face.
The power should be connected to terminals 33 and 34 only.
A minimum 1.5mm wire size is recommended.
2.3
Current inputs
The MiCOM P220 relay has 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth currents.
The nominal value of current of these measuring inputs is either 1 Amp or 5 Amp
(according to the wiring diagram). The operator can, for the same relay, mix the 1
and 5 Amp inputs (phase and earth).
A minimum 2.5mm wire size is recommended.
2.4
Binary inputs
The MiCOM P220 relay has five opto-insulated logic inputs of which three are
programmable. Each input has its own polarity and it shall be powered with a dc
voltage (see chapter 3 of this guide: Technical Specifications).
The control and signalling functions to which the programmable logic inputs are
assigned can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
A minimum 1mm wire size is recommended.
NOTE:
2.5
A 52a contact (CB auxiliary contact: open when CB is opened)

shall be wired to the binary input n1 (terminals 22-24).
Output relays
Six output relays are available on the MiCOM P220 relay. Five relays are
programmable, the last relay being assigned to the signalling of an equipment fault
(WATCH DOG). All these relays are of the changeover type (1 common, 1 normally
opened, 1 normally closed).
The protection and control functions to which these relays are assigned can be
selected via the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
P220/EN CO/B43
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
Page 8/14
2.6
Front port connection (RS232)

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located
under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data communication
(asynchronous RS232 connection according the IEC870 requirements) and is
intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance).
The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin
connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows:
Pin no. 2
Tx
Transmit data
Pin no. 3
Rx
Receive data
Pin no. 5
0V
Zero volts common
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to
the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below
(if in doubt check your PC manual):
Pin no. 2
Rx
Receive data
Pin no. 3
Tx
Transmit data
Pin no. 5
0V
Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the
Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the
PC. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a
straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2,
pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5.
The cable between the MiCOM relay and the PC is a standard RS232 shielded cable
(male connector on the MiCOM relay side, usually female connector on PC side).
P0179ENb
FIGURE 1 PC<->FRONT PORT CONNECTION
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
2.7
RS485 rear port
2.7.1
Description
P220/EN CO/B43
Page 9/14
The rear RS485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection
whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to
32 relays can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical
connection.
2.7.2
Connection
The communication connection (port RS485) is assigned on terminals 31-32
according to the MiCOM P220 relay wiring diagram.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
24
51
52
26
53
54
28
55
56
Rear terminals
communication
connections
P0180ENa
FIGURE 2 RS485 CONNECTION
The total communication cable from the master unit to the farthest slave device is a
spur, and no branches may be made from this spur. The maximum cable length is
1000m and the maximum number of devices per spur is 32. Polarity is not necessary
for the 2 twisted wires.
The transmission wires should be terminated using a 150 resistor at both extreme
ends of the cable. To this effect, link terminals 30 and 32, if the relay is connected at
the end of the RS485 bus, as indicated in figure 3.
Terminal 29 of each MiCOM relay shall be connected to the RS485 cable shielding,
as mentioned figure 3.
For only one MiCOM relay connected to the RS485 bus, link terminal 29 to the case
earth as indicated in figures 2 and 3.
P220/EN CO/B43
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
Page 10/14
At the extreme end of the

RS485 bus, link terminals
30 and 32
For one and only

MiCOM relay
connected to the
RS485 bus,
terminal 29
is linked to
the case earth
Terminal 29 shall be
connected to the
RS485 cable shield
Shielding
RS485 bus
2 core screened cable
Relay connected
at the extreme
end of the RS485 bus
P0181ENa
FIGURE 3 RS485 CONNECTION
2.7.3
RS485 cable
It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length
of 1000 m or 200 nF total cable capacitance.
Typical specification:
2.7.4
Each core:
16/0.2 mm copper conductors, PVC

insulated
Nominal conductor area:
0.5 mm2 per core
Screen:
Overall braid, PVC sheathed
Linear capacitance between

conductor and earth:
100 pF/m
Protocol convertor: RS232 -> K-Bus

KITZ 101,102 and 201 can be used.
Configuration is: 19200 bauds, 11 bits, full duplex.
2.7.5
RS232 / RS485 converter

The following RS232/RS485 converters have been tested by AREVA T&D:
RS_CONV1
RS_CONV32 :
convertor suitable for a short length and for up

to 4 connected relays
industrial convertor, suitable for up to 32
connected relays.
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
2.8
P220/EN CO/B43
Page 11/14
Analogue output
The MiCOM P220 relay can include an optional analogue output assigned on the
30-32 terminals (orange coloured connector) which allows certain data and
measuring values to be reassembled on a current loop towards an automatic
controller. The selections of the type of analogue output (options: 0-20 mA or
4-20 mA) and of the type of data to be reassembled are effected in the CONFIG.
SELECT submenu.
It is recommended that a 2-core screened cable is used. The cable shield shall be
bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector.
N.B.:
The analogue output shall be used either in active source mode

(terminals 30c-32c), or in passive source mode (terminals 30a32a).
(1) If the current loop monitoring device is

not earthed (floating potential), the
cable shielding shall be bonded to the
MiCOM relay case earth connector. In
the other case, do not connect the
cable shielding.
Case earth
connector
Earthing
(1)
shielding
30c
+
Current loop
monitoring device
0-20 mA
or 4-20 mA
32c
-
MiCOM P220
orange connector
Screened cable
P0182ENa
FIGURE 4 CONNECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT IN ACTIVE SOURCE MODE
2.9
RTDs
The P220 relay can, as an option, be connected to 6 RTD's or to 4 RTDs (2
thermistors option), which enables it to monitor temperature (PROTECTION G1 or
PROTECTION G2 menu). The choice of these types of RTD sensors is effected in the
CONFIG. SELECT submenu.
It is recommended that connections between the relay and the RTD's are made using
a 3-core screened cable with a total resistance less than 25 in case of PT100,
Ni100 or Ni120 RTD. For Cu10 RTD, the cable total resistance shall be less than
2.5 . the wire also should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 Vrms. Impedance
of cores connected to both terminals 2c and 4c (see figure 5) shall be of identical
value. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector.
Each core:
7/0.2 mm, copper conductors heat

resistant PVC,
Nominal conductor ana:
0.22 mm2 per core
Screen:
Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat

resistant PVC sheathed
Conductor impedance:
Strictly identical for 2 of the 3 cores.

Accuracy difference less than 1%
P220/EN CO/B43
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
Page 12/14
Case earth
connector
earthing
shielding
2c
RTD1
4c
MiCOM P220 orange
connector
6c
Screened cable
P0183ENa
FIGURE 5 RTD CONNECTION
2.10
Thermistors
The P220 relay can, as an option, be connected to 2 thermistors which allows it to
protect against over-temperature conditions (PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2
menu). The choice between these types of thermistor is effected in the CONFIG.
SELCT submenu.
It is recommended that connections between the relay and the thermistors are made
using a screened 2-core cable with a total resistance less than 100 . The wire also
should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 Vrms. Impedance of the 2 cores shall
have similar values. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case
earth connector.
Each core:
7/0.2 mm copper conductors heat

resistant PVC
Nominal conductor ana:
0.22 mm2 per core
Screen:
Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat

resistant PVC sheathed.
Case earth
connector
earthing
Thermistor 1
shielding
2c
4c
6c
MiCOM P220
orange connector
Screened cable
P0184ENa
FIGURE 6 THERMISTOR CONNECTION
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
P220/EN CO/B43
Page 13/14
2.10.1 PTC type thermistors

For PTC type thermistor, it is usually possible to connect to the same input several
thermistors in series as indicated in figure 7.
Thermistor placed on phase A
winding
Thermistor place on
phase C winding
2c
4c
Thermistor 1 input
2a
4a
Thermistor 2 input
MOTOR
Thermistors placed on
mechanical bearings
Thermistor placed on phase B

winding
MiCOM P220
orange connector
P0185ENa
FIGURE 7 PTC THERMISTORS CONNECTED IN SERIES
2.10.2 NTC type thermistors

For NTC type thermistors, it is recommended that only one thermistor is connected to
each MiCOM relay input.
Exceptionally, certain NTC type thermistors can be connected in parallel to the same
input. However, we do not recommend such a connection.
P220/EN CO/B43
Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
MiCOM P220
Page 14/14
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
P220/EN TD/B43
MiCOM P220
Technical Data
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 1/30
CONTENTS
1.
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
1.1
Thermal replica
1.2
Short-circuit protection
1.3
Earth fault protection
1.4
Unbalance protection
1.5
Too long start-up protection
1.6
Locked rotor protection
1.7
Under current protection
1.8
RTD temperature detection or thermistors
2.
AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
2.1
Limitation of the number of start-ups
2.2
Time between 2 start-ups
2.3
Re-acceleration authorization
2.4
Logic Inputs / Auxiliary timers
2.5
Logic Equations
2.6
Logic equation time delay
2.7
Auxiliary Output Relays
2.8
Latching of the output relays
2.9
Trip Output Relay
2.10
Latching of the Trip Order
2.11
Control and monitoring of the breaker device
3.
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
3.1
Optional analogue output
3.2
Optional 6 RTD inputs
3.3
Optional 2 thermistors inputs
4.
RECORDING FUNCTIONS
4.1
Event recorder
4.2
Fault recorder
4.3
Oscillography
5.
COMMUNICATION
5.1
MODBUSTM communication
5.2
Front communication
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 2/30
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
6.
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
10
6.1
Inputs
10
6.2
Logic inputs
10
6.3
Output relays
10
6.4
Auxiliary voltage
11
7.
ACCURACY
11
8.
CT DATA
11
9.
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
11
10.
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
12
11.
ENVIRONMENT
12
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
1.
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
1.1
Thermal replica
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 3/30
Thermal current threshold 1>
0.2 to 1.5 In by steps of 0.01 In
Overload time-constant Te1
1 to 180 min by steps of 1 min
Start-up time-constant Te2
Cooling time-constant Tr
Negative sequence current recognition factor Ke 0 to 10 by steps of 1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Trip thermal threshold
Set to 100%
Trip thermal threshold hysteresis
97%
Thermal alarm threshold
20 to 100% by steps of 1%
Thermal alarm threshold hysteresis
97%
Start-up inhibition
20 to 100% by steps of 1%
Short-circuit protection
Current threshold I>>
1 to 12 In by steps of 0.1 In
Time-delays tl >>
0 to 100 s by steps of 0.01 s
Operating time
< 30 ms
Drop-off time
< 30 ms
Hysteresis
95%
Earth fault protection

Current thresholds lo>, lo>>
Ion
0.002 to 1 Ion by steps of 0.001
Time-delays tlo>, tlo>>
Operating time
< 30 ms
Drop-off time
< 30 ms
Hysteresis
95%
Unbalance protection
Negative sequence current threshold li>
Time-delays tli>
0.04 to 200 s by steps of 0.01 s
Negative sequence current threshold Ii >>
IDMT time-delay
operating time t = 1.2 / (I2/In)
Operating time
< 30 ms
Drop-off time
< 30 ms
Hysteresis
95%
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 4/30
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Too long start-up protection

Start-up detection criteria
(Closing 52) or (closing 52 +

current threshold) optional
Current threshold Istart
1 to 5 I by steps of 0.5 I
Time-delays T Istart
1 to 200 s by steps of 1 s
Locked rotor protection

Current threshold Istall
1 5 I by steps of 0,5 I
Hysteresis
95%
Time delays tlstall
0.1 60 s by steps of 0.1 s
Locked rotor at start-up detection
Yes/No
Under current protection

Current threshold I<
0.1 to 1 In by steps of 0.01 In
Time-delays tl<
Inhibition time at start-up Tinhib
Operating time
< 30 ms
Drop-off time
< 30 ms
Hysteresis
105%
RTD temperature detection or thermistors

RTD (or THERMISTOR + RTD) function -Optional YES/NO
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
2.
AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
2.1
Limitation of the number of start-ups
2.2
Number of cold starts
0 to 5 by steps of 1
Number of hot starts
0 to 5 by steps of I
Restart inhibition time Tinterdiction
Time between 2 start-ups

Re-acceleration authorization
Voltage collapse duration Treacc
2.4
Page 5/30
Reference period Treference
Inhibition time Tbetw 2 start

2.3
P220/EN TD/B43
Logic Inputs / Auxiliary timers

1Logic input
CB position
1Logic input
Speed Switch
3 Programmable Logic inputs

Logic inputs with alarm message on occurence
2 external signals, EXT1 and EXT2
Logic inputs without alarm message on occurence 2 external signals, EXT3 and EXT4
(from V3.A software version)
Timers tEXT1, tEXT2, tEXT3 and tEXT4
2.5
0 to 200 s by step of 0.01s
Logic Equations
4 AND logic equations
2.6
2.7
Logic equation time delay

Pick-up time delay
0 to 60 min by steps of 0.1 s
Reset time
0 to 60 min by steps of 0.1 s
Auxiliary Output Relays

1 Trip Output Relay (RL1)
Programmable
4 Auxiliary Output relays (RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5)
Programmable
1 watchdog relay.( for equipment default)

2.8
Latching of the output relays

Latching of the output relays (RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5)on Short-circuit, earth fault,
unbalance, AND logical gates
2.9
Trip Output Relay

1 Trip Output Relay (RL1)
Programmable
(Association of one or more information to the Trip Output Relay).

2.10
Latching of the Trip Order

Latching of the information(s) associated to the RL1.
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 6/30
2.11
Control and monitoring of the breaker device

SW Operating time alarm
0.05 to 1 by steps of 0.05 s
Number of operations alarm
0 to 50 000 operations by steps of 1
Summated contact breaking duty
106 to 4000.106 by steps of 106
Adjustment of the exponent n
1 or 2
Close command hold
Open command hold
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
3.
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
3.1
Optional analogue output
3.2
3.3
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 7/30
Rating
0-20 mA, 4-20 Ma
Insulation
2 kV
Maximum load with active source mode
500 for ratings 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Maximum voltage with passive source mode
24 Volt
Accuracy
1% full scale
Optional 6 RTD inputs

RTD type
PT100, Ni120, Ni100, Cu10
Connection type
3 wires + 1 shielding
Insulation
2 kV, active supply
Setting of thresholds
0 to 200 C by steps of 1 C
Settings of timings
Influence of thermal image
Yes/No
Optional 2 thermistors + 4 RTD inputs

Thermistor type
PTC or NTC
Setting of thresholds
100 to 30000 by steps of 100
Time-delay
Set to 2 seconds
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 8/30
4.
RECORDING FUNCTIONS
4.1
Event recorder
4.2
4.3
Capacity
75 events
Time-tag
To 1 millisecond
Triggers
Any protection alarm and threshold

Any logic input change of state
Self test events
Any setting changes
Fault recorder
Capacity
5 records
Time-tag
To 1 millisecond
Triggers
Any trip order (relay RL1 operation)
Data
Fault date
Active setting group
Faulty phase(s)
Fault type, protection threshold
Magnitude of the fault current
Phases and earth currents
magnitudes
Oscillography
Capacity
5 records of 3 s each
Sampling rate
32 samples per frequency cycle
Pre-time setting
Post-time setting
Triggers
Any protection threshold overreach

or any trip order
(relay RL1 operation)
Logic input
Remote command
Data
4 analogue channels (3 phase

currents + earth current)
Logic input and output states
Frequency value
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
5.
COMMUNICATION
5.1
MODBUSTM communication
5.2
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 9/30
Mode
RTU (standard)
Transmission mode
Synchronous
Interface
RS 485, 2 wires and 1 Earth
Data rate
300 to 38400 baud (programmable)
Relay address
1 to 255
Connection
Multi-point (32 connections)
Cable type
Half duplex (screened twisted wire pair)
Maximum cable lengt
1000 meters
Connector
Connector screws or snap-on
Insulation
2 kV RMS
Front communication
Interface
RS232
Protocol
MODBUSTM RTU
Connectors
Sub-D 9 pin female connector
Cable type
Screened twisted wire cable, no-crossed
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 10/30
6.
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
6.1
Inputs
Phase current In
1 and 5 Ampere
Earth current Ion
1 and 5 Ampere
Frequency
Range
Nominal
45 to 65 Hz
50/60 Hz
Burdens
Phase current inputs
< 0.3 VA (5A)

< 0.025 VA (1A)
< 0.01 VA at 0.1 Ion (5A)
<0.004 VA at 0.1 Ion (1A)
Earth current input

Thermal withstand of the phase
and earth current inputs
6.2
100 In - 1 s
40 In - 2 s
4 In continuous
Logic inputs
Type
Independent optical isolated
Number
5 (3 programmable, 2 fixe)
Burden
< 10 mA for each input
Recognition time
= 2.5 ms
The logic inputs shall be powered with a dc voltage.

Logic input operation
Cortec Relay auxiliary
Code voltage range*
Minimum voltage Minimum current

level (Volt)
level (milli-Amp)
24 60 Vdc
15 V
3,35 mA
48 150 Vdc
25 V
3,35 mA
130 250 Vdc
38 V
2,20 mA
110 250 Vac

* The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations for the logic inputs is 20%
6.3
Output relays
Type
Dry contact AgCdO
Number
6 (5 programmable + 1 watchdog)
Commutation capacity
Make
30 Amps for 3 s
Carry continuously 5 Amps
Break
135 Vdc, 0.3 Amps (L/R = 30 ms)
250 Vdc, 50 W resistive
250 Vdc, 25 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
220 Vac, 5 Amps (50/60Hz-cos =0.6)
Operation time
< 7 ms
Durability
> 100 000 operations
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
6.4
7.
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 11/30
Auxiliary voltage
Auxiliary voltage 3 ranges
24-60 Vdc
48-150 Vdc
130-250 Vdc /110-250 Vac
Variations
20%
Residual peak to peak ripple
12 %
Power off withstand
50 ms
Burden
<3 W standby + 0.25 for each output

relay energized in Vdc < 6 VA in Vac
ACCURACY
Protection thresholds
2%
Time delays
2 % with a minimum of 10 ms
NOTE:
8.
9.
The user shall take into consiredation the Operating Time

(30ms) of the protection functions when setting the timers to low
values.
Measurements
Typical 0.2 % at In for currents

2 C for temperatures
Pass band for measurements

of true RMS values
500Hz
CT DATA
Phases CT primary
Earth CT primary
Phases CT secondary
1 or 5
Earth CT secondary
1 or 5
Recommended phases CT
5P10 - 5VA (typical)
Recommended earth CT
Residual connection or core balanced CT

(preferred in isolated neutral systems)
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand (50/60Hz)
IEC 60255-5
BS 142
ANSI C37.90
2 kV in common mode
1 kV in differential mode
Impulse voltage (1.2/50 s)
IEC 60255-5
BS 142
5 kV in common mode
1 kV in differential
mode
Insulation resistance
EC 60255-5
> 100 M
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 12/30
10.
11.
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
High frequency disturbance IEC 61000-4-12
2.5 kV in common mode, class 3

1 kV in differential mode, class 3
Fast transient disturbance
IEC 61000-4-4
ANSI C37.90.1
4 kV auxiliary supply, class 4

2 kV other, class 4
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 61000-4-2
8 kV, class 4
Radio frequency impulse
ANSI C37.90.2
IEC 61000-4-3
35 V/m
10 V/m
ENVIRONMENT
Temperature
IEC 60255-6
Storing and transportation
Operation
40C to + 70C
25C to + 55C
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-3
56 days at 93% RH and 40C
Enclosure protection
IEC 60529
IP 52, IK 07
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1
Response and endurance, class 2
Shock and bump
IEC 60255-21-2
Response and withstand, class 1
Seismic withstand
IEC 60255-21-3
Class 2
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
12.
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 13/30
THERMAL OVERLOAD CURVES
Thermal overload characteristic curves

Thermal constant times :
- overload condition : T e1 = 12 minutes
- start-up condition : T
e2
= 6 minutes
10 000
1 000
Operating time (seconds)
Cold curve
Thermal status = 0 %
100
10
Hot curve
Thermal status = 90%
0
0.1
Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current thermal threshold

I >
10
P0159ENa
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 14/30

Cold curves
Initial thermal state of 0%
100 000
10 000
Te1 = Te2 = 60 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 54 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 48 mn
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 42 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 36 mn
100
10
Te1 = Te2 = 30 mn
Te1 = Te2 =24 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 18 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 12 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 6 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 1 mn
0
1
Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current

thermal threshold I >
10
P0160ENa
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 15/30
Thermal overload characteristic curve

Cold curves
100 000
10 000
Te1 = Te2 = 62 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 56 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 50 mn
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 44 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 38 mn
100
Te1 = Te2 = 32 mn
10
Te1 = Te2 =26 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 20 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 14 mn
1
Te1 = Te2 = 8 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 2 mn
0
10
Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the current

thermal threshold I q >
P0161ENa
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 16/30

Cold curves
100 000
10 000
Te1 = Te2 = 64 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 58 mn
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 52 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 46 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 40 mn
100
Te1 = Te2 =34 mn

10
Te1 = Te2 =28 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 22 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 16 mn
1
Te1 = Te2 = 10 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 4 mn
0
1
Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the current

10
P0162ENa
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 17/30

Hot curves
100 000
10 000
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 60 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 54 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 48 mn
100
Te1 = Te2 = 42 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 36 mn
10
Te1 = Te2 = 30 mn
Te1 = Te2 =24 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 18 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 12 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 6 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 1 mn
0
1

10
P0163ENa
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 18/30

Hot curves
100 000
10 000
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 62 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 56 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 50 mn
100
Te1 = Te2 = 44 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 38 mn
10
Te1 = Te2 = 32 mn
Te1 = Te2 =26 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 20 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 14 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 8 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 2 mn
0
10

thermal threshold >
P0164ENa
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 19/30

Hot curves
100 000
10 000
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 64 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 58 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 52 mn
100
Te1 = Te2 = 46 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 40 mn
10
Te1 = Te2 =34 mn

Te1 = Te2 =28 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 22 mn
1
Te1 = Te2 = 16 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 10 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 4 mn
0
1

10
P0165ENa
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 20/30
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Thermal state (en %)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Tr = 5 mn
Tr = 12 mn
Tr = 24 mn
Tr = 96 mn
Tr = 84 mn
Tr = 60 mn
Operating time (minutes)
Tr = 72 mn
Cooling down thermal curves

100
Tr = 48 mn
Tr = 36 mn
P0221ENa
Page 21/30
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 22/30
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
P220/EN TD/B43
Tr = 144 mn
100
Tr = 132 mn
Tr = 204 mn
200
Tr = 168 mn
Tr = 108 mn
Tr = 180 mn
Tr = 120 mn
Tr = 192 mn

Tr = 156 mn
P0222ENa
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
100
200
Tr = 300 mn
Tr = 450 mn
300
Tr = 350 mn
400
Tr = 225 mn
Tr = 375 mn
Tr = 250 mn
Tr = 400 mn
Tr = 275 mn
Tr = 425 mn

500
Tr = 325 mn
600
P0223ENa
Page 23/30
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 24/30
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
P220/EN TD/B43
Thermal state (%)
Tr = 5 mn
Tr = 12 mn
Tr = 24 mn
Tr = 96 mn
Tr = 84 mn
Tr = 60 mn
Tr = 72 mn

100
Tr = 48 mn
Tr = 36 mn
P0224ENa
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Thermal state (%)
Tr = 144 mn
100
Tr = 180 mn
200
Tr = 108 mn
Tr = 168 mn
Tr = 120 mn
Tr = 192 mn
Tr = 132 mn
Tr = 204 mn

Tr = 156 mn
300
P0225ENa
Page 25/30
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 26/30
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
P220/EN TD/B43
Thermal state (%)
100
200
300
Tr = 325 mn
500
Tr = 350 mn
Tr = 225 mn
400
Tr = 375 mn
Tr = 250 mn
Tr = 400 mn
Tr = 275 mn
Tr = 425 mn
Tr = 300 mn
Tr = 450 mn

600
P0226ENa
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 27/30
Negative phase sequence protection

Inverse time characteristic curve
Ii>> element
10
Ii>> setting range

from 0,2 to 0,8 I2/In
0
0.1
10
Ratio "Negative phase sequence current/rated current" : I2 / In

P0227ENa
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 28/30
13.
EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN THE RTD IMPEDANCE MEASURED

VALUE AND TEMPERATURE
Temperature (C)
100 OHM
Platinum ()
100 OHM
Nickel ()
120 OHM
Nickel ()
10 OHM
Copper ()
-40
84.27
79.13
92.76
7.490
-30
88.22
84.15
99.41
7.876
-20
92.16
89.23
106.41
8.263
-10
96.09
94.58
113.0
8.649
100.0
100.0
120.0
9.035
10
103.9
105.6
127.2
9.421
20
107.8
111.2
134.5
9.807
30
111.7
117.1
142.1
10.19
40
115.5
123.0
149.8
10.58
50
119.4
129.1
157.7
10.97
60
123.2
135.3
165.9
11.35
70
127.1
141.7
174.3
11.74
80
130.9
148.3
182.8
12.12
90
134.7
154.9
191.6
12.51
100
138.5
161.8
200.6
12.90
110
142.3
168.8
209.9
13.28
120
146.1
176.0
219.3
13.67
130
149.8
183.3
228.9
14.06
140
153.6
190.9
238.8
14.44
150
157.3
198.7
249.0
14.83
160
161.0
206.6
259.3
15.22
170
164.8
214.8
269.9
15.61
180
168.5
223.2
280.8
16.00
190
172.2
231.6
291.9
16.38
200
175.8
240.0
303.5
16.78
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
14.
P220/EN TD/B43
Page 29/30
EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN ANALOGUE OUTPUT SIGNAL VALUE

AND REMOTE MEASUREMENT
The hereafter table provides equivalence data between the current signal issued from
the analogue output of the MiCOM P220 and the measurement value.
Rating 0 - 20 mA :
Measurement type HMI sign
Phase A current
Unit
Variation range
Rating
0 - 20 mA
IA RMS
Ampre 0 to 2 In
Ias * 2 In / 20 mA
IB RMS
Ampre 0 to 2 In
Is s* 2 In / 20 mA
IC RMS
Ampre 0 to 2 In
Ias * 2 In / 20 mA
IE RMS
Ampre 0 to 2 In
Ias * 2 In / 20 mA
Motor thermal state
TH STATE
0 to 150 %
Ias * 150 / 20 mA
Load in % of the full

load current
% I LOAD
0 to 150 %
Ias * 150 / 20 mA
Time before a
permitted start
Tbef Start
Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes
Ias * 120 / 20 mA
Time before a thermal Tbef Trip

trip
Ias * 120 / 20 mA
RTDs temperature
Ias * 255 / 20 mA 40C
(True RMS value)

Phase A current
(True RMS value)
Phase A current
(True RMS value)
Earth current
(True RMS value)
TC RTD
- 40 to 215 C
P220/EN TD/B43
Technical Guide
Technical Data
MiCOM P220
Page 30/30
Rating 4 - 20 mA :
Measurement type HMI sign
Phase A current
Unit
Variation range
Rating
4 - 20 mA
IA RMS
Ampre 0 to 2 In
(Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA
IB RMS
Ampre 0 to 2 In
(Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA
IC RMS
Ampre 0 to 2 In
(Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA
IE RMS
Ampre 0 to 2 In
(Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA
Motor thermal state
TH STATE
0 to 150 %
(Ias 4 mA) * 150 / 16 mA
Load in % of the full

load current
% I LOAD
0 to 150 %
(Ias 4 mA) * 150 / 16 mA
Time before a
permitted start
Tbef Start
(Ias 4 mA) * 120 / 16 mA
Time before a thermal Tbef Trip

trip
(Ias 4 mA) * 120 / 16 mA
RTDs temperature
(Ias 4 mA) * 255 / 16 mA

40C
(True RMS value)

Phase A current
(True RMS value)
Phase A current
(True RMS value)
Earth current
(True RMS value)
NOTE :
TC RTD
- 40 to 215 C
Ias is the value of the current signal generated by the

analogue output.
In the case where the measurement value to remote through
the analogue output is outside the permissible variation
range, the current signal is restricted to the limit value of the
variation range.
In the case where the thermal alarm ALARM is not
energised, the current signal value meaning the time before a
thermal trip Tbef Trip is equal to 20 mA.
Technical Guide
P220/EN AP/B43
MiCOM P220
Application Guide
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 1/40
CONTENTS
1.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS AFFECTING SETTINGS
1.1
Induction motors
1.1.1
General
1.1.2
Thermal model
1.1.3
Start-up
1.1.4
Short circuits
1.1.5
Motor Duty rating
1.1.6
Motor rating as a function of altitude and of temperature
1.2
Environment
1.2.1
Fused contactor or circuit breaker
1.2.2
Residually connected or core-balance current transformers.
1.2.3
Choice of CT secondary (1A/5A) and of cross-section of secondary wiring.
1.2.4
Dimensioning of phase CT
1.3
Characteristics acquisition
2.
SETTING FUNCTIONS
2.1
PROTECTION Menu
2.1.1
Thermal overload [49]
2.1.2
Short Circuit.[50/51]
15
2.1.3
Earth fault [50N/51N]
15
2.1.3.1 Neutral earthed through an impedance
16
2.1.3.2 Insulated neutral :
17
2.1.3.3 Solidly earthed neutral
17
2.1.4
Unbalance [46]
17
2.1.5
Excessive long start [48]
18
2.1.6
Locked rotor [51LR/50S]
19
2.1.6.1 Locked rotor during the start-up stage [50S]
19
2.1.6.2 Rotor stalled during normal run [51LR]
20
2.1.7
Loss of load [37]
20
2.1.8
RTD probe [49/38] and Thermistor [49]
20
2.2
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu
21
2.2.1
Limitation of the number of start-ups during a given period of time [66]
21
2.2.2
Time between two successive start-ups [66]
22
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 2/40
2.2.3
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Re-acceleration
22
2.2.3.1 Authorisation of re-acceleration
23
2.2.3.2 Load shedding on voltage dip
23
3.
EXAMPLE OF NUMERICAL APPLICATION
25
3.1
Network data
25
3.2
Motor data:
25
3.3
List of settings:
26
4.
SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
30
4.1
Logic selectivity
30
4.2
Authorisation of re-acceleration Load shedding on voltage dips
33
4.3
Setting groups
35
5.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
36
6.
APPENDIX A : SERVICE DUTY
37
7.
APPENDIX B : INFORMATION NEEDED FOR ADJUSTMENT
39
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 3/40
1.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS AFFECTING SETTINGS
1.1
Induction motors
1.1.1
General
Currently the majority of motors used in industry are induction and this application
guide deals with these motors. The P220 relay can nevertheless be used as
multifunction relay to protect a high-power synchronous motor. In this case, one
should draw on the principles of protection of synchronous generators, the
characteristics of synchronous generators being very close to those of synchronous
motors.
1.1.2
Thermal model
The physical and electrical construction of the motor is very complex, the various
applications, the variety of the possible conditions of abnormal operations and the
various modes of failures which can occur make the relations of its thermal state very
complex. This is why, it is difficult to create a mathematical model of the thermal
characteristics of the machine.
There are two principal causes of damage to motors, short-circuits and heating of the
windings. With regard to the heating, it is possible to model the heat propagation
within the motor.
In a sequence of heating at a constant current, the temperature of the motor

varies with time similar to the charge of a capacitor under a constant voltage
applied via a resistor. The applied voltage is proportional to the square of the
current. The time-constant of the phenomenon is then = RC.
So the thermal image takes into consideration the fact that the temperature of the
motor is proportional to the square of the absorbed current.
TEMPERATURE = K. (IR).(1-e-t/)
With
IR = current circulating in the Motor and producing Tmax.
For a current value I, the temperature is
TEMPERATURE = K. (I).(1-e-t/)
This results in :
The time t during which the motor can support the overload current I is:
t = . Ln [ 1/ { 1- ( IR / I) }]
There are three stages of heat exchange, each of them having its own time-constant:
The start (the value of current >2*[I>], [I>] being the threshold of
thermal overload current) during which the temperature of the copper stator
windings grows before diffusing heat into the laminations, and the
temperature of the rotor rises quickly,
The common overload (the value of current between 0 and 2*[I>]), the
current being close to nominal or a few percentage points higher. The
phenomenon consists of a slow thermal diffusion process through the mass
of the rotor and the stator.
The cooling-down (motor stopped), which is a slower phenomenon

compared to the heating-up since the air gap is not cooled by the rotor fan.
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 4/40
The simulation takes into account the square of the positive phase sequence
component of the current, plus the product of the square of the negative
component of the current by a factor Ke, to give the equivalent thermal current
Ieq: Ieq = I12 + KxI2 2

NOTE:
1.1.3
The presence of the negative sequence component of voltage

across the motor terminals creates a pulsating current with a
frequency of 2 inside the rotor. This overheats the rotor
considerably. The inclusion of the factor Ke in the equation
above allows for the additional heating in the rotor.
Negative sequence components can be created by:
an unbalanced three phase load
the presence of an external asymmetrical fault,
the loss of one or two phases.
Start-up
Induction motors can be started ;
direct-on-line
star-delta
through an auto-transformer
with a liquid starter,
by the addition of external rotor resistance
with an electronic starter
These limit the rotor torque and the rotor current to acceptable limits
Depending on the type of start, the magnitude of the start-up current fluctuates and
can even become zero (for example, during the change of connection types in a stardelta start-up). It is thus advisable to consider, the total duration of the sequence as
being the start up time.
The duration of start-up depends on the characteristics of the load and the motor
and, therefore, cannot be derived only from the characteristics of the motor. By way
of illustration one can consider the following equation:
td = J
2N
1
,
60
Cam
where
td :
start time
J:
moment of inertia of the load + motor set measured about the motor
shaft, in kgm2
N:
speed of rotation, in RPM
Cam : average accelerating torque, in Nm
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 5/40
The start-up current depends on the characteristics of the motor and the type of start
(direct on_line, soft).
1.1.4
In the case of direct-on-line start-up (100% of the nominal voltage is applied

across the terminals) the currents are large and can reach values up to 10 times
higher than the rated current of the motor, a typical average value being of order
of 5 times the rated current.
During soft start-ups, however the current can remain at the rated motor values.
However, one should remember that during the re-acceleration stages (caused by
a provisional, total or partial, loss of voltage), the motor will absorb a reacceleration current equal to its direct start-up current. This must be taken into
account when adjusting the Locked rotor and Short-circuit functions.
Short circuits
In the event of a short-circuit close to the motor, the motor will feed the fault by
transforming its kinetic energy into electric power. The resulting current is of short
duration: a few hundreds of milliseconds, except for the high-inertia motors where
the current can last several seconds. In the first moments, the amplitude of this
current is as high as that of the direct-on-line start-up current. Therefore, the
constraints to be taken into account when setting the Locked Rotor and Shortcircuit functions are the same as for the re-acceleration, and this contribution to the
fault current should not activate these two functions.
When calculating a possible short-circuit currents on the network, it will be necessary
to take into account the contribution of motors to the fault current. This current
contribution may even exceed double the fault current value during the first 100
milliseconds. Consequently, they affect the setting of instantaneous current base
protections and the rating of the equipment to withstand the fault currents.
1.1.5
Motor Duty rating

The duty ratings can be:
Continuous
Temporary
Intermittent (periodic)
The manufacturers of motors oversize their power by a factor depending on the

service duty. For the service duty chosen, one also obtains the maximum number of
motor starts per hour (or, in other words, a motor will tolerate more or less starts per
hour depending on its oversizing).
1.1.6
Motor rating as a function of altitude and of temperature

As the altitude increases, the air becomes more rarefied so the quality of the motor
cooling deteriorates. Because of this a correction factor being a function of the
altitude must be applied.
Likewise, as the ambient temperature rises, the efficiency of cooling decreases. This
should be taken into account by applying a correction factor.
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 6/40
Shown below is a monogram relating the derating factors applicable to motors at

various altitudes.
Temperature correction factor
40C
45C
50C
55C
80C
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1000
2000
altitude (m)
3000
P0169ENa
The P220 relay . incorporates these derating factors within the relay. The correction is
linear between 40C (correction factor =1) and 65C (correction factor = 0,75).
For this purpose, the relay measures the ambient temperature using an external RTD
(resistance temperature detector) probe. This RTD probe is usually placed near the
cooling air inlet of the motor.
1.2
Environment
1.2.1
Fused contactor or circuit breaker

The majority of motors, especially the low-power ones, are connected to the network
via a fused contactor or fused switch. This breaking device may not have sufficient
breaking capacity to interrupt the fault (short-circuit) current. The fault current can
easily reach values of up to ten times the rated current of the motor. Consequently,
when the current exceeds the breaking capacity of the contactor, contactor tripping
should be disabled. This tripping would generate a permanent arc across the contacts
leading to the destruction of the contactor. Back up fuse protection must be used to
ensure that the contactor/switch is not destroyed in the event of excessive current flow.
This problem does not arise when a circuit breaker is used.
1.2.2
Residually connected or core-balance current transformers.

The readings of the zero-sequence current which is characteristic of an earth fault can
be taken either:
by residual connection of the 3 phase current transformers (CT) (connecting in

parallel the 3 CTs and adding up the secondary currents),
or by the use of a core balance current transformer with a core incorporating the
3 phase conductors (adding up of the magnetic fields inside the core).
If the neutral of the network is grounded through a limiting impedance or, isolated in
the case of an insulated neutral, a core balance current transformer is preferred as it
avoids the possible problems of a false zero-sequence current created by the
asymmetrical saturation of the phase CTs, or even the complete saturation of one of
them during the start-up. These currents can reach values up to several times the
motor rated current (typically 5 Inmotor), and this phenomenon can be aggravated by
the magnetisation of CTs when opposite retentive fluxes exist in the CTs.
These shortcomings may be overcome by employing suitable earth fault settings and
by careful selection of the CTs, but the use of a core balance transformer is
recommended.
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
1.2.3
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 7/40
Type of grounding
Preferential solution
Solution alternative
Solidly earthed neutral

point
3 CT (+a stabilising
resistance)
3 CT + core balance
transformer
Neutral earthed through

impedance (ex: current
limited to30A by a
resistance)
3 CT + core balance
transformer
3 CT (+a stabilising
resistance), or
Insulated neutral
3 CT + core balance
transformer
2 CT + core balance
transformer (cost-effective
solution)
2 CT + core balance
transformer (cost-effective
solution)
Choice of CT secondary (1A/5A) and of cross-section of secondary wiring.

A current transformer (phase CT or balance-core current transformer) must supply the
power consumed by:
its internal resistance (design feature of CT)
the secondary wiring (cross-section 2.5 mm2, 4mm2, 6mm2)
connected loads (one or more protection relays etc.)
If the protection relay is situated at a considerable distance from CTs, the load
constituted by the wiring cannot be considered to be negligible:
Example:
relay 200 m distant from CTs
rated secondary current 5A
wiring: copper, cross-section 2.5 mm2
calculation of cable consumption:
cable length = 2 x 200m = 400m
cable resistance R = 0.4 km x 18 / 2.5 mm2 = 2.9
Hence the cable losses = 2.9 x (5A)2 = 73 W.
If the rated secondary current is chosen to be 1A, the cable losses are
cable resistance R = 0.4 km x 18 / 2.5 mm2 = 2.9
hence the wiring consumption is = 2.9 x (1A)2 = 2.9 W
If the CTs are not in close proximity to the relay it is advisabe to use 1A CTs to
minimise the cable losses and to reduce the burden on the CTs.
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 8/40
1.2.4
Dimensioning of phase CT
The consumption of the phase current input terminals of the MiCOM P220 relay is:
0.3 VA
In = 5A
0.025 VA
In = 1A
The rule to follow in the case of CT saturation is:
The threshold for the short-circuit current should be set below 90% of the limiting
overload current of CTs. Under these conditions the tripping is guaranteed for
fault currents up to 50 times the value of saturation current without an aperiodic
component of CT current.
Choice of phase CTs:
Applications only for voltages 20 kV
Rf = total resistance of the wiring (+ other possible loads on CT), in Ohms
In = rated secondary current for CT and relay (1A or 5 A)
Icc = maximum symmetrical three-phase fault current of the secondary wiring of

CT (in Amps).
Phase CT
CT rating
Breaking
device
(IEC 185)
Note
Load in VA
Accuracy
Contactor or
Switch
5A
(0.3 + Rf x In2)
5P10
+ Fuse
1A
(0.025 + Rf x In2)
5P10
5A
(0.3 + Rf x In2)
5P K with
Icc
Setting of the
50 In threshold of short-
Circuitbreaker
1A
(0.025 + Rf x In2)
5P K with
Icc
50 In
K
NOTE:
1.3
circuit current:
0.9 x K x In
For economic reasons, a CT with a 10% accuracy (10P) can be

used instead of one with 5% (5P), however the thresholds of
thermal overload and unbalance protections will be less precise,
which can be perfectly acceptable if the motor has been
oversized in relation to its duty or not used for heavy-duty
services.
Characteristics acquisition
Before setting the relay it is vital to ensure that the correct motor parameters detailed
in appendix have been obtained.
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
2.
SETTING FUNCTIONS
2.1
PROTECTION Menu
2.1.1
Thermal overload [49]
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 9/40
Overloads can result in excessive stator temperature rises in excess of the thermal
limit of the winding insulation. Whilst this may not cause the motor to burn out
immediately, it has been shown that the life of the motor can be shortened if these
overloads persist. The life of the motor is not purely dependant on the temperature of
the windings but on the time that it is exposed to these temperatures. Due to the
relatively high thermal storage capacity of induction motors, infrequent overloads of a
short duration may be tolerated without damage. Sustained overloads of a small
percentage may result in premature ageing and insulation failure.
In the same way, an unevenly distribution of load or a slight unbalance of the
network brings about the appearance of negative sequence currents which also
contribute to the heating of the rotor (for more details, see the negative overcurrent
protection function).
The motor temperature varies exponentially with the increase of the current. Similarly,
the temperature decreases in the same way. So to provide a close sustained overload
protection, the relay incorporates three thermal time constants, thanks to which the
thermal reproduction of the relay is paired narrowly with the protected motor during
heating and cooling conditions.
The thermal withstand capability of the motor is affected by heating in the winding
prior to the fault. The thermal replica is designed to take into account the extremes of
zero pre-fault current, known as the cold condition, and full rated pre-fault current,
known as the hot condition. With no pre fault current, the relay will be operating on
the cold curve. When the motor is , or has been, running at full load prior to a
fault, the windings will already be dissipating heat and the hot curve is applicable.
Therefore, during normal operation, the relay will be operating within these two
limits, unless programmed to do otherwise.
However, it should be noted that the overload protection includes the monitoring of
both the stator and the rotor. This protection can be realised in various ways:
1: direct measurement through the use of temperature sensors (see the

corresponding paragraphs),
2: indirect measurement by the means of current measurement,
3: by a combination of the two preceding principles.
The P220 relay design combines all three principles listed. No.1 is detailed below in
the paragraph dealing with overload protection through the use of temperature
sensors. No.2 and No.3 are described in this paragraph.
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 10/40
In the case of minor overloads and of light-duty service conditions, stator current
measurement is sufficient to ensure protection. This control can be achieved using a
time-independent current threshold setting for a definite time overcurrent protection
or, still better, IDMT overcurrent protection. The thermal protection elements which
are overheated by a fraction of the main current, have a time-constant which is very
close to that of the motor. This makes it possible to obtain a real-time image of the
thermal status of insulation. This type of protection takes into account the fact that the
steady-state temperature of the motor is proportional to the square of the absorbed
current, the protection is also provided with a cold curve and a hot curve to ensure
that the relay takes into account the initial motor temperature.
The thermal protection described above makes use of current measurement to protect
the motor. Hence it will monitor balanced and unbalanced overloads. The thermal
time-constant is adjustable in order to match any type of motor. The positive (I1) and
negative (I2) components of the current are composed together in order to result in a
equivalent thermal current replica of the temperature of the motor.
2
This equivalent thermal current is given by the equation : Ieq = (I1 + Kex I2 ),
where Ke is an adjustable parameter used to account for the effects of heating
produced by the negative component of the current when developing the thermal
image.
From this equivalent thermal current, the thermal state of the motor is calculated
every 5 cycles (every 100ms for a network of 50 Hz or 83.3ms for 60 Hz) by the relay
in accordance with the following formula.
i+1 = (Ieq/I>) . [1-e(-t/T) ] + i . e(-t/T)
i : is the initial thermal state.
If the absorbed current is less than the thermal overload threshold [I>], thus typically
less
than
the
nominal
current
or
the
full
load
current,
then
the thermal state will be less than 100% , so no tripping occurs.
If the absorbed current is greater than the thermal overload threshold [I>], in this
case the thermal state will be greater than 100% and so tripping will take place.
In the thermal model selected, the time of tripping depends on the initial state of the
motor. The equation used to calculate the tripping time for a thermal state of the
motor at 100 % is:
2
t = T x ln[ (K - i) / (K -1)]
The equation is valid for currents whose value is constant over a certain period of
time, where:
the value of T, thermal time-constant which depends on the value of the ratio
Ieq / I:
T = Te1
if 0 < Ieq 2*I
(overload curve )
T = Te2
(start-up curve )
if Ieq > 2*I
T = Tr
Ieq=0
(cooling curve motor stopped)
if
NOTE:
Ieq = 0 is obtained through the logic input No.1 of the relay

which recovers the information contactor position open.
I = thermal current threshold setting
K = Ieq/ I
i = initial thermal state of the motor (ex.: thermal state of 50% ! i=0.5)
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 11/40
The heating time-constant Te1 can be estimated from the motor heating curve as
shown below.
Motor heating curve
Temperature
m
0.632 m
Te
Time
P0170ENa
This curve corresponds to the following law:

(t)
= m * (1 e-t/Te) ,
Where:
m
Te
t
=
=
maximum temperature after stabilisation of heat exchange,

in degrees C
heating time-constant
time elapsed
The heating time-constant can be clearly defined. When a motor is absorbing its
rated current indefinitely, it reaches 63.2% of its steady-state temperature (T =
63.2% m) after one time-constant Te.
The cold curve of the motor is thus given by:
2
t = Tr x ln[ K / (K 1)]
Where the equation for the motor cooling temperature is given by.
= K (1 e t/Tr ).
When the motor is stopped, the rotor fan cooling is stopped also, hence the motor
cooling down is few efficient. This causes the cooling time-constant to increase
considerably This constant is generally much longer than the heating time-constant.
In order to compensate for this phenomenon and to obtain a correct thermal replica,
the cooling time constant is used by the relay.
An adjustable cooling time-constant (Tr) is provided in order to take into account the
various modes of cooling.
The cooling time-constant Tr can be estimated from the motor cooling curve in the
following way:
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 12/40
Motor cooling-down curve
Temperature
0.368 m
Tr
Time
P0171ENa
This curve corresponds to the following law:

(t) = m * e-t/Tr,
Where:
m
Tr
t
=
=
=
maximum temperature when motor is stopped

cooling time-constant
time elapsed
The cooling time-constant can be clearly defined . When a motor is stopped, its
internal temperature decreases with time. This internal temperature reaches 36,8% of
the initial temperature (temperature at the time when the motor was turned off) at the
end of the period, which is equal to its time-constant Tr.
The P220 relay also has:
a thermal alarm to inform the user (when in operation mode) if the motor is likely
to become overloaded before a trip occurs. Remedial action can then be taken
before the motor is tripped.
Inhibition of a thermal tripping during starting
During the start-up stage (i.e. during the parametrically defined start-up delay time
tIstart), it is possible to inhibit thermal tripping. When thermal inhibition during start-up
is enabled, the calculation of the thermal state during the start-up delay time tIstart
remains effective but should this value exceed 90%, the value of the thermal state
would be retained at 90%. When the start-up delay time expires, the thermal
inhibition during start-up disappears. This function does not affect the operation of
the thermal alarm feature.
This inhibition during start-up can be useful for certain motors which can withstand a
locked rotor for a very short time but normally have very long start up times. This can
be the case of certain motors started using reduced voltage. The time-constant Te2 is
then set to take into account rapid heating which occurs if the rotor is locked,
whereas the motor would be thermally protected during the start-up stage by the
function Start-up too long and, as the case may be, by the temperature sensors.
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 13/40
Thermal prohibition of restart
To a certain extent, the thermal overload protection can limit the number of startups by selecting a curve located just above the point of start-up. It is is actually
very difficult to satisfy the manufacturers recommendations, for the limit of the
number of starts by the thermal overload protection. This may allow the motor to
start and then to exceed the maximum temperature.
The purpose of the "Thermal prohibition of start-up "function is to avoid thermal

tripping during the start-up sequence of the motor. The motor will have to cool down
before it will be authorised to start.
The tripping time for the thermal replica protection is calculated in the following way:
ttrip = T * ln { [(Ieq / I>)2 - initial] / [(Ieq / I>)2 - 1] }
(1)
in order to avoid thermal tripping during the start-up stage, ttrip > td.
Therefore, according to (1),
td < Te2 * ln { [(Id / I>)2 - forbid start] / [(Id / I>)2 - 1] }
Hence it follows that the setting of the threshold of prohibition of start-up forbid
must be lower than:
forbid start < [(Id / I>)2 * (1 exp(td / Te2))] + exp
start
(td / Te2)
Where:
Id
td
Te2
I>
ttrip
=
=
=
=
=
actual start-up current,

actual start-up time,
thermal time-constant at the moment of start-up,
current threshold of thermal overload,
time of tripping for the thermal replica protection.
Thermal image influenced by the ambiant temperature
At the beginning of this paragraph we said that the overload protection afforded by
the P220 relay can also be ensured by a combination of a temperature sensor (direct
heating measurement), and a current measurement (indirect heating measurement).
In this case, it is possible to modify the calculated thermal image of the motor by
making use of information about the temperature outside of the motor. The
programmed thermal current threshold can be corrected using correction factors to
give a more precise representation of the thermal state of the motor.
This thermal current threshold correction factor is applied automatically by the relay
when calculating the thermal state of the motor if this facility is set on.
The values of this factor is given below:
Ambient temperature
40
45
50
55
60
65
Thermal current threshold

correction factor (Coef)
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.75
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 14/40
A typical setting of the thermal protection is :
Thermal overload current threshold [I >] : between 105% et 108% (max.) of

the motor rated current (this threshold is typically equivalent to the full load
current).
NOTE:
The nominal current : is the current value for which the moteur
supplies his maximum efficiency.
The Full Load current : is the limit value of the thermal current
value of the motor with the time under its continuous duty rating
(This term is used in North of America)
Negative sequence current recognition factor : [Ke] = 3
Heating time-constants (Te1), during the start-up (Te2) and the cooling-down
time constants (Tr):
The manufacturer should be consulted for the heating and cooling time
constants.
Te1 must be set to be equal to, or even slightly lower than the motor
manufacturers value ( Stator thermal heating).
Te2 must be typically set to be lower than or equal to Te1. It is used to
modify the thermal curve of the motor during the start phase . In case of
a SOFT start, (Yye/Delta) for example, the current absorbed by the
motor after the start phase is 57% of the current controlled by the relay
(Delta connection) while durning the start phase ( Yye connection), the
current absorbed by the motor is equal to the current monitored by the
relay. For that, Te2 is used to reduce the operating time during the start
up. For application with Direct-on-line start up, adjust Te2=Te1, which
results in one thermal curve.
It is important to plot the thermal characteristics chosen to assure that
the COLD curve has no intersection area with the start up
charactersistics. In certain applications, the time constants could not be
available. However, a graphical presentation of these values could be
given. In this case, Te1 should be selected so once it is plotted, it will
match the cold motor curve.
For applications where neither constant time values nor thermal curves
are given, Te1 and Te2 should be chosen in such a way that they fall
above the start up characteristics but below the motor locked Rotor
current threshold. In this way, the thermal overload protection assure to
a certain degree the protection under locked rotor conditions.
The cooling-down time-constant Tr should ideally be set slightly higher
than the value provided by the manufacturer.
This element is important with motors having differents functionning
cycles because the precise information of the motor thermal state is
needed during heating and cooling phases. Il is usually a multiple of
Te1.
REMARK: IF HOWEVER THE MANUFACTURERS DATA ARE NOT KNOWN, ONE SHOULD SET
THE FOLLOWING VALUES: TE1 = TE2 = 14MIN AND TR = 28MIN.
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
2.1.2
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 15/40
Alarm threshold ALARM: Its setting is primarily related to the motor operation
modes and the concept of protection. A typical adjustment consists of setting the
threshold ALARM to be slightly higher than the ratio (Irated motor / I>)2 , which
generally corresponds to a value of about 90%.
Short Circuit.[50/51]
A phase to phase short-circuit at the terminals of the motor or in the feeder cables,
draws very large currents capable of damaging the motor and its feeder cable This
also poses the threat of fire within the motor room.
In this case ,it is essential to detect the fault and to send the tripping command
rapidly to the breaking device. To attain these objectives, the P220 relay is provided
with an overcurrent element operating on fundamental component, with a settable
definite time delay.
The current threshold must be set as low as possible, without tripping due to
the start-up current of the motor
the contribution of the motor to an external fault as well as
the re-acceleration current due to voltage drops.
In order to achieve this, the direct on-line start-up current must always be taken into
account in the calculation of the setting even if the motor started under reduced
voltage (soft start). Thus the short-circuit current threshold must be set higher than the
direct on-line start-up current value.
Taking into account aperiodic current components, the typical settings are:
[I>>] = 130% x kstart x Inmotor
and
[tI>>] = 100ms
[I>>] = 180% x kstart x Inmotor
and
[tI>>] = 0 ms
where kstart : start-up current of the motor in per unit.

It should then be checked that the threshold [I>>] is lower than :
90% of the limiting saturation current of the CTs used, and
1/3 of the minimum three-phase fault current at the motor terminals.
IMPORTANT:
2.1.3
IF A FUSED CONTACTOR IS USED TO CONTROL THE MOTOR , THE SHORT

CIRCUIT PROTECTION MUST NOT TRIP THE CONTACTOR. THE SHORT
CIRCUIT PROTECTION MUST BE DISABLED AND THE FUSE SHOULD
INTERRUPT THE FAULT CURRENT. IF THE CONTACTOR IS ALLOWED TO
INTERRUPT FAULT CURRENT, SERIOUS DAMAGE COULD BE CAUSED DUE
TO EXCESSIVE ARCING AT THE CONTACTS.
Earth fault [50N/51N]

Overheating of the stator windings is likely to lead to insulation deterioration. Since
the windings are surrounded by an earthed metal case, stator faults usually manifest
themselves as earth faults.
To protect against this, the P220 relay is provided with two independent earth fault
overcurrent elements with settable definite time delays. This function reacts only to the
fundamental component of the earth fault current, and thus remains insensitive to the
disturbances of the higher-order harmonics (equal to or higher than 2).
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 16/40
The earth fault protection function may be provided either by residual connection of
the 3 phase current transformers (CTs), or by the use of a core-balance current
transformer.
It is preferable to use a core balance current transformer as this is more stable and is
more sensitive. If residually connected CTs are used, the tripping setting would have
to be increased by as much as 10 % higher than the rated current of the CT. This is
highly undesirable because of the resulting increase in the earth fault current setting.
Incorrect tripping can result from the saturation of one or more CTs during motor
starting. Increased stability can be achieved in two ways :
increasing the current threshold,
insertion of a stabilising resistance in series with the P220 relay.
The value of stabilising resistor can be found from the following equation.
Rstab > (Id / Is) * (RCT + 2*Rf + RRE),
where:
Id
start-up current magnitude brought to the secondary
Is
earth fault setting in Amps (threshold Io> or Io>>)
RCT
dc resistance of CT secondary windings.
Rf
resistance of single lead from CT to relay
RRE
other resistances connected in series to the CT (relays etc.)
The following earthing systems may be employed.

2.1.3.1 Neutral earthed through an impedance
The earth fault current is mainly comprising active current component resulting from
the resistance of neutral point, the capacitive zero sequence (residual) contribution
from the cables being of much lower value, even negligible.
Typical settings are :
in the case of a residual connection to three phase CTs:
[Io>>] is higher than 10% of the CT rated primary current, and
2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from the motor
feeder cables in case of external fault, and
lower than the residual current resulting from the resistance of neutral point,
and
[t Io>>] = 100 ms
in the case of a core balance transformer.
[Io>>] is 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from
the motor feeder cables in case of external fault, and
lower than the residual current resulting from the resistance of neutral point,
[tIo>>] = 100 ms
Note that current settings lower than 1 Amps are usually not applied.
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 17/40
2.1.3.2 Insulated neutral :

A core balanced transformer is used as the fault current is due to the cable capacitive
leakage current.
A single earth fault will not cause the relay to trip but the fault should be localised .
[ Io>> ] is 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from
the motor feeder cables in case of external fault, and
lower than the capacitive residual current resulting from the other cables,
[tIo>>] = 100 ms.
Note that current settings lower than 1 Amps are usually not applied.
If these settings are not compatible with the maximum value of the earth fault current,
it is then necessary to use a directional earth fault relay.
2.1.3.3
Solidly earthed neutral

The earth fault current is mainly inductive current, with magnitude being close to that
of the three-phase short-circuit fault currents. The contribution of capacitive residual
current from the cables is negligible.
2.1.4
in the case of a residual connection to three phase CTs:
[Io>>] is higher than 10% of the CT rated primary current, and
[tIo>>] = 100 ms
Unbalance [46]
Under normal motor running conditions only positive sequence current components
flow. The presence of a negative sequence component produces a field revolving in
an opposite direction to that of the rotor. It induces rotor winding currents at double
the supply network frequency. The skin effect in the rotor winding bars at this
frequency can cause a significant increase in the resistance of the rotor. The rotor will
overheat leading to deformation of the rotor bars and damage to them. This imposes
additional heating of the stator that is in excess of the manufacturers rating.
Even if the thermal protection provided by this relay takes into account negative
sequence component of the current, it will not account for the additional heating due
to high unbalance rate. In the event of the motor losing one phase of its supply,
considerable overheating would occur, hence protection for negative sequence is
employed separately
In order to provide this function, the P220 relay is equipped with two independent
negative sequence overcurrent elements. The first one, denoted by [Ii>], is an alarm
threshold associated with an adjustable constant time. The second, denoted [Ii>>], is
a threshold of tripping associated with a inverse time characteristic curve. The
features of this curve are described in chapter 5.3 of this technical guide.
The equation of this curve is :
for 0.2 < (I2/In) < 2 --> t = 1.2 / (I2/ In)
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 18/40
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
This type of curve has the following advantages:

1.
For an external fault:
to desensitise the relay during a violent unbalance fault occurring upstream or on

external feeders, when the motor temporarily behaves like a negative current
generator ; selective tripping at the faulty feeder level is secured - the inverse time
characteristic curve allows co-ordination with the faulty feeder protection relay.
to avoid nuisance tripping which may occur due to high starting currents causing
the CTs to saturate.
2.
For a motor fault.

To ensure rapid fault interruption, but to retain co-ordination with protective fuses
when fused contactors are used.
It should be noted that the single-phase and two-phase faults also generate negative
currents. However, the value of the single-phase fault current is generally limited, and
in any case these faults are eliminated by relevant protection with a time shorter than
that afforded by the IDMT curve.
Typical settings are
2.1.5
alarm threshold : [Ii>] = 15% of the motor rated current, with a delay time of
about 8 to 10s,
tripping threshold : [Ii>>] = 20% of the motor rated current.
Excessive long start [48]

The start-up current is specific to each motor and depends on the start-up method
used (direct on-line, autotransformer, rotor resistance insertion, etc.). As for the startup time, it is dependent of the load connected to the motor.
During the start-up period, this current surge imposes a thermal strain on the rotor.
This is exaggerated as the rotor will have lost all of its ventilation because it does not
rotate at the full speed. Consequently, a long start-up causes a rapid heating of the
motor. For this reason, this protection is complementary to the thermal overload
protection, and makes it possible to check that the start-up sequence does not exceed
the parameters given by the manufacturer
The MiCOM P220 relay offers the choice of motor start-up detection as follows :
closure of the contactor/circuit breaker, or
closure of the contactor/circuit breaker and overshoot of the starting current

threshold [Istart].
The user can configure either option using the CONFIGURATION menu. Method 1 is
recommended. This detects the start sequence on the circuit breaker closure.
The function " Excessive long start " is initiated either by the detection of a start-up
sequence, or (under normal operation) by the detection of a phase of re-acceleration.
If at the end of delay time [tIstart] the current remains higher than the threshold [Istart],
then a trip takes place.
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 19/40
[Istart] is equal to:

1.5*[I>] if the motor start-up current is lower than 4 times the rated
current;
2*[I>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 4 times the
rated current and lower than 8 times the rated current;
rated current.
2.1.6
[tIstart] = 120 % of the time of start-up and shorter than withstand time for the
motor.
Locked rotor [51LR/50S]

There are two possible conditions for the rotor becoming locked : at motor start-up or
during normal run. Whatever the case, a locked rotor produces an input current
equivalent to the direct on-line starting current.
The most frequent cause of a locked rotor is to a phase break (eg: melting of a fuse
protecting the motor, or one pole of a contactor remaining open.). A stationary motor
can not start and remains stationary with two phases feeding the stator. In the same
way, a locked rotor can take place after the loss of a phase after the motor has been
working normally. The appearance and the importance of a locked rotor depend on
the motor load at the time when the loss of phase occurs. In both cases the result is
likely to be a thermal overloading of the rotor windings.
Under healthy conditions, a revolving flux is induced in the rotor, which generates
balanced rotor current in the windings which produce symmetrical rotor heating. In
the event of the loss of one phase of the supply, a heterogeneous flux is induced in
the rotor as a result of the positive component and the negative components of the
current. This causes uneven heating of the rotor windings which depend on the
position of the rotor bars. This can lead to the damage of the rotor bars. For these
reasons, it is important to eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.
2.1.6.1 Locked rotor during the start-up stage [50S]

This function is enabled only during the motor start-up stage. In order to take
advantage of this function, the motor has to be equipped with a tachometric control,
which indicates if the motor turns. This information is carried to a digital input of the
relay so that the relay can detect whether the motors speed is or is not zero. A locked
rotor is detected if, after expiration of delay time [tIstall], the digital input indicates zero
speed (logic 0).
Motors for which the real start-up time is shorter than their locked rotor withstand
time can be protected against locked rotor condition at start-up without the help of a
tachymetric control device (speed switch). For such cases, the use of [tIstart] time setting
(refer to [48] Excessive long start function) shorter than the motor locked rotor
withstand time allows to provide efficient protection against both too long start-up
sequence and locked rotor at start-up conditions.
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 20/40
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
2.1.6.2 Rotor stalled during normal run [51LR]

This function is valid only outside the re-acceleration and start-up stages. Tripping
takes place if the current remains higher than [Istall] for a time period equal to or
higher than delay time [stall].
Typical settings of the function [ 51LR/50S ] are :
[Istall] :
1.5*[I>] if the motor start-up current is lower than 4 times the rated
current;
rated current and lower than 8 times the rated current;
3[I>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 8 times the
rated current.
2.1.7
[tIstall] is 1 to 2 s for a pump and a fan, and 5 to 10 s for a crusher. In all the
cases, this setting must be lower than the withstand time for the motor with the
rotor stalled.
Loss of load [37]

This function makes it possible to detect the motor running without a load connected
on the output shaft. It is automatically disabled when the motor is off, and it is
reactivated after the inhibit time has expired [Tinhib]. This delay time [Tinhib] allows the
motor to perform an off-load start.
The use of this undercurrent protection function allows:
protection against the electrical pumps becoming unprimed.
protection against a drive belt or drive shaft breakdown.
Typical settings are:
2.1.8
[I<] = higher than the no-load running current of the motor and lower than the
normal running current of the motor in normal operation,
[Tinhib] = This setting depends on the load connected to the motor. If the motor is
started on load , this delay time is set to its minimal value, that is to say 0,05 s. If
the motor is idle-started, this delay time is set to be slightly longer than the load
increase time of the motor.
[tI<] = depends on the load driven by the motor (often set to a few seconds).
RTD probe [49/38] and Thermistor [49]

Prolonged overloads make the windings hot, which can cause a premature ageing of
the insulation. In the same way, the excessive heating of the bearings can lead to
irreversible damage.
As explained in the paragraph dealing with the thermal overload protection [ 49],
this function can be realised either indirectly, by the means of an overcurrent relay or
using the thermal replica, and/or by the means of direct temperature measurement.
Certain motors can be equipped with resistor probes, placed in the stator slots. They
are resistors made out of platinum, or sometimes out of nickel or copper, their
resistance varying with the temperature. There are generally six of them, distributed in
the stator winding.
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 21/40
The setting of the tripping and alarm thresholds depends on the temperature class of
the motor, the ambient temperature and the altitude of the site where the motor is
installed.
When the correction of the thermal replica by the measurement of the motor outside
temperature is used, RTD1 probe should be placed near the cooling air inlet of the
motor.
2.2
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu
2.2.1
Limitation of the number of start-ups during a given period of time [66]

The start-up of a motor is often carried out at the price of an increase in temperature
above the normal level especially in the case of several successive start-ups having
relatively long start-up times. In this situation there exists the danger of premature
ageing of the motor insulation and, furthermore, the rotor undergoes high thermal
strains. For more precise details, see the paragraphs relating to the excessive start-up
times functions and locked rotor.
In order to limit the start-up repetition frequency for a motor, the P220 relay has a
counting and locking system based on four following parameters:
duration of the reference period;
the number of cold starts;
the number of hot starts;
the restart prohibition delay time [Tinterdiction].
The reference delay time is activated once a start-up is detected, and provided that it
was initially equal to zero for the reference period, a counter records the number of
hot starts, and another one records the number of cold starts. If one of them reaches
the upper limit threshold programmed by the user, the delay time [Tinterdiction] is
initiated but the start-up inhibition signal will be activated only at the moment when
the motor stops the next time. As long as this delay time has not expired, any start-up
is inhibited.
It should be noted that a start-up is considered as cold start if the motors thermal
status is lower than 50%, and that a start-up is described as hot start if the thermal
state is equal to or higher than 50%.
The recommended settings have to be compared to the motor characteristics
provided by the manufacturer. Nevertheless, the programming of these parameters
can also depend on the operation mode of the set motor and/motor-driven unit as
a whole.
If these data are not available, the default settings are as follows:
duration of the reference period = 60min;
the number of cold starts = 3;
the number of hot starts = 2;
the delay time of prohibition of restart-up [Tinterdiction] = 30min
It should be noted that this function does not make it possible to limit the repetition
frequency for any two successive sequences of start-ups as long as [Tinterdiction] has not
been initiated. This limitation is ensured by the complementary function " Time
between two successive start-ups " (see the corresponding paragraph).
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 22/40
2.2.2
Time between two successive start-ups [66]

This function is complementary to that limiting the number of successive starts during
a given period of time. It makes it possible to prevent two consecutive motor starts .
This may be a limitation of the motor or of the motor starting equipment.
The setting of the delay time [Tbetween
which is required between 2 start-ups.
2.2.3
] should be based on the minimum time
2 start
Re-acceleration
A fault in an installation, or a fault close to the sources of supply may cause high
voltage drops which will result in supply voltages lower than the minimal permissible
levels. For example, a three-phase fault in a point of the network produces voltage
dip in the equipment in the neighbourhood. This voltage dip could result in
difficulties, which do not necessarily disappear with elimination of the fault and the
ultimate return to a normal voltage.
As the voltage dip appears, the motor torque, which is roughly proportional to the
square of the voltage, undergoes a brutal reduction causing the deceleration of the
motor. This deceleration is a function of the amplitude and the duration of the
voltage dip. It is mainly governed by the moment of inertia of the rotating masses
and by the torque-speed characteristic of the motor-driven motor.
In the most unfavourable case, the motor can stall, the new torque that it develops
being lower than the braking torque of the motor-driven unit. This phenomenon is
illustrated on the following figure.
Torque
Cm1
Cm0 = Cr0
Cr1
Cm
Cm
Cm0
N1
Nn Ns
Speed of rotation
P0172ENa
The curves shown above represent, respectively:
motor torque Cm versus rotation speed N and corresponding to the rated voltage
Vn;
motor torque C'm versus rotation speed N and corresponding to a voltage V

lower than Vn;
braking torque Cr of the motor-driven unit, versus rotation speed.
When the voltage dip appears, the motor torque passes abruptly from the value
Cm0 = Cr0 to the value C'm0 < Cr0. Therefore, the motor-drive unit will slow down,
and when the voltage is restored, the motor torque abruptly increases to the value
Cm1, whereas the braking torque is of value Cr1. Hence the motor cannot accelerate
and would return to its normal speed only if Cm1 is higher than Cr1 (see the figure
above).
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 23/40
After the fault has cleared, the motor has a value of internal impedance close to the
corresponding value when it is stopped. So, when the system voltage is reestablished, the motor draws a current close to its start-up current at the full voltage.
This current is higher if the motor slip becomes high.
This stage of re-acceleration does not always involve serious consequences, except if
a number of large motors are re-powered on simultaneously. In this case, these
motors can result in large voltage dip further restricting the re-acceleration of the
motors. So, it may be necessary to carry out load shedding of a certain number of
motors, in order to be able to ensure the re-acceleration of the priority motors.
The parameters of MiCOM relay can either be set so as to authorise a re-acceleration
of the motor after a voltage dip, or they can also be set to give a command to stop
the motor in the event of prolonged voltage dip.
2.2.3.1 Authorisation of re-acceleration
An external voltage relay connected next to busbars is used to report on any voltage
dip as well as to indicate any restoration of the voltage. This voltage dip
information is sent via a wiring link to a logic input of the MiCOM P220 relay
programmed at VOLT. DIP
Treacc delay time should be set to be equal to the maximum duration of voltage dip
of the network for which one wishes to authorise a re-acceleration of the motor. Thus,
for any voltage dip shorter than Treacc delay time, an authorisation of re-acceleration
will be activated. On the other hand, if the voltage dip lasts longer than Treacc delay
time, the relay does not modify its operation and any attempt of re-acceleration of the
motor could be seen by the relay as a Rotor locked condition (the amplitude of the
re-acceleration current being the same as that in Rotor locked condition) and,
consequently, causing a possible tripping command.
2.2.3.2 Load shedding on voltage dip
The same voltage relay can be used to realise load shedding when the supply voltage
dips. Two cases are possible:
When it is desired to turn off the motor in the event of the voltage dip,
When it is desired to turn off the motor only if the voltage dip lasts longer than
the value it was assigned in the re-acceleration authorisation.
A programmed logic input on EXT. 1 (or EXT. 2) should to be connected to the

voltage relay detecting the presence of a voltage dip. Associated delay time tEXT1 (or
tEXT2) will be set as follows:
equal to the duration of voltage dip for which one wishes to carry out a load
shedding,
equal to Treacc.
The external tripping command EXT. 1 (or EXT. 2) will be programmed to send the
shutdown command (assignment on the output relay RL1).
Thus any voltage dip longer than the programmed duration will result in a shutdown
command.
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 24/40
NOTE:
The determination of the maximum duration for which one wishes

to authorise re-acceleration of the motor is specific to each site and
it depends on the characteristics of the network (source impedance,
impedance of the other loads - in particular, presence of other
revolving machines) as well as of the characteristics of the given
motor and its load (magnitude of the direct-on-line start-up current,
inertia). The value of this duration is generally obtained as a result
of a study of the dynamic stability of the system.
The voltage dip information generated by the voltage relay must
exist as long as the conditions of voltage dip exist. With the return
of the voltage on the busbars, this voltage dip information must
disappear as soon as possible. The voltage relay used to generate
voltage dip information must have very short pick-up time and
drop off time, ideally less than one and half periods (times lower
than 30 ms for a 50 Hz system).
This assumes that the value of the voltage is the same on the
busbars as on the terminals of the motor. If this is not the case, it
will be necessary to estimate the voltage drop between the busbars
and the motors terminals and to take this into account when setting
the voltage relay thresholds corresponding to appearance and
disappearance of the of voltage dip conditions.
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 25/40
3.
EXAMPLE OF NUMERICAL APPLICATION
3.1
Network data
MiCOM P220 current input ranges:

Phase current input : In = 5 A ;
Earth current input : Ion = 1 A
Breaking device type : circuit breaker
Maximum value of the three-phase short-circuit current on the busbars 6.2 kV:
Icc3 = 9 kA
Neutral point connection mode for the network 6.2 kV : by a resistance limiting
the maximum value of the earth fault current to 30 A
Length of the feeder cable connecting the motor to the busbars 6.2k V : 100 m
Measuring transformers :
3.2
CT ratio: 300 / 5A
Core balance CT connection: ratio 25
"Speed switch" device available
Motor data:
Induction motor:
rated power
==> Pn = 2200kW - cos = 0.8
rated voltage
==>
Vn = 6.2kV 50 Hz
rated current
==>
In = 256 A
open-circuit (no-load) current
==>
Ino-load = 134A
start-up type (direct-on -line, soft)
==>
Direct
start-up current
==>
---
direct start-up current (if soft start used)
==>
Id = 5.4*In i.e. 1382A
start-up time
==>
td = 4 s
maximum repetition frequency of starts
---->
Hot = x 2, cold = x 3
withstand time for locked rotor (for hot & cold start)
---->
2s
heating curve
==>
---
time-constants of: heating , start-up, cooling- down ==>
transient characteristic curve at unbalance
---->
---
permanent allowable unbalance
---->
---
motor service use (driven equipment: compressor,

crasher, mill, pump, fan...)
==>
pump
start-up : no-load/ load
---->
no-load
(30 s loading after the end of
start-up)
14min, 10min, 28min
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 26/40
3.3
List of settings:
OP PARAMETERS Menu
Password
AAAA
Reference
ALST
Frequency
50 Hz
CONFIGURATION Menu
CONFIG.SELECT Submenu
Change Group Input
EDGE
Setting Group
Default display
% I LOAD
Start detection criterion
52A (closing of the breaking

device)
Analogue output type (optional)
4 - 20 mA
Value transmitted by the analogue output (optional)
% I LOAD
RTD type (optional)
PT100
CT RATIO Submenu
Primary rating of the phase CT
300
Secondary rating of the phase CT
Primary rating of the earth CT
25
Secondary rating of the earth CT
LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 Submenus
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
Assignment: thermal tripping (overload)
No
No
Yes
No
Assignment: thermal alarm ALARM
No
No
No
Yes
Assignment: tI>>
Yes
No
No
No
Assignment: tIo>
Yes
No
No
No
Assignment: tIo>>
Yes
No
No
No
Assignment: tIi>
Yes
No
No
No
Assignment: tIi>>
Yes
No
No
No
Assignment: tI<
Yes
No
No
No
Assignment: tIstart (excessively long start)
No
Yes
No
No
Assignment: tIstall (stalled rotor when running)
No
Yes
No
No
Assignment: locked rotor at start
No
Yes
No
No
Assignment: emergency restart
No
No
No
No
Assignment: forbidden start
No
No
No
Yes
Assignment: tRTD1 ALARM, tRTD2 ALARM, tRTD3 ALARM

(optional)
No
No
No
Yes
Assignment: tRTD1TRIP, tRTD2 TRIP, tRTD3 TRIP (optional)
No
No
Yes
No
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 27/40
LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 Submenus
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
Assignment: tRTD4 ALARM, tRTD5 ALARM, tRTD6 ALARM

(optional)
No
No
No
Yes
Assignment: tRTD4 TRIP, tRTD5 TRIP, tRTD6 TRIP (optional)
No
No
Yes
No
Assignment: Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (optional)
No
No
No
No
Assignment: tEXT1
No
No
No
No
Assignment: tEXT2
No
No
No
No
Assignment: motor stopped
No
No
No
No
Assignment: motor running
No
No
No
No
Assignment: successful start
No
No
No
No
Configuration Inputs submenu

Inputs : 54321
11111
COMMUNICATION MODBUS Menu

Communication enabled ?
Yes
Data transmission rate
19 200 Bauds
Parity
No
Number of data bits
Number of stop bits
Relay address
Date Format
PRIVATE
Programming for Group No.1 of PROTECTION Menu:

THERM.OVERLOAD[49]
Submenu
Primary
setting
Secondary
Comments
setting
Thermal overload function

enabled ?
Yes
Thermal inhibition on start

enabled ?
No
Threshold I>
270 A
0.9In (CT)
5.5% of overload authorised

= 1.055 x In(motor)
Ke
Te1
14 min
See motor characteristics
Te2
10 min
Tr
28 min
Influence RTD (optional)
No
ALARM enabled?
Yes
Thermal alarm threshold

ALARM
92%
FORBID START enabled ?
Yes
FORBID START
78%
0,92 > (256 / 270)2
0,78 < (1382 / 270)2 * (1-exp(4

/ 10*60)) +exp(5 / 10*60))
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 28/40
Submenu [50/51]
SHORT-CIRCUIT
Primary
setting
Short-circuit function enabled ?

Threshold I>>
Yes
1800A
tI>>
Submenu [50/51]
EARTH FAULT
Secondary
Comments
setting
6In
0.1s
Primary
setting
Secondary
Comments
setting
Earth fault function enabled ?:

threshold Io>
No
Thresholds Io>
0.002Ion
tIo>
0s
Earth fault function enabled ?:

threshold Io>>
Yes
Threshold Io>>
2A
tIo>>
Submenu [46]
UNBALANCE
0.08Ion
Only one earth fault current

threshold can be programmed
Setting to 6,7 % of maximum

earth fault current
0.1s
Primary
setting
Function Unbalance enabled ?:

threshold Ii>
Threshold Ii>
130% of motor start-up current
25.6 A
Secondary
Comments
setting
Yes
Alarm threshold enabled
0.085 In
(CT)
Setting to 10% of Inmotor
tli>
10s
Function Unbalance enabled ?:

threshold Ii>>
Yes
Tripping threshold enabled

Setting to 20% of Inmotor
Threshold Ii>>
51.2A
0.171 In
(CT)
Submenu [48]
EXCESS LONG START
Primary
setting
Secondary
Comments
setting
Excess long start function

enabled ?
Threshold Istart
tIstart
Yes
540A
2I
Id = 5.4*Inmotor ! Istart = 2*I
5s
1.2 * td = 4.8s
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Submenu [51LR/50S]
BLOCK ROTOR
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 29/40
Primary
setting
Secondary
Comments
setting
Block rotor function enabled ?
Yes
tIstall
1.8s
Stalled-in-run rotor function

enabled ?
Yes
Threshold Istall
540A
Blocked-at-start rotor function

enabled ?
Submenu [37]
LOSS OF LOAD
Primary
setting
Loss of load function enabled ?
2I
Id= 5.4*Inmotor ! Istall = 2*I
Yes
Presence of zero speed detector is

necessary (speed switch)
Secondary
Comments
setting
Yes
Motor-driven pump
0.55In
Higher than no-load current
tI<
3s
Depends on process
Tinhib
40s
Tinhib > (5 + 30)
Threshold I<
Submenu [66]
START NUMBER
165A
Primary
setting
Secondary
Comments
setting
Start number limitation function

enabled ?
Yes
Treference
60 min
Hot starts number
Cold starts number
Tinterdiction
30 min
Submenu MIN TIME

BETW 2 START
Primary
setting
Secondary
Comments
setting
Time between starts function

enabled ?
Yes
Tbetween 2 start
10min
Submenu RE-ACCEL
AUTHORIZ
Primary
setting
Parameters depend on trade-off

of motor characteristics against
process requirements
Parameter depends on trade-off

Secondary
Comments
setting
Re-acceleration authorisation
function enabled ?
Yes
Treacc
0.2s
Parameter depends on trade-off

P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 30/40
4.
SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
4.1
Logic selectivity
The objective is to reduce the fault clearing times by reducing the selectivity steps.
Thus the logic selectivity makes it possible to reduce the clearing time of the busbar
fault while preserving a perfect co-ordination between protection devices.
The example given below involves the MiCOM P122 relay but it is absolutely possible
to replace it by another MiCOM relay used as lead-in protection, for example a
standard relay P123, P141, P142 or P143.
P122
26
28
_
Logic
selectivity
+
7
+
7
11
P220
M1
+
11
P220
M2
11
P220
M3
P0173ENa
In our example, the delay times of short-circuit protection (I>>) and earth fault
protection (Io>>) of the P220 (downstream protections) and P122 (upstream
protection) relays are set to 100 ms.
A fault on the busbars will be detected only by protection (P122) and the command to
clear the fault will be generated after 100ms.
In the event of fault on a motor feeder cable, the P220 relay protecting it will send a
signal through to the P122 relay. On receipt of this logic signal the P122 relay will
use a logically selected delay that has been separately set. This delay time will replace
the normal delay time while there is an output from one of the P220 relays. In our
example, it could be set to 350 ms to correspond to a 250 ms selectivity step between
the downstream protection and the upstream protection. Thus, 100 ms after the
appearance of the fault, protection P220 of the outgoing motor feeder will generate
the command to clear the fault. In the event of non-clearance of the fault, the fault
can be eliminated selectively 250 ms later thanks to the upstream protection used in
logic selectivity.
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 31/40
NOTE:
The MiCOM P220 relays located downstream can deliver

following instantaneous information indicating that a current
threshold was exceeded:
phase overcurrent threshold I>>
earth overcurrent threshold Io>
earth overcurrent threshold Io>>
If this facility is required then additional cabling will be
required between the output contacts of the motor protection
relay and the selected logic input of the upstream relay.
The logic selectivity delay time of the upstream relay must be
set selectively with reference to the settings of normal delay
times for the I>> and Io>> thresholds of the downstream
relays.
Example of programming:
Logic selectivity between the P220 protections installed on the motor outgoing feeders
and the MiCOM P122 protection relay on the lead-in.
P220 relay
PROTECTION menu: SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu [50/51]
Designation
Function
Programming
FUNCTION
I>> ?
Use of the short-circuit threshold (I>>) enabled ?
yes
tI>>
Delay time of the phase overcurrent threshold
100ms
PROTECTION menu: EARTH FAULT submenu [50N/51N]

Designation
Function
Programming
FUNCTION
Io>> ?
Use of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold (Io>>)
yes
tIo>>
Delay time of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold
100ms
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: Submenu AUX OUTPUT
Assignment I>>
Assignment Io>>
The instantaneous information of one of thresholds I>> and Io>> being exceeded is
transmitted to the output relay RL5 of the P220 relay.
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 32/40
MiCOM P122 (or P123 or P140) relay
PROTECTION menu: [50/51] PHASE O/C Submenu
Designation
Function
Programming
[51] I>>
Use of the 2nd phase overcurrent threshold (I>>)

enabled ?
yes
tI>>
Delay time of the 2nd phase overcurrent threshold
100ms
PROTECTION menu: [50N/51N] E/Gnd Submenu

Designation
Function
Programming
[51N] Ie>>
Use of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold (Io>>)

enabled ?
yes
tIe>>
Delay time of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold
100ms
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: INPUTS Submenu

Designation
Function
Programming
INPUT 2
Parameter setting of the logic input No.2 to receive

the logic selectivity command
SL LG1
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: SEL LOG1 Submenu

Designation
Function
Programming
SEL1 tI>>
Use of "logic selectivity" function to protect the 2nd

phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) enabled ?
yes
SEL1 tIe>>
Use of "logic selectivity" to protect the 2nd earth

overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) enabled ?
yes
tSEL1
Setting of delay time associated to the "logic

selectivity" function
350 ms
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
4.2
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 33/40
Authorisation of re-acceleration Load shedding on voltage dips

Let us consider three motors M1, M2 and M3 connected to the same busbars. A
voltage relay, for example MiCOM P922 relay, is used to detect any voltage dip on
the busbars. Each MiCOM P220 relay receives from the P922 relay the voltage dip
information via its logic inputs.
The following functioning is required:
In the event of voltage dip shorter than 250 ms, the re-acceleration of the
motor M1 must be possible, but if the voltage dip is longer than 250 ms the
motor M1 must be stopped.
In the event of voltage dip duration equal or longer than 100 ms, the
motors M2 and M3 must be stopped.
MiCOM P922
18
20
_
17 19
21 23
17 19
P220
M1
_
17 19
P220
M2
P220
M3
P0174ENa
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 34/40
Programming the P220 relay associated to the motor M1:
REACCEL AUTHORIZ Submenu
Function Authorisation of re-acceleration enabled ?
Yes
Treacc
250 ms
INPUTS Submenu
Assignment input No.3
NONE
EXT 1
VOLT. DIP
tEXT1
250 ms
Logic input No.4 is used to stop the motor in the event of a prolonged voltage dip,
logic input No.5 is used to authorise re-acceleration.
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: TRIP OUTPUT RLY Submenu
EXT 1 ?
Yes
Information of tripping EXT 1 is sent to the trip output relay (RL1).

Programming the P220 relays associated to the motors M2 and M3:
REACCEL AUTHORIZ Submenu
Re-acceleration authorisation function enabled ?
No
Treacc
0,2 second
INPUTS Submenu
NONE
EXT 1
NONE
tEXT1
100 ms
Logic input No.4 is used to stop the motor in the event of a voltage dip whose
duration is equal to or more than 100 ms.
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: TRIP OUTPUT RLY Submenu
EXT 1 ?
Yes
Information of tripping EXT 1 is sent to the trip output relay (RL1).
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
4.3
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 35/40
Setting groups
If an electrical network can be fed from two different sources of supply, the relay can
make use of two different setting groups each individually set to accommodate the
parameters of the two networks. For example if a network is normally fed via the
mains distribution system, and it is provided with a standby emergency generator, the
relay can be provided with two groups of fault settings for the two sources of supply.
The passage of a group of parameters to another will have to be carried out each
time the networks supply mode changes (distributor mains/generator). A pulse will
have to be sent to a logic input of the relay that has been programmed to allow this.
The use of the two groups of settings also proves useful for double-speed motors. For
these motors, the setting group No.1 could be used when the motor turns at the lower
speed (1), the setting group No.2 being used when the motor turns at the higher
speed (2) An impulse must be sent to the relay each time the motor changes speed so
that it passes from one setting group to the other.
13 15
13 15
P220
P220
M1
M2
_
13 15 11
P220
M3
P0175ENa
Programming the P220 relays associated with the motors M1, M2 and M3:
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: INPUTS Submenu
SET GROUP
Logic input No.3 is used to pass from one setting group to another.
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 36/40
5.
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Moteurs asynchrones triphass ferms, AREVA Rseau Commercial France
Guide de lingnierie lectrique, ELECTRA, Lavoisier
Protective relays APPLICATION GUIDE, AREVA
Electrotechnique Industrielle, Guy SEGUIER Francis NOTELET, Lavoisier
Symmetrical components for power systems engineering, J.Lewis BLACKBURN
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
6.
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 37/40
APPENDIX A : SERVICE DUTY
P0229ENa
P220/EN AP/B43
Page 38/40
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
P0230ENa
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
7.
P220/EN AP/B43
APPENDIX B : INFORMATION NEEDED FOR ADJUSTMENT

Maximum short-current between phases at the motors terminals
Neutral point connection mode for the network feeding the motor
Characteristics provided by the motor manufacturer
- rated power
- rated voltage
- rated current
- start-up type (direct-in-line, soft)
- start-up current
- direct start-up current (if soft start-up used)
- start-up time
- maximum repetition frequency of start-ups
-- withstand time for blocked rotor (for hot & cold start)
- heating curve
- time-constants of: heating , start-up, cooling-down
- transient characteristic curve at unbalance
allowable permanent unbalance
- motor service use (driven equipment: compressor, breaker, pump,
ventilator...)
- open-circuit current (for loss of load protection
Ratios for measured-value converters (CT, PT and balance-core CT)
connected to the protection
Assignment output contacts of the protection relay
Page 39/40
P220/EN AP/B43
Technical Guide
Application Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 40/40
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
P220/EN FT/B43
MiCOM P220
User Guide
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 1/54
CONTENTS
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Object of this document
1.2
Definitions
2.
DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P220 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY
3.
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE
3.1
Description of the front panel
3.2
The LEDs
3.3
The keypad
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.4
ALARM keys
Programming keypad
Liquid crystal display screen
8
8
8
4.
THE MENUS
4.1
Default display
10
4.2
Access to the menus
11
4.3
Access to the setting parameters
11
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.4
Protection by password
Entering the password / modification of the parameters
The OP. PARAMETERS menu
11
11
13
4.5
The CONFIGURATION menu
13
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.6
The CONFIG. SELECT submenu

The CT RATIO submenu
The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus
The MEASUREMENTS menu
13
16
16
17
4.7
The PROCESS menu
18
4.8
The TRIP STATISTICS menu
19
4.9
The COMMUNICATION menu
19
4.10
The PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus
20
4.10.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu: protection against thermal overload
conditions
21
4.10.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu
25
4.10.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu
26
4.10.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu
26
4.10.5 The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu: protection against excessively long starts 27
4.10.6 The [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR submenu
28
4.10.7 The [37]LOSS OF LOAD submenu: protection against undercurrent/loss of load
conditions
29
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 2/54
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
4.10.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu: temperature protection by RTD (optional)

4.10.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu: temperature protection by thermistor (optional)
4.11
The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu
30
31
32
4.11.1
4.11.2
4.11.3
4.11.4
4.11.5
4.11.6
4.11.7
4.11.8
4.11.9
4.11.10
4.11.11
4.12
The [66] START NUMBER submenu : limitation of the number of starts per period
The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu: minimum time between two starts
The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu: Reacceleration authorization
Binary inputs and outputs Logical gates
The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu: AND programmable logic gates
The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY: AND logic gate time delay
The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : auxiliary programmable output relays
LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu
The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu: Configuration of the trip output relay
The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu : Latching of the output relays
The SW SUPERVISION submenu:
The RECORD menu
32
34
36
39
43
44
45
45
46
46
47
48
4.12.1
4.12.2
4.12.3
4.13
The FAULT RECORD submenu

The DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu
The SW MONITORING submenu
ALARM messages
48
49
50
51
4.13.1 The MOTOR ALARM messages

4.13.2 The HARDWARE ALARM messages
51
51
5.
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
53
5.1
Event records
53
5.2
Recording of the form of the starting current
53
6.
PC CONNECTION DUN PC LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS
54
6.1
Connection configuration
54
6.2
Configuration of the relay and PC
54
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 3/54
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Object of this document

The purpose of this document is to present the characteristics of the P220 motor
protection relay and to guide the operator through the setting procedures.
After an overview of the product, this manual explains the functions performed by this
protection relay and how they must be used. The menu associated with each of these
functions is presented and explained.
1.2
Definitions
Tripping
This operation consists of a command to open the breaking device (circuit breaker or
fuse contactor) connected to the motor. A tripping command can be given:
either on detection of a fault by the MiCOM P220 relay,
or by the operator (in this case it is an external tripping command).
Alarm
The detection of a fault by the MiCOM P220 relay leads to the display of an alarm
message.
Acknowledgement of an alarm
This operation consists of making an alarm message disappear.
Function in service / out of service
The MiCOM P220 relay offers a certain number of protection, monitoring and control
functions. The operator can select from these functions the ones he wishes to use:
he must bring into service the functions he chooses to use,
he can take out of service the functions he does not wish to use.
Activated / deactivated function

Not all the protection functions of the P220 relay are activated at the same time.
They are alternately activated / deactivated automatically by the P220 relay itself to
ensure that the motor has protection specific to its various operating conditions:
underload or overload conditions, starting phase, locked rotor condition, and motor
shut down.
NOTE:
A function cannot be activated or deactivated unless the operator

has previously brought it into service.
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 4/54
2.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P220 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY

The MiCOM P220 relay uses digital techniques to fulfil the functions of protection,
control and monitoring of motors.
It is equipped with 4 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs and 1 earth current
input). The current inputs have dual ratings of 1 or 5 amperes (it is possible to
combine an earth current rating of 1 A and a phase current rating of 5 A).
It is possible to program the output relays to respond to any of the protection or
control functions available. The different logic inputs can also be allocated to control
functions.
The auxiliary power supply is provided by a direct current or alternating current
auxiliary source via an internal converter. Satisfactory operation of the P220 relay is
guaranteed during brief interruptions of the auxiliary power supply lasting less than
50 ms.
The front panel gives the operator access to the data of the MiCOM P220 relay
either via LEDs or via the display unit and the keypad. The various alarms are stored
in the memory and made available to the operator on the backlit display device.
These alarms can be read and acknowledged directly without a password. All the
parameters and measurements are accessible without a password. The setting values
can only be modified after entering the password stored in the memory.
The MiCOM P220 relay records and measures a large number of data with very
great accuracy. It continuously measures the phase and earth currents taking into
account the true RMS values up to the 10th harmonic for a 50 Hz motor and the 8th
harmonic for a 60 Hz motor.
The MiCOM P220 relay has on the rear connector a RS485 type link with a choice of
MODBUS, RTU mode, Courier or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocols. This
enables the operator to read the data stored by the relay (measurements, alarms,
parameters), or modify the different settings and allocations of outputs of each relay,
or transmit remote orders.
It is also possible to reassemble or modify these data via the RS232 communication
located on the front panel by using the MiCOM S1 support software.
The MiCOM P220 relay can be connected directly via this link to a digital monitoring
and control system (for example: MiCOM S10, SCADA). All the data available are
then at the disposal of the supervisor and can be utilised either locally or remotely.
The MiCOM P220 relay can be withdrawn while it is live. This means that its live
parts can be withdrawn from the metal housing while the relay is supplied with power
via the auxiliary source. When the relay is drawn out of its housing:
the current circuits from the phase and earth CTs are not interrupted thanks to
the presence of internal short-circuiting devices located at the current inputs
(metal housing part),
no tripping order is generated,
the watchdog relay drops out,
the RS485 link is not interrupted. However, communication is no longer

possible for the relay which is drawn out.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 5/54
REMOTE
COMMUNICATION
parameterisation,
measurements, control
MMI
LCD display device
8 LEDs for indication
7 pushbuttons
RS232 port
MOTOR
PROTECTION
+
measurements, automatic
controls, monitoring,
disturbance
recording
CONTRACTOR/
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Status (closed, open)
tripping/closing commande
ELECTRICAL POWER
SYSTEM
phase currents
earth current
MCC
MOTOR CONTROL
P0190ENa
FIGURE 1 - ENVIRONMENT OF THE MiCOM P220 RELAY
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 6/54
3.
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE
3.1
Description of the front panel

The front panel of the MiCOM P220 relay serves as an interface between the human
and the protection relay. It enables the operator to enter settings, to gain access to
the display of measured values and alarms, and also to display in a simple manner
the different actions performed by the MiCOM P220 relay.
FIGURE 2 - FRONT PANEL OF THE MiCOM P220 RELAY
The front panel of the relay has three separate parts:
The display device and keypad,
The LEDs,
The two zones under the upper and lower flaps
The display device on the front of the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with a liquid
crystal display (LCD). This screen displays data such as settings and measured
values, even under difficult conditions, thanks to the backlighting of the data. The
keypad has 7 touch-sensitive keys. The two keys located under the screen are
dedicated to alarms; the other 5 keys are for reading the measurements and
modifying the parameters of the MiCOM P220 relay.
The LEDs are located on the left side of the front panel. The first four LEDs are
dedicated to the operation of the relay (tripping LED, alarm LED, equipment fault
LED, and auxiliary power supply LED).
The following four LEDs are programmable by the operator.
The wording associated with the LEDs appears by default in English on the front
panel but the operator has self-adhesive labels supplied with the P220 relay on which
he can write the titles of his choice using a ball-point pen.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 7/54
Under the upper flap, there is a label identifying the relay by its model number and
serial number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically. When
requesting any information from the factory, do not forget to indicate these two
numbers. The auxiliary power supply range of the relay is also indicated on the lower
part of the label.
Under the lower flap, the RS232 link permits the connection of a portable PC to the
MiCOM P220 relay.
The live part can be withdrawn from the housing by opening the two flaps and
applying traction to the two notches located behind these flaps.
ATTENTION :
3.2
IT IS NECESSARY- AFTER PIVOTING THE EXTRACTOR - TO WAIT 2 OR 3

SECONDS BEFORE MAKING COME OUT THE ACTIVE PART, TO LEAVE
DISCHARGING THE CAPACITORS IN THE ACTIVE PART THUS AVOIDING
POSSIBLE ELECTRIC ARCS IN THE EVENT OF DIRECT CONTACT OF THE
CONNECTOR BLOCKS WITH METAL LIMP.
The LEDs
The LEDs are numbered from 1 to 8 starting from the top.
NOTE:
LED 1
The LEDs are turned off when the auxiliary power supply is lost.
When the power supply is back the state of the LEDs is restored.
Colour: RED
Wording: TRIP
The LED indicates that the relay has transmitted a tripping order to the breaking
device (fuse-contactor / circuit breaker). This LED copies the tripping command sent
to logic output No. 1 (tripping relay). Its normal state is extinguished. It lights up as
soon as a tripping command is issued. It is extinguished when the associated alarm
is acknowledged (disappearance of the fault and acknowledgement by the operator).
LED 2
Colour: YELLOW
Wording: ALARM
This LED indicates that a motor alarm has been taken into account by the MiCOM
P220 relay.
The management of the ALARM LED is directly linked to the status of the motor
alarms in the memory (MOTOR ALARM menu).
If one or more messages are not read and not acknowledged, the ALARM LED
flashes.
If all messages are read but not acknowledged, the ALARM LED shows a steady light.
If all messages have been read and acknowledged, the ALARM LED is extinguished.
LED 3
Colour: YELLOW
Wording: WARNING
This LED indicates equipment faults of the MiCOM P220 relay.

The management of the WARNING LED is directly linked to the status of the
equipment alarms in the memory (HARDW ALARMS menu).
When a minor internal alarm (minor equipment fault, typically a communication
failure) is detected, the WARNING LED flashes.
When the fault is classed as serious, (major equipment failure) the WARNING LED is
lit.
The WARNING LED can only be extinguished when the cause which produced the
alarm has disappeared (repair of the module, disappearance of the fault).
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 8/54
LED 4
Colour: GREEN
Wording: HEALTHY
This LED indicates that the MiCOM P220 relay is energised within the rated range
(0.8 to 1.2 Vaux).
LEDs 5 to 8:
Colour: RED
These LEDs can be programmed by the operator in the CONFIGURATION menu.

3.3
The keypad
The keypad has seven keys arranged in two groups:
The two keys located immediately below the screen (keys ! and "),
The five keys positioned in the centre of the front panel for programming.
3.3.1
ALARM keys
The two keys ! and " are dedicated to reading and acknowledgement of the
alarms respectively. To display the successive alarms, press the ! key.
The alarms are arranged in the order in which they were detected (the most recent
last, the oldest first).
To acknowledge the alarms, the operator can either
acknowledge each alarm by pressing the " key, or go to the end of the MOTOR
ALARMS menu and perform a general acknowledgement.
3.3.2
Programming keypad
The five keys situated in the centre of the front panel of the MiCOM P220 relay are
dedicated to programming
The keys # $ % and & make it possible to move in the direction indicated in the
different levels of the menus.
The ' key permits the confirmation of a choice or a value (modification of
parameters).
3.4
Liquid crystal display screen

The liquid crystal display screen has two lines each with sixteen characters. The
screen lights up as soon as a key on the keypad is activated. It remains lit up for 5
minutes after a key on the keypad was last used. The screen has backlighting which
makes it easy to read, regardless of the ambient lighting conditions.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
4.
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 9/54
THE MENUS
The menu of the P220 relay is organised into main menus, some of which are
subdivided into submenus. The operator dialogue of the MiCOM P220 relay is
divided into 10 menus ( menu column)
HEADING
SUB MENU
OP PARAMETERS
DESCRIPTION
Data for general settings of MiCOM P220
CONFIGURATION
CONFIG. SELECT
Change of Group, default display setings, Start

detection criterion, Analogical Output
(4-20mA), RTD and Thermistors.
TC RATIO
Settings of the CT Ratio
LED
LED 5 to
LED 8
CONFIGURATION
INPUTS
Configuration of Programmables LEDs

Configuration of logic inputs
MEASUREMENT
Measured (Ia, Ib, Ic ) and calculated

parameters (Idirect, I inverse), Max values.
PROCESS
Measurements related to the application:

Thermal Overload, Time before thermal
tripping, RTD Temperature, Permit start
number, time before start, Emergency start
number
TRIP STATISTICS
Number of different type of tripping
COMMUNICATION
Settings of the protocol parameters.
PROTECTION G1
Configuration of the protection functions

[49] THERMAL
OVERLOAD
Submenu of thermal overload function
[50/51] SHORT
CIRCUIT
Submenu of short circuit function
[50N/51N] EARTH
FAULT
Submenu of earth Fault function
[46] UNBALANCE
Submenu of Unbalance function
[48] EXCESS LONG

START
Submenu of excess long start function
[51LR-50S] BLOCKED Submenu of Blocked rotor function

ROTOR
[37] LOSS OF LOAD
Submenu of Loss of load function
[49/38] RTD SENSORS Submenu of RTD sensors function

option
[49] THERMISTORS
option
Submenu of Thermistors function
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 10/54
HEADING
SUB MENU
Protection G2
DESCRIPTION
Like PORTECTION G1
AUTOMATIC CTRL
[66] START NUMBER
HOT and COLD start numbers
MIN TIME BETW 2

START
Configuration of the minimum time between

two consecutive starts.
REACCEL
AUTORIZATION
Autorization of reacceleration after a dip

voltage detection
INPUTS
Configuration of logic inputs.
AND LOGIC
EQUATION
Configuration of 4 Logic Equations
AND LOGIC EQUAT T Configuration of time delays associated to the

DELAY
logic equations.
AUX OUTPUT RELAYS Configuration of Auxiliary output relays ( other
than tripping relay RL1)
LATCH OUTPUT
RELAYS
Latching of the auxiliary output relays
TRIP OUTPUT RELAY
Configuration of the trip output relay ( RL1)
LATCH TRIP ORDER
Latching of the tripping output relay (RL1)
SW SUPERVISION
configuration of operating time, operation

number, sum of interrupted current, closing
and tripping time
FAULT RECORD
Visualization of last five faults
DISTURBANCE
RECORD
Configuration of disturbance records
SW MONITORING
Data related to real functioning of the

switching devise (CB)
RECORD
From the default display, access is gained to these different menus by using the #
and & keys.
To return to the default display from any one of the menus, press the $ key.
4.1
Default display
By default, a value is continuously displayed, and the operator can select this value
from a list in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu.
As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM P220 relay, the relay indicates it by
an alarm message: this display takes priority and replaces the default value (see the
ALARMS menus).
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
4.2
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 11/54
Access to the menus

Access is gained to the different menus via the # and $ keys.
It is possible to read all the parameters and measurements without the password.
The parameters can only be modified after entering the password.
4.3
Access to the setting parameters

Access to the setting parameters of the MiCOM P220 relay is possible in different
ways:
4.3.1
either locally: by using the keys or the RS232 port on the front panel,
or remotely: via the RS485 port at the rear.
Protection by password
Modification of the relay parameters via the pushbuttons on the front panel is
protected by password.
This protection applies to the relay configuration settings, particularly the selection of
the different thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of the
binary inputs, logic gates and output relays.
The password consists of four alphanumerical characters in capitals. On leaving the
factory, the password is AAAA. The operator can define his own combination of
characters. If the password is lost or forgotten, modification of the parameters stored
in the memory of the relay is inhibited. All that is required then is to contact AREVA
T&D or its agent, stating the serial number of the relay, to receive an emergency
password specific to the relay concerned.
4.3.2
Entering the password / modification of the parameters

To modify a parameter, first press the ' key to go into updating mode (or
parameterisation mode).
The operator is asked to enter the password as soon as a parameter is modified in
any of the menus or submenus. So when the operator presses the ' key, to make
an adjustment, and the password is not active, the following display appears on the
screen:
PASSWORD ?
AAAA
The password consists of the letters between A and Z. The password is entered letter
by letter by using the $ and # keys to move forwards and backwards in the
alphabet.
After each letter, press the & key to enter the next letter.
At the end of the input press the ' key to confirm the password. If the password is
correct the message PASSWORD OK appears on the screen.
After 2 seconds, the display returns to the previous point in the menu. Press the '
key again. A cursor appears on the first field of the data to be updated:
Example: modification of the current threshold I >> ([50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT
submenu)
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 12/54
I >> =
1.0 In
A flashing cursor indicates that the operator can change the value in the cell. To
scroll through the possible values for a cell, use the # and $ keys.
After each value, press the & key to enter the next digit.
At the end of the input, press the ' key to confirm the modification.
While the relay is in setting mode, the letter P (Parameter) is displayed at the bottom
right of the menus and submenus headers. For instance, the letter P is displayed in
the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu header:
[50/51]
SHORT-CIRCUIT
If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is deactivated and the
letter P disappears. Any subsequent modification of parameters will give rise to a
further request for the password.
NOTE:
The parameterisation mode only allows modification of the

relay configuration via the interface through which is was
activated: if for example the password was entered by the
keys on the front panel, only modifications carried out using
these keys will be accepted.
When the parameterisation mode is activated by entering
the password via the front panel (pushbuttons), as long as
this mode of parameterisation remains active, it is no longer
possible to modify the relay parameters via the RS485 or
RS232 communication ports. The parameters of the P220
relay can only be modified by using the pushbuttons. Once
the parameterisation mode is deactivated (no action on any
pushbutton for 5 minutes), it is then possible to modify the
parameters of the P220 relay by using one of the
communication ports.
Pressing the " key during modification makes it possible
to return to the value before modification.
To modify the active password, gain access to the OP.
PARAMETERS menu then to the PASSWORD point in the
menu.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
4.4
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 13/54
The OP. PARAMETERS menu

In this menu, the operator has access to the following information:
the type of MiCOM relay, here it is the model P220
the software version of the relay
the Active Group
the state of all the logic inputs
the state of the programmable output relays
In this menu, the operator can also:
4.5
modify the password
give the relay/motor feeder a reference (4 characters, letters or figures)
indicate the rated frequency of the motor (50 or 60 Hz)
modify the date and time.
The CONFIGURATION menu

The CONFIGURATION menu makes it possible to configure the MiCOM P220 relay.
This menu is divided into 7 submenus:
4.5.1
CONFIG. SELECT
CT RATIO
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
CONFIGURATION INPUTS
The CONFIG. SELECT submenu
4.5.1.1 Change of Active Setting group

The MiCOM P220 relay has two configuration groups corresponding to two
protection groups (menus PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2). The operator
can thus carry out 2 settings for each parameter: one for configuration group 1 and
the other for configuration group 2.
This menu allows the selection between the 2 groups. The active group by default is
group 1.
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 14/54
The changeover of the configuration can be ordered by:
a)
a local command:
via a logic input which must have been previously configured by the operator,
via the keys on the front panel
via the RS232 port on the front panel.

NOTE:
For the changeover via a logic input, it is necessary to Know that:
When the user selects the option LEVEL, in the CONFIGURATION/CONFIG SELECT
submenu, the changeover of the groups is ONLY authorized by a logic input, (no
possibility to change the active group neither by communication, nor by the front
panel).
ACTIVE GROUP CHANGEOVER WITH LEVEL OPTION :
When switching ON the auxiliary supply, the selected group corresponds to the logic
input state. This means:
A - LEVEL option and Logic input configuration = 0
Groupe 1 = logic Input is not active
Groupe 2 = logic Input is active
If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1.
If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V , then the active group will be
G2.
B - LEVEL option and Logic input configuration = 1
Groupe 1 = logic Input is not active
Groupe 2 = logic Input is active
If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G2.
If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V, then the active group will be
G1.
If the user wishes to change the groups by the communication or by the front panel,
he has to select the option EDGE.
ACTIVE GROUP CHANGEOVER WITH EDGE OPTION :
A- FRONT option with Logic input configuration = 1
The active group changes every time the voltage applied to the logic input changes
state from 0V to +V.
Switch OFF the relay, then if we
1.
Switch ON the power supply of the relay with the voltage applied to the logic
input =0V:
The group will not change. It will remain as before the switching off of the relay.
2.
input =+V:
The group will change and it will change after every switching off.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 15/54
B- FRONT option with Logic input configuration = 0

The active group changes every time the voltage applied to the logic input changes
state from +V to 0V.
Switch OFF the relay, then if we
1.
input =0V:
The group will change state and it will change after every switching off.
2.
input =+V:
The group will not change. It will remain as before the switching off of the relay.
NOTE :
b)
It is important to set properly the change active group with

FRONT option via a logic input. In general the customer should
be conform to the cases A-1 and B-2, so no group changes will
take place upon energizing the relay.
a remote command via the RS485 port at the rear.

NOTE:
LEVEL could be high or low level

EDGE could be riding or falling edge
The list of access methods above is given in the order of priority:
for example the configuration changeover order given by a logic
input takes priority over the one given by the keys on the front
panel.
4.5.1.2 Selection of a default value to be display

The operator can select the measured value permanently displayed on the LCD
screen from the following list:
one of the 3 phase currents IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS,
the neutral current IN RMS,
the thermal state of the motor TH. STATE,
the current value consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal

current threshold value I >: %ILoad.
4.5.1.3 Criterion for detecting a start

The MiCOM P220 relay offers the choice of start detection criteria as follows:
closure of the contactor / circuit breaker: criterion listed as 52A,
closure of the contactor / circuit breaker and overshoot of the starting current
threshold Istart ([48] EXCES. LONG START submenu). These two events must
appear within an interval of time of approximately 90 ms for the detection of a
start to be accepted. This criterion is known as 52A + I.
This facility makes it possible to adapt the configuration of the P220 relay to the type
of starting used: direct on_line or soft start.
NOTE:
The P220 relay detects the information "contactor / circuit

breaker position" via logic input No. 1 (paragraph 4.11.4.1.
"Fixed" inputs). The connection of this logic input to the
status of the breaking device is obligatory.
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 16/54
4.5.1.4 Analogue output (optional)
The MiCOM P220 relay offers an optional analogue output to make the data
available to a logic controller, at 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA as desired. The current loop
support can be used as an active source circuit or a passive source circuit. The
measured value which can be transmitted by this analogue output is selected from the
following list:
one of the 3 phase currents IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS,
the neutral current IN RMS,
the thermal state of the motor TH. STATE,
the current consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal current

threshold value I >: % Ioad,
the waiting time before another start is permitted: T bef Start,
the time before a thermal trip occurs: T bef Trip,
one of the temperatures measured by the RTD (optional): TC RTD1, TC RTD2,

TC RTD3, TC RTD4, TC RTD5, TC RTD6.
The table of correspondence of the analogue output is given in the chapter 5-3.
4.5.1.5 Type of RTD temperature probes or thermistors (optional)
The P220 relay offers optional monitoring of 6 RTD temperature probes or 2
thermistors + 4 RTD temperature probes to provide protection against temperature
rises in the stator and mechanical bearings of the motor (PROTECTION menu).
The type of RTD (PT100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10), or the type of thermistor (PTC/NTC) is
selected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu.
The table of correspondences between the temperature and resistance of the RTD is
defined in the chapter 5-3.
4.5.2

In the CT RATIO submenu, the operator sets the primary and secondary ratings of the
Phase and Earth CTs.
NOTE:
4.5.3
Where the earth current input is connected to a CT summation of

the 3 phase current circuits (residual connection, no core CT),
the primary and secondary values of "Earth CT" must be set to
the same values of those of the "Phase CTs".
The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus

Four identical submenus LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 permit configuration of the
4 programmable LEDs of the MiCOM P220 relay.
These data can originate inside the relay (protection, automatic control, or internal
logic state function) or outside the relay (logic input).
One LED is lit if at least one of the pieces of information associated with it is
valid (logic OR). It is extinguished:
either after acknowledgement of the of associated data item or items
or on the disappearance of the data item or items which gave rise to it.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 17/54
The "EMERG. RESTART" information is activated:

either following reception of an emergency start command via the logic
input programmed on "EMERG. RESTART". It stays lit up as log as the
associated logic input is excited
or following an emergency start remote order sent via the communication
network. It will be extinguished when the "SUCCESSFUL START" information
appears.
The "FORBIDDEN START" information is active if at least one of the three pieces
of data inhibiting starts is active:
either thermal inhibition of starting " FORBID. START"
or inhibition due to limitation of the number of starts " START NB LIMIT "
or inhibition due to a minimum time between 2 starts "T betw 2 start".
The motor shut down information "MOTOR STOPPED" is activated when logic
input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is not excited. It remains active until logic input
No. 1 is excited.
The motor running information "MOTOR RUNNING" is activated when logic

input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is excited. It remains active until logic input No.
1 is de energized.
The successful start information "SUCCESSFUL START" is activated after a motor

start phase if at the end of the time delay t Istart the following criteria are
respected:
the locked rotor at start information ""LOCKED ROTOR" is not present
the excessively long start information "EXCES NG START" is not present.
4.6
This information stays active until the motor shuts down (deenergisation of logic
input No. 1).
The MEASUREMENTS menu
The measurements of the phase currents and the earth current are expressed as
true root-mean-square values. For a 50 Hz motor, the harmonics are taken
into account up to the 10th order; for a 60 Hz motor the harmonics are taken
into account up to the 8th order.
The measurement of the symmetrical components is taken from the

fundamental component of the current. The positive and negative sequence
components of the current are calculated on the basis of the three phase
currents, and the zero phase sequence component is calculated from the earth
current input. The following formulae are used to calculate the symmetrical
components:
Ipositive = 1/ 3 (I A + a IB + a IC )
Inegative = 1/ 3 (I A + a IB + a IC )
I zero phase sequence = 1/ 3 Iearth
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 18/54
4.7
The frequency measurement is given if the amplitude of at least one of the three
phase currents is greater than 10 % of In (In is the rating of the phase current
inputs, 1 A or 5 A defined in the CT RATIO submenu, on the line "SEC PHASE
="). Where the frequency cannot be calculated, the relays displays "****".
The phase current maximeter retains the greatest current value of one of the
three phases outside the motor starting phase. This variable is expressed as a
true RMS value.
The PROCESS menu

A set of measurements relating to operation displayed in the PROCESS menu makes
it possible to monitor the utilisation and state of the motor.
The estimate of the time before a thermal trip T before TH TRIP is given under
the following conditions:
the thermal alarm threshold ALARM is reached
the equivalent thermal current Ieq is greater than the thermal current
threshold I >
considering the constant motor overload rate Ieq / I >.
When the above conditions are not respected, the P220 relay displays the value
****.
The number of authorised starts of the motor PERMIT START NB takes into
account all the criteria for limiting or inhibiting starting, that is, the functions:
"limitation of the number of starts",
"minimum time between 2 starts",
"thermal criterion for inhibiting a start".
When there is no limit to the number of authorised starts, the relay displays the value
****.
The indication of the time before a further start is authorised T before START" is
given when an inhibition on starting is in progress. This indication takes into
account all the criteria for limiting or inhibiting starting, that is, the functions:
"limitation of the number of starts",
"minimum time between 2 starts",
"thermal criterion for inhibiting a start".
The counter for the number of starts of the motor is incremented at each start.
In contrast, authorisation for the motor to re-accelerate does not increment this
counter.
The counter for the number of motor operation hours is the sum of hours
during which the motor is running.
NOTE:
After confirming the password, the user can reset the value of the
THERMAL STATE value to zero by pressing the " key.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
4.8
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 19/54
The TRIP STATISTICS menu

In the TRIP STATISTICS menu the following are displayed:
the total number of tripping operations,
the number of tripping operations per type of fault.
Tripping can have two possible causes:
tripping on a fault: when the P220 relay detects a fault (exceeding a threshold),
it generates a tripping order;
deliberate tripping: the operator can order tripping from three access points:
a logic input,
the RS232 port on the front panel,
the communications network via the RS485 rear port.
NOTE:
4.9
The tripping orders stored in the memory of the MiCOM P220

protection relay for the statistics are only those transmitted to
the tripping relay (logic output No. 1). This relay is one of the
logic outputs of the MiCOM P220. It is configured in the TRIP
OUTPUT RLY submenu.
Motor shutdowns for which the command was not relayed via
the output relay No. 1 of the MiCOM P220 are not taken into
account in the TRIP STATISTICS menu.
The COMMUNICATION menu
The MiCOM P220 relay can communicate under the MODBUS, Courier or
IEC 60870-5 protocols via the RS485 port located at the rear. These protocols
are based on the master-slave principle. The P220 relay can therefore be
integrated, as a slave, in a digital monitoring and control system. In this
system, the supervisor (master), for example a PC, can:
read and modify the setting values,
remote the measurements, alarm data, changes of state (changes of state of

inputs/outputs, changes of setting group), values relating to fault recordings,
disturbance recording and the form of the starting current,
issue remote orders such as commands to open or close the circuit

breaker/contactor (motor On / Off), to trig disturbance recording or to
acknowledge the relay remotely.
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 20/54
4.10
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
The PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus

The menus PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 are identical and enable the
operator to program 2 different configuration groups (CONFIGURATION menu).
Each of these 2 menus is divided into 8 submenus corresponding to the different
protection functions:
[46] UNBALANCE
[48] EXCES. LONG START
[51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR
[37] LOSS OF LOAD
[49/38] RTD SENSORS or [49] THERMISTOR (optional)
The operator can bring each of these protections into service or take them out of
service in the submenus of the menu PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2.
The setting parameters of the functions taken out of service do not appear on the
LCD unit and are not accessible via the communication
If the threshold or thresholds of these functions are reached, a time delay with a
duration preset by the operator is started. When this time delay expires, if the fault is
still present, an instantaneously signal is generated and can be used to excite one of
the output relays.
All the algorithms of the protection functions are based on the fundamental
component of the current.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 21/54
STATE OF THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS (ACTIVE/INACTIVE)
ACCORDING TO THE OPERATION MODE OF THE MOTOR
The MiCOM P220 protection functions are automatically* activated or deactivated by

the relay itself according to the motor's operation mode (motor halted, start-up
sequence, re-acceleration phase or normal running condition). The table below
indicates under which conditions these protection functions are active or inactive.
Protective
functions
Motor halted
Start-up
sequence
Motor running
Re-acceleration
phase
Thermal image
Activated (Tr)**
Activated
(Te2)**
Activated
(Te1)**
Activated
(Te2)**
Short-circuit
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Excessive long start Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
Locked rotor at start Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Stalled rotor whilst

running
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Unbalance
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Earth fault
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Loss of load
Deactivated
Activated***
Activated***
Activated***
Over temperature
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
*
These protection functions are activated by the relay only if they have previously
been commissioned by the user.
**
The time constant used in the thermal model depends on the value of the motor
load current and on the motor's operating mode. The time constant indicated in
brackets is the one used by the relay.
*** The "loss of load" function is activated upon expiry of the Tinhib timer. This
timer is user settable, it is initiated by the relay when a motor start is detected.
4.10.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu: protection against thermal overload
conditions
The MiCOM P220 relay produces a thermal image of the motor from the positive
and negative components of the current consumed by the motor, in such a way as to
take into account the thermal effects created in the stator and in the rotor. The
negative component currents consumed in the stator generate in the rotor large
amplitude currents which create a substantial temperature rise in the rotor winding.
The composition carried out by the MiCOM P220 results in an equivalent thermal
current Ieq, the image of the temperature rise caused by the current in the motor. The
current Ieq is calculated according to the following formula:
Ieq = (Ipositive + Ke Inegative )0.5
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 22/54
Starting from this equivalent thermal current, the thermal state of the motor is
calculated every cycle by the MiCOM P220 relay according to the following formula:
i+1= (Ieq/I>) . [1- e(-t/T)] + i . e(-t/T)
in which:
Ke is the negative sequence current recognition factor (adjustable).
I > is the thermal overload current threshold.
i is the value of the thermal state calculated previously.
is the time constant of the motor. As a function of the operating
conditions of the motor, the relay uses one of the following 3 thermal time
constants:
the thermal time constant e1 which is applied when the equivalent thermal
current Ieq lies between 0 and 2 I >, that is when the motor is running (load or
overload conditions);
the starting time constant e2 which is applied when the equivalent thermal
current Ieq is greater than 2 I >, that is when the motor is in the starting phase
or locked rotor condition;
the cooling time constant r which is applied when the motor is shut down (logic
input L1 in the zero logic state - terminals 22-24). In this case, the motor no
longer consumes current and the value of the thermal state therefore decreases
as time passes according to the formula:
i+1= i . e(-t/Tr)
A thermal overload signal THERM.OV is generated when the value of the thermal
state reaches 100 %.
NOTE:
On interruption of the auxiliary power supply to the P220

relay, the value of the thermal state is stored in the nonvolatile memory. On reenergisation of the relay, the value of
the thermal state is reset to its value before the interruption
if it was lower than 90 %. In the opposite case (greater than
90 %), it is reset to 90 %, to avoid premature tripping of the
relay P220 when the auxiliary voltage returns.
The thermal state of the motor is displayed in the PROCESS
menu.
On the second line of the PROCESS menu, after having
entered the password, it is possible to reset the value of the
thermal state of the motor to zero.
Even if the "thermal overload" protection function is not used,
the thermal current threshold I > must be set so that it is
possible to use the excessively long start EXCES LONG
START and stalled rotor while motor is running STALLED
ROTOR protection functions.
Examples of the thermal overload curve are shown in
chapter 5-3.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 23/54
4.10.1.1 Function inhibiting thermal tripping during a start: INHIBIT

This function permits inhibition of the thermal tripping information THERM. OV.
during the starting phase. It may be necessary to use this function for some motors
with temperature rise characteristics in a starting phase very different from those in a
locked rotor condition.
If the user brings this function into service, this inhibition is activated as soon as the
starting time delay tIstart begins (cf. submenu [48] EXCES. LONG START). On expiry
of tIstart (end of the time allowed for starting), this inhibition is deactivated.
When this function is activated, that is during the motor starting phase, the value of
the thermal state calculated cannot exceed 90 %. This means that thermal tripping
cannot take place under any circumstances. At the end of the time allowed for
starting, the value of the thermal state is authorised to exceed 90 %.
NOTE:
This function has no influence on the thermal alarm signal

ALARM and thermal inhibition of starting function
FORBID. START.
When this function is brought into service, the motor is still
thermally protected by the monitoring of the starting time.
4.10.1.2 Function of the thermal image influenced by ambient temperature (optional):

INFLUENCE RTD
When the ambient temperature exceeds + 40 C, the admissible motor current
diminishes in relation to its rated current. A setting of the protection parameters
which is suitable under normal temperature conditions is no longer suitable when the
ambient temperature rises above + 40 C.
The MiCOM P220 relay offers the possibility of taking into account this necessary
derating of motors. The thermal image can be modified by the ambient temperature
measurement.
When this function is brought into service by the user, if the ambient temperature rises
above + 40 C, the value of the thermal threshold I > is automatically modified to
adapt the motor protection to the external temperature conditions.
The rule for the ambient temperature measurement influencing the thermal image is:
For an ambient temperature lower than or equal to + 40 C, the thermal

image is not modified.
For an ambient temperature between + 40 C and + 65 C, the thermal

threshold I > is modified by a multiplying coefficient in compliance with the
following formula:
Multiplying coefficient = 1 - (ambient temperature in C - 40) / 100
For a temperature greater than or equal to + 65 C, the thermal threshold I >

is modified by a multiplying coefficient of 0.75.
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 24/54
The table below gives the relationship between the ambient temperature
measurement and the influence on the thermal image:
Ambient temperature
(in Celsius)
Correction coefficient for
the thermal threshold I >
+40 C +45 C +50 C +55 C +60 C +65 C
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.75
(multiplying coefficient)
NOTE:
ATTENTION :
This function can only be used if the relay has the option "6
RTD monitoring".
The probe used for this function is RTD 1 (terminals 2c-4c-6c).
To use this function, a probe measuring the ambient
temperature of the place where the motor is located must be
connected to terminals 2c-4c-6c.
The operator can program the temperature thresholds of
RTD 1 ([49/38] RTD submenu) even if he has brought this
INFLUENCE RTD function into service.
FOR 2 THERMISTORS + 4 RTD OPTION, THIS FUNCTION WILL BE

PROVIDED BY THE RTD CONNECTED TO TERMINALS 8C-10C-12C.
4.10.1.3 Thermal alarm function: ALARM

The purpose of this function is to produce an alarm signal indicating that the thermal
state of the motor has exceeded an adjustable threshold: ALARM. Corrective
action can thus be taken before thermal tripping occurs.
Once the threshold ALARM is exceeded, the MiCOM P220 relay calculates and
displays, in the PROCESS menu (cf. chapter 4.7 The PROCESS menu), an estimate of
the time remaining before a thermal trip THERM. OV. occurs. This estimate is given
for a constant overload rate.
4.10.1.4 Thermal start inhibition function: FORBID. START
This function makes it possible to inhibit a start on a hot motor, or not, as a function
of its thermal state. When this function has been adjusted in service by the user, a
further start is inhibited for the motor as long as its thermal state is higher than an
adjustable threshold FORBID START. It is then necessary to wait until the motor
cools down. When the value of the thermal state falls below the threshold
FORBID START, the starting of the motor is authorised.
The information inhibiting starting on a thermal criterion FORBID START is activated if
the following two conditions are fulfilled:
Motor shut down: logic input L1 in the zero state (terminals 22-24).
Thermal state value higher than the threshold FORBID START.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 25/54
The following diagram illustrates the operation of the thermal start inhibit criterion:
Shutdown of
the motor
Thermal state of
the motor
Restarting of the
motor
FORBID START
threshold
Time
Binary input L1 : interlock o/o (52A)
FORBID START signal
P0191ENa
4.10.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu

The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT function which protects the motor against short-circuits
between phases uses a definite time phase overcurrent protection. In this menu a
short-circuit current threshold I >> and its associated time delay tI >> are
adjustable.
The P220 relay generates a signal if the phase current exceeds the threshold I >> for
a length of time greater than tI >>.
In addition to this time-delayed threshold, an instantaneous information (threshold
I >> without time delay) is available.
IA
IB
IC
>=1
I>>
tI>>
Internal
logic
signals
P0192ENa
NOTE:
The time delay tI >> can be set to instantaneous.

When the operator has adjusted the SHORT-CIRCUIT [50/51]
function in service, this function is always active whatever the
mode of operation of the motor (motor running, shut down,
starting phase, locked rotor condition).
In the event of saturation of the phase CTs, the MiCOM P220
will detect a short-circuit under the following conditions:
Fault current lower than 200 times the limit current value for
saturation of the CTs.
No remanent flux in the CTs at the time of establishing the
fault.
No direct current component at the time of establishing the
fault.
Short-circuit threshold I >> set below 0.9, the limit current
value for saturation of the CTs.
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 26/54
4.10.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu
The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT function which protects the motor against faults
between one or more phases and earth uses a definite time zero phase sequence
overcurrent protection.
Earth faults create a zero phase sequence current measured either by 3 phase CTs in
a residual connection, or directly by a core balanced CT surrounding the 3
conductors.
Two independent earth current thresholds (Io > and Io >>) with their associated time
delays (tIo > and tIo >>) enable the operator to configure for example an alarm
threshold and a tripping threshold.
The settings of the thresholds are expressed as a function of the residual current (3
times the zero phase sequence component).
For each earth current threshold, time-delayed information and instantaneous
information is available.
tIo>
Io>
3 Io
tIo>>
Io>>
Internal
logic
signals
P0193ENa
4.10.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu

The [46] UNBALANCE function, which protects the motor against unbalance
conditions, broken conductor and phase inversions, is based on the measurement of
the negative sequence component of the current.
Two negative sequence overcurrent thresholds are available:
one of them, Ii >, is associated with a definite time delay,
the other, Ii >>, is associated with a inverse time characteristic.
The user can use the threshold Ii > to detect the inversion or loss of a phase, or to
give an unbalance alarm.
The threshold Ii >> has an inverse time characteristic which enables it to allow slight
instantaneous unbalances to pass whilst more substantial unbalances will be detected
more quickly. This inverse time characteristic permits selective clearance of external
two-phase faults which appear on the system. This operating characteristic in
compliance with the withstand of the motors is given in the appendix.
Ii>
IA
IB
IC
t Ii>
Internal
logic
signals
Inegative
Ii>>
P0194ENa
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 27/54
4.10.5 The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu: protection against excessively long starts
The [48] EXCES LONG START function protects the motor if the starting phase lasts
too long. To do this, it uses a starting current threshold Istart> and a starting time
delay tIstart. This threshold and this time delay can be adjusted to allow the starting
current to pass.
This function is activated (time delay tIstart initiated) as soon as the MiCOM P220 relay
detects a start (the criterion for detection of a start is selected in the
CONFIGURATION menu).
It is deactivated on expiry of the starting current time delay tIstart.
If, on expiry of the time delay tIstart, the current consumed by the motor has not fallen
below the threshold Istart> again, a prolonged start signal LONG START t Istart will be
generated.
IA
IB
IC
>=1
Motor
start-up
detection
Istart >
tI start
&
>=1
Successful
start signal
Internal
logic
signals
&
Re-acceleration
authorisation
tI start
P0195ENa
Information indicating a "successful start" is generated on expiry of the time delay tIstart
if no tripping order has been given.
NOTE:
During normal operation of the motor, the excessively long start

function EXCES LONG START can be reactivated during a
flying restart of the motor (re-acceleration of the motor following
a voltage dip), that is when re-acceleration is authorised
(AUTOMAT. CTRL menu).
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 28/54
4.10.6 The [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR submenu
4.10.6.1 Rotor stalled whilst the motor running
This function, which makes it possible to detect stalling while the motor is running, is
activated immediately after the starting period, that is on expiry of the starting time
delay tIstart (submenu [48] EXCES LONG START).
Two parameters can be set: the stalled rotor current threshold Istall with its associated
time delay tIstall, the stalled rotor time.
The MiCOM P220 relay detects the overcurrent caused by stalling and generates
information that the rotor has stalled while the motor is running if the phase current
exceeds the threshold Istall for a length of time greater than tIstall.
IA
IB
IC
>=1
Istall>
&
Successful
start signal
tI stall
Reacceleration
in progress
Motor
starting
criterion :
52A+I
>=1
&
tI stall
Internal
logic
signals
Motor startup non

detected
Motor
shutdown
( EL1 = 0 )
P0196ENa
NOTE:
During authorisation of re-acceleration (AUTOMAT. CTRL

menu), this function is deactivated during the time delay
allowed for starting tIstart.
On starting the motor, when the start detection criterion
selected is "closure of the contactor / circuit breaker and
exceeding of the starting current threshold Istart (52 A + I)", if
the relay sees only one of these events, (closure of the
breaking device or the appearance of a current greater than
Istart), then the function of monitoring a stalled rotor whilst the
motor is running is activated.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 29/54
4.10.6.2 Locked rotor at start

This function, which makes it possible to detect that the motor is locked at the start, is
activated only during the starting phase, that is during the course of the starting time
delay tIstart.
It uses speed signal from the motor received by logic input No. 2 of the P220 relay
(terminals 26-28), and the time delay tIstall: locked rotor time (a speed switch device
must be connected to this logic input: paragraph 4.11.4.1. "Fixed" inputs).
On detection of a start, the "locked rotor at start" function is activated: the time delay
tIstall begins. At the end of this time delay, the motor speed logic input (input No. 2)
must be in logic state 1 to indicate that the motor speed is not zero. The opposite
case (zero speed) means that the rotor is locked, so the P220 relay generates a
locked rotor at start order LOCKED ROTOR.
Motor
start-up
detection
t Istall
&
Internal
logic
signals
Speed switch
open
(EL2 = 0)
NOTE:
P0197ENa
The speed switch device sends information to the P220 relay

indicating, by the closing of a contact, that the rotor is
rotating.
The time delay tIstall is common to the protection functions for
"rotor stalled while motor is running" and "rotor locked at
start".
If the motor is not fitted with a speed switch device, this
function cannot be used and must therefore be deactivated.
4.10.7 The [37]LOSS OF LOAD submenu: protection against undercurrent/loss of load

conditions
The [37] UNDERCURRENT function which makes it possible to detect a loss of load
(for example the draining of a pump or breakage of a conveyor belt), uses definite
time undercurrent protection. The user sets the following parameters:
undercurrent threshold I <
time delay tI < associated with the undercurrent threshold
the inhibit start time delay Tinhib.
This function is deactivated when the motor is shut down (logic input No. 1 in the 0
state) and also during the inhibit time delay Tinhib.
When the P220 relay detects that the motor is starting, this function is activated at the
end of the inhibit time delay Tinhib.
The time delay Tinhib is useful for motors with no-load starting which take on load
gradually at the end of starting.
When the motor is running (and after expiry of the inhibit time delay Tinhib), if the value
of one of the phase currents consumed by the motor is lower than the threshold I <
for a period greater than or equal to tI <, the P220 relay will generate a loss of load
signal t I< .
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 30/54
IA
IB
IC
>=1
I<
&
Motor
start-up
detection
tI<
tinhib
Internal
logic
signals
Motor
shutdown
( EL1 = 0 )
P0198ENa
4.10.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu: temperature protection by RTD (optional)

The [49/38] RTD SENSORS [49/38] function is
temperature rises of the motor by direct temperature
monitoring 6 RTDs (Remote Temperature Detectors).
the following types: PT100, Ni120, Ni100 or
intended to detect abnormal

monitoring. This is achieved by
The RTDs can be selected from
Cu10 (types selected in the
For each RTD, the user sets:
an alarm threshold RTD # ALARM,
a time delay associated with the alarm threshold t RTD# ALARM,
a tripping threshold RTD # TRIP,
a time delay associated with the tripping threshold t RTD TRIP #.
An alarm signal is generated if the temperature measured exceeds the programmed

alarm threshold for a period of time equal to the time delay associated with this
threshold.
A tripping signal is generated if the temperature measured exceeds the programmed
tripping threshold for a period of time equal to the time delay associated with this
threshold.
The P220 relay continuously monitors the satisfactory operation of the RTD's. An
alarm will be generated if:
a RTD wiring circuit is opening
a RTD is short-circuited.
On detection of a RTD failure, a RTD/Therm ERROR alarm message is generated

and the over temperature thresholds corresponding to this RTD will be deactivated.
The RTD can be located:
at the stator windings (protection of the stator, indirect protection of the rotor,
detection of failure of the cooling system),
at the mechanical bearings (to detect failure of the lubrication),
outside the motor (ambient temperature measurement), at the same level as

that of the entry of cooling air.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 31/54
NOTE:
The symbol # corresponds to the number of the RTD.

The RTDs monitored must obligatorily be all of the same type
(all of type PT100, or Ni100, or Ni120, or Cu10).
It is possible to connect only the RTDs that one wishes to
monitor.
RTD 1 can be used to measure the ambient temperature and
thus influence the thermal image (see 4.10.1.2).
4.10.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu: temperature protection by thermistor (optional)

This submenu provides the monitoring of 2 thermistors + 4 RTD sensors.
The [49] THERMISTOR function, like the preceding one, detects abnormal
temperature rises. It operates with thermistors of type PTC or NTC (selected in the
The P220 relay can monitor 2 thermistors. Each thermistor input is linked to an
independent threshold (Thermist#) with a fixed time delay of 2 seconds. For each
thermistor, the user sets a threshold in ohms.
A "Thermist#" order is generated if the thermistor resistance measured exceeds this
threshold for a length of time greater than or equal to 2 seconds.
NOTE:
The symbol # corresponds to the number of the thermistor.
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 32/54
4.11
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu

The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu comprises the following 10 submenus:
[66] START NUMBER
MIN TIME BETW 2 START
RE-ACCEL AUTHORIZ
INPUTS
AND LOGIC EQUATION
AND LOGIC T EQUA DELAY
AUX OUTPUT RLY
LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS
TRIP OUTPUT RLY
LATCH TRIP ORDER
SW SUPERVISION
4.11.1 The [66] START NUMBER submenu : limitation of the number of starts per period
The [66] NB DEM function allows the number of motor start-ups over a given period
to be limited. In effect, starting the motor too frequently can be too constraining for
the motor (over-heating), for its starting system (starting impedance, electrolytic
bath,...) or can in some cases reveal an anomaly in the process operation,
The [66] NB DEM function uses the following adjustable parameters.
a monitoring period Treference
a number of hot starts limit HOT START NB
a number of cold starts limit COLD START NB
a start inhibit time delay Tinterdiction.
Each time an motor start is detected, the Treference time delay is initiated and the
number of starts registered by the counter corresponding to the temperature of the
motor (hot or cold) is incremented by one. At the end of this time delay, the counter
in question will be decremented by one.
Each time the motor is stopped (change of state of logic input No. 1: from state 1 to
state 0) relay P220 establishes whether either of the two counters has been reached.
If so, start inhibit signal START NB LIMIT will be generated for a length of time equal
to Tinterdiction. At the end of Tinterdiction, this signal drops out, and it is possible to start the
motor again.
Examples: Taking as an example cold starts where the limit of the number of cold
starts has been set at 3 for a period of Treference.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 33/54
Case n1:
The number of cold starts limit has been reached and the motor is stopped before the
end of the Treference period: the Tinterdiction time delay is therefore initiated when the motor
stops. A new start up is permitted at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay.
Istart
IN
2 more starts permitted
1 more start permitted
No start permitted
motor
T reference
T reference
T reference
T inter diction
START NB LIMIT
P0199ENa
Case n2:
The number of cold starts limit is reached but the motor is not stopped until after the
end of the Treference period: therefore the Tinterdiction time delay is not initiated. There is
no start inhibit.
Istart
IN
2 more starts permitted
No start permitted
motor
T reference
T reference
T reference
START NB LIMIT (logic state at 0)

P0200ENa
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 34/54
Case n3:
Particular cases where at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay, the number of starts
counter is still reached (the Tinterdiction time delay period is completed before the end of
Treference): any new start up is inhibited until the end of the Treference period (the START NB
LIMIT signal is extended).
Istart
IN
No start permitted
motor
T reference
T reference
T reference
T interdiction
START NB LIMIT
P0201ENa
NOTE:
A start is considered cold if the value of the motors thermal

state is less or equal to 50% when an motor start phase is
detected.
A start is considered warm if the value of the motors thermal
state is more than 50% when an motor start phase is
detected.
In cases where at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay period,
one of the counters is still reached, the START NB LIMIT start
inhibit signal will not drop out until the counter in question is
decremented (example case No.3).
The number of authorised starts and the waiting time before a
new start is authorised are available in the PROCESS menu
(see section 4.7. The PROCESS menu).
4.11.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu: minimum time between two starts
Excessive motor or starting system heating caused by two consecutive starts can be
avoided by means of the MINI TIME BETW 2 START function.
It is based on the use of an adjustable time delay: minimum time between 2 starts T
betw 2 start .
This time delay is initiated on detection of an motor start up by the P220 relay. When
the motor stops, if the T betw 2 start time delay has not finished, start inhibit signal
Tbetw 2 start is generated until the end of the Tbetw 2 start time delay.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 35/54
Examples
Case n1:
Case n2:
The stopping of the motor takes place

before the end of the Tbetw 2 start
time delay period.
A start inhibit signal Tbetw 2 start
is generated during the Tbetw 2
start period.
The stopping of the motor takes place

after the end of the Tbetw 2 start
time delay period, no start inhibit
signal is generated.
Istart
Istart
IN motor
IN motor
T betw 2 start
T betw 2 start
T betw 2 start
T betw 2 start (logic state at 0)
P0202ENa
P0203ENa
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 36/54
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
4.11.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu: Reacceleration authorization

A fall in voltage from the electrical network causes a reduction in rotor speed. When
the voltage is restored, the rotor starts on a re-acceleration phase in order to regain
its nominal speed. This re-acceleration manifests itself as a intake of current of
approximately the same value as that of the locked rotor current, its duration being
relative to the magnitude of the fall in voltage.
The MiCOM P220 can be informed of the fall in voltage from the mains. A
programmable logic input of the relay (input VOLT. DIP - the submenu INPUTS, see
section 4.11.4.2. The submenu INPUTS: programmable inputs) receives a binary
siganl indicating that there is a reduction in voltage from the mains. By comparing
how long this voltage reduction lasts with an adjustable time delay Treacc, the relay
will authorise or prevent the motors re-acceleration.
The user adjusts a time delay Treacc. This time delay corresponds to the maximum
duration of a voltage sag for which the motor re-acceleration is to be authorised.
On receipt of binary signalling a voltage sag, the MiCOM P220 relay initiates the
Treacc time delay. Two circumstances are possible:
If the duration of the voltage sag is less than the time delay Treacc and if in the 5
seconds following the end of the voltage sag the current absorbed by the motor
exceeds the lstall> threshold ([51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR function), then:
The P220 goes into monitoring of a start phase (initiation of the tIstart time
delay, EXCES LONG START function) and it deactivates the stalled rotor
whilst running function.
At the end of the tIstart delay allowed for a start, the relay P220 reactivates
the stalled rotor whilst running function.
If the duration of the voltage sag is more than the Treacc time delay, the P220
relay does not modify its operation. When the motor tries to reaccelerate, an
tripping order will be generated by the stalled rotor whilst running function if
the current absorbed by the motor exceeds the Istall> threshold for a length of time
exceeding tlstall.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 37/54
Examples
Case n1:
The duration of the drop in voltage is less than the Treacc time delay, when the mains
voltage is restored, re-acceleration of the motor is authorised.
Voltage sag
Network/mains
voltage
Current
absorbed by
the motor
Istall > threshold

Motor
reacceleration
T reacc
Fixed window of 5 s
" Drop in voltage " signal

(binary input)
t Istart
Reacceleration authorization
" stalled rotor whilst running " function active

" stalled rotor whilst running "
function deactivated
P0204ENa
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 38/54
Case n2:
The duration of the voltage drop is greater than the Treacc time delay, reacceleration of the motor is not authorised. When the current absorbed exceeds the
current threshold Istall> (non authorised re-acceleration attempt), the stalled rotor
whilst running function starts up in order to give an instruction to stop the motor.
Voltage sag
Network/mains
voltage
Current
absorbed by
the motor
Istall > threshold

Motor
reacceleration
T reacc
"Drop in voltage" signal
(binary input)
t Istall
No reacceleration authorisation (logic state 0)

Instruction to stop the motor given by the
"stalled rotor whilst running" function
P0205ENa
NOTE:
A drop in voltage is only taken into account if it lasts for at least

100 ms.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 39/54
4.11.4 Binary inputs and outputs Logical gates

Thanks to its programmable scheme logic, inputs and outputs, the MiCOM P220
relay allows control and logic diagrams to be realised. The P220 relay has:
5 logic inputs of which 3 are programmable
6 logic outputs of which 5 are programmable
4 AND logic gates
In order to realise the control and logic diagrams, two types of data are taken into
account by the relay:
internal type data:

logic state of protection function (instantaneous, time delayed signals)
logic state of an logic or state function (start inhibit, successful start)
external type data:

data received via its logic inputs
data received via the communication network (remote control by the
supervisor).
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 40/54
Below, a logic diagram shows the different possibilities offered by the MiCOM P220
relay:
&
toperation
treset
toperation
treset
PROTECTION
functions
&
External and
internal
logic signals
AUTOMAT.
CTRL
EXT 1
Logic
input
EXT 2
Logic
input
EXT 3
Logic
input
EXT 4
Logic
input
&
&
toperation
treset
toperation
treset
Output
relays
allocation:
RL1
RL2
RL3
RL4
RL5
Internal
logic signals
Remote
communication
P0206ENa
4.11.4.1 Fixed inputs

Two of the P220s logic inputs are predefined for a fixed use, these are:
Logic input No 1 (terminals 22 - 24) is linked to the position of the fuse-contactor

or circuit breaker (52a). This input should be linked to the 52a interlock of the cut
off device (the 52a interlock is open when the cut off device is open, it is closed
when the cut off device is closed). The connection of this logic input is
compulsory.
The logic input No. 2 (terminals 26-28) is linked to motor speed binary data.
This logic input links up to a speed sensor usually known as a speed switch .
The speed switch should be open when the rotor is not turning and should
close as soon as it detects rotor rotation. The connecting of this logic input to a
speed switch device is necessary in order to be able to use the locked rotor at
start protection function.
NOTE:
When the logic input No. 2 is not linked to a speed switch ,

this logic input has no assignment.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 41/54
4.11.4.2 The INPUTS submenu: programmable inputs

The user can program three of the P220s logic inputs. These are logic input No. 3
(terminals 13-15), No 4 (terminals 17-19) and No 5 (terminals 21-23). The user
chooses the allocation of these logic inputs in the INPUTS menu.
NOTE:
Except for the "None" allocation, any other function can be

allocated to only one logic input.
Options of allocated
information of logic inputs
Label
Operation mode of logic input
EMERGENCY START
EMERG ST
LEVEL
SWITCHING BETWEEN
CONFIGURATIONS
SET GROUP
LEVEL/ EDGE
DISTURBANCE TRIGGERING
DIST TRIG
EDGE
EXTERNAL
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
EXT RESET
LEVEL
RE ACCELERATION
AUTHORIZATION
VOLT DIP
LEVEL
AUXILIARY 1 and 2
EXT 1 and EXT 2
LEVEL
AUXILIARY 3 and 4
EXT 3 and EXT 4
LEVEL
No Assignement
NONE
EMERGENCY START
An emergency start may be necessary for safety reasons. When the logic input
having been assigned to the EMERG ST function is powered on (logic state is
active), the P220 relay reacts as follows:
The thermal state value is muzzled at 90% so that no thermal trip order
THERM. OV. can occur during the motor start up phase (see section
4.10.1.1. Function inhibiting thermal tripping during a start: INHIBIT). At the
end of the tIstart time delay allocated to the start up, the thermal condition value
will be allowed to exceed 90%.
The thermal start inhibit signal FORBID START is suppressed.
The start inhibit START NB LIMIT signal from the limitation of number of
starts function is suppressed.
The T betw 2 start start inhibit signal from the minimum time between 2
starts function is suppressed.
The motor can therefore be restarted and no thermal tripping can take place during
the start up phase.
NOTE:
The logic input EMERG ST must be kept powered during

the whole of the motor start up phase.
The relay P220 can also receive a remote emergency start
command via the communication network.
An emergency start up instruction EMERG ST does not
order the closure of the cut off device (motor start up) but
makes the motor start up possible.
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 42/54
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
SWITCHING BETWEEN CONFIGURATIONS (PASSAGE FROM ONE SETTING GROUP

TO ANOTHER)
The P220 relay has two configurations (2 setting groups). The switching from one
configuration to another can be achieved using one programmed logic input on
SET GROUP . When you allocate the information SET GROUP to a logic input, it
is possible to configure the operation of this logic input on LEVEL or on EDGE
(minimum duration of 15ms).
The change from one configuration to another can also be achieved via the operator
menu or the communication network (see section 4.5.1.1. Configuration Group).
A parameter setting group change is not possible if one of the following protection
functions is in progress (that is to say if the current threshold of these functions is
exceeded):
[50/51] SHORT CIRCUIT function
[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT function
[46] UNBALANCE function
[48] EXCES LONG START function
[50S/51LR] BLOCK ROTOR function
[37] LOSS OF LOAD function
[49/38] RTD (optional)
[49] THERMISTOR
TRIGGING OF THE DISTURBANCE RECORDING

By assigning the command DIST TRIG to a programmable logic input, the
operator will be able to initiate the disturbance recordings (RECORD menu) from this
input. The energising (rising front) of this programmed logic input on DIST TRIG
will trigger a disturbance recording.
EXTERNAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
By dedicating a logic input to the external acknowledgement command EXT
RESET , the operator can acknowledge the alarms and unlatch the output relays if
the latter were kept energised (see section 4.11.10. The LATCH TRIP ORDER
submenu), by energising this logic input.
RE-ACCELERATION AUTHORISATION
The voltage drop data VOLT. DIP can be assigned to one of the inputs to enable
relay P220 to take voltage drops into account in order to authorise re-accelerations if
necessary (refer to chapter REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu).
AUXILIARY 1 AND AUXILIARY 2 DATA
The EXT1 and EXT2 assignments allow relay P220 to acquire two lots of
external binary data. A time delay (t EXT 1 and t EXT 2 respectively) is linked to each
assignment.
The internal EXT1 signal to the relay is in logic state 1 if the associated logic input
is energised for a time longer or equal to t EXT 1 time delay. When the logic input is
no longer energised, the logic state of the internal EXT1 signal drops back to 0.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 43/54
The internal EXT2 signal to the relay is in logic state 1 if the associated logic input
is energised for a time longer or equal to t EXT 2 time delay. When the logic input is
no longer energised, the logic state of the internal EXT2 signal drops back to 0.
When the t EXT 1 and t EXT 2 timers expire, the following happen:
an alarm message is sent
the Alarm LED is lit
an event is recorded.
AUXILIARY 3 AND AUXILIARY 4 DATA

The EXT3 and EXT4 assignments operate similarly to EXT1 and EXT2 ,
but when the associated timers expire, there is no alarm message and the Alarm LED
is not lit. The only result is an event record.
NO ASSIGNMENT
When a logic input is programmed on NONE (None) it becomes inactive.
Whether this logic input is switched on or not, relay P220 takes no account of it.
4.11.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu: AND programmable logic gates
The AND LOGIC EQUAT function allows the operator to programme 4 AND logic
equations, known respectively as A, B, C and D.
Each equation can be the logic AND of one, two or several items of internal logic
signals (protection or automatism functions) or external data (state of logic inputs
EXT 1 , EXT2 , EXT 3 and EXT4 ) to the relay P220.
In this menu, the user constructs each of the 4 logic equations by creating logic
AND gate between several items of data. Data is assigned to a logic equation by
positioning the corresponding digit to 1. When the digit is set at 0, the data is not
assigned to the corresponding logic equation.
Examples:
You want to create 2 AND logic equations.
For the first equation, you wish to implement the AND logic of the following data:
time delayed earth fault 1st element (tlo>)
successful start (SUCCESS START)
logic state of one of the binary inputs(EXT1)
tIo>
SUCCESS START
EXT 1
&
P0207ENa
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 44/54
For the second logic equation, you wish to implement le logic AND of the
following data:
unbalance fault 1st element (tli>)
logic state of one of the binary inputs (EXT1)
tIi>
EXT 1
&
P0208ENa
Programming in the AND LOGIC EQUAT menu is carried out as follows. In this
example, the first equation will be the A equation and the second B:
t I0>
DCBA
0001
t Ii>
DCBA
0010
EXT1
DCBA
0011
SUCCESS
START
DCBA
0001
Allocation of the t lo> data to equation A.
Allocation of the t li> data to equation B.
Allocation of the EXT1 data to logic equations A

and B.
Allocation of the SUCCESS START data to equation

A.
4.11.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY: AND logic gate time delay
2 time delays can be linked to each of the 4 programmable logic equations: one
operation time delay and one reset time delay. These 8 independent time delays (4
logic equations, 2 time delays per equation) are configurable in the AND LOGIC
EQUAT T DELAY submenu.
The operation time delay (Toperat) is initiated only if all the associated data in a logic
equation are valid (AND gate). It allows the logic equation validation to be delayed
for a time Toperat.
The reset time delay (Treset) is initiated as soon as any of the data associated with the
equation disappears. This allows the equation to remain valid after an item of data
has disappeared for a length of time Treset.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 45/54
Example:
Logic equation C obtained from the combination (AND logic) of three lots of data 1,
2 and 3 with the Toperat and Treset time delays.
1
2
3
Equation C
T operat
T reset
P0209ENa
4.11.7 The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : auxiliary programmable output relays
In this menu the user assigns the MiCOM P220 internal or external data to the
auxiliary output relays (relays No2, No3, No4 and No5). These are changeover type
relays (1 common, 1 normally open contact, 1 normally close contact). One relay is
switched on when at least one of the data items linked to it is valid (OR logic). It
drops back once all its associated data has disappeared.
Data assignable to the auxiliary output relays can be:
of the internal type
logic state of a protection function (instantaneous, time delayed

signals)
logic state of an automatism or state function (start inhibit, successful

start)
the result of an AND logic equation
of the external type
signal received via logic inputs ( EXT1 , EXT2 , EXT3 and

EXT4 )
signal received via the communication network (remote control by

the supervisor).
4.11.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu

This submenu makes it possible to maintain closed the contacts of outputs assigned to
one or more thresholds after the disappearance of the cause; this type of latching is
carried out by relay and not by function.
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 46/54
4.11.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu: Configuration of the trip output relay
Data which is going to control the relay No 1 (terminals 2-4-6) can be assigned using
the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu. This changeover type relay is used to give a tripping
order to the cut-off device.
The relay No1 (tripping relay) has the same electrical and mechanical characteristics
as the other output relays.
Reminder: A certain number of the MiCOM P220 functions are based on the
operation of relay No1, i.e.
The Trip Cause Statistics (refer to 4.8)
The Latching of the Trip Output Relay (refer to 4.11.10)
The Surveillance of the cut-off device (refer to 4.11.11)
The display of data relating to the cut-off device (refer to 4.12.3)
The record of fault values (refer to 4.12.1)
The triggering of disturbance record (refer to 4.12.2)
4.11.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu : Latching of the output relays
In this menu, the user selects which functions are to maintain the output relays
energised when an order is generated by these functions.
The functions for which output relays can be latched are:
time delayed threshold tl>> ([50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu)
time delayed threshold tlo>> ([50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu)
time delayed threshold tli>> ([46] UNBALANCE submenu)
AND logic equation A (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)
AND logic equation B (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)
AND logic equation C (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)
AND logic equation D (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)
Thus, when one of the above functions generates a command via one or several
output relays, the corresponding relays remain energised after the disappearance of
the command. It will be necessary to come and acknowledge the P220 in order to
switch off the output relay(s).
NOTE:
Latching of the output relays is optional for each of these

functions. The user can chose whether to assign these
functions to the output relay latching facility .
There are three possible ways to acknowledge the P220, and
thus switch off the output relays in the event of latching:
- press the " button
- send an acknowledge order to the configured logic input
on EXT RESET
- send a acknowledge remote order via the communication
network (order given by a supervisor)
On loss of auxiliary power, the output relays drop back. On
return of auxiliary power, the output relays are re-energised,
independently of the fault status (still present or cleared).
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 47/54
4.11.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu:

The P220 relay monitors the operation of the cut-off device (fuse-contactor or circuit
breaker). Three criteria are monitored and for each of these an adjustable alarm
threshold is available to the user. These thresholds are based on:
Monitoring of the time of opening of the cut-off device. This is the time from
the moment when the P220 sends an order to the output relay No1 to the
moment when the P220 relay receives the data on the logic input No. 1
(terminals 22-24) indicating that the cut-off device is open.
Monitoring of the number of opening orders. This is the number of tripping

orders which have been given to relay No 1.
Monitoring of the summation of the amps to exponent n cut by the cut-off

device The value of the intensity being taken into account is that of the current
at the moment when the output relay No 1 receives a tripping order.
When one of the thresholds described above is exceeded, an alarm message is

available on the display and logic data can be assigned by the user on one or
several of the auxiliary output relays (relays No 2,3,4 or 5).
So as to adapt the MiCOM P220 to any type of cut-off device, the user can also
configure 2 time delays:
A making time (Ttrip) for maintaining the tripping order information: For each
tripping order sent on the relay No 1, this one is maintained excited for (Ttrip) time (if
the trip output relay latching facility were not parameterized)
A marking time (Tclose) for maintaining the closing order information: A command
of interlocking (closing of the switchgear) given by the communication network
(remote control CLOSE ORDER) is maintained on the auxiliary output relay during a
time equal to Tclose. It is about the output relay to which the CLOSE ORDER was
affected (AUX OUTPUT RLY menu).
NOTE:
For the summation of the amps to exponent n cut, the

exponent n can be adjusted to the value 1 or the value 2.
In all cases, the orders sent on the output relay No1 (tripping
order) are maintained for at least 100 ms.
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 48/54
4.12
The RECORD menu

The RECORD menu comprises 3 sub menus
FAULT RECORD
DISTURB RECORD
SW MONITORING
4.12.1 The FAULT RECORD submenu

A collection of data on each of the 5 last faults registered is displayed in the FAULT
RECORD sub menu.
For each logging, the relay memorises:
the fault number
the time of the fault
the date of the fault
setting group (group G1 or G2) active at the time of the fault
the faulty phase
the function which detected the fault
magnitude of fault current (in fundamental value)
the 3 phase currents (in True RMS values)
the earth current (in True RMS value)
The recordings of the fault are accessible:
either through the Human Machine Interface (display front face)
or using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port)
or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)
Fault number 5 is the last fault registered, fault number 1 is the oldest.
NOTE:
Data registered in the non volatile memory are available for

one year without auxiliary power thanks to a backup battery
housed in the front face.
These data are not erasable. They are managed in a circular
list: when this is full, the oldest fault is erased.
Faults are signalled by one or several alarm messages.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 49/54
4.12.2 The DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu

The MiCOM P220 relay offers the possibility of saving 5 disturbance records. The
data are acquired at a frequency of 32 samples per electrical cycle, ie. 1600Hz in a
50Hz system or 1920 Hz in 60Hz system, and allows for a very faithful reconstruction
of the analogue signals.
For each recording, the relays memorises:
the 3 phase currents
the earth current
the frequency
the state of the 5 logic inputs
the state of all the output relays (including the watchdog relay)
the date and the time
The total duration of a recording is defined by the configuration of the pre-time and
post-time. The pre-time defines the duration of the recording before the disturbance
recording triggering order, the post time defines the duration of the recording after
the disturbance recording triggering order. In all cases, the total duration of a
recording cannot exceed 3 seconds.
Duration of recording : 3 seconds maximum
Pre-time
Post-time
Triggering order
P0210ENa
The triggering of a disturbance recording can be generated:
when a logic entry programmed on DIST TRIG is excited (see section

4.11.4.2.3 Trigging of the disturbance recording)
on receipt of a remote control from a supervisor on the communications

network (RS485 rear port)
on receipt of a remote control from MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front

port)
when one of the following occurs (exclusive choice):

instantaneous over-stepping of one of the following current thresholds:
l>>, lo>, lo>> (instantaneous short-circuit, instantaneous earth fault 1st
threshold and instantaneous earth fault 2nd threshold data respectively)
or when output relay No 1 is excited (relay dedicated to the tripping of the
cut-off device). The excitement of this relay can be due to the detection of
an electrical fault or to a voluntary opening order (opening remote control
on the communication network, external order relayed by one of the logic
inputs).
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 50/54
The disturbance recordings can be retrieved:
either using the communication network (RS485 rear port)

NOTE:
If the configuration of the pre-time and post-time corresponds

to total recording duration of more than three seconds then
the post-time duration is automatically reduced so that the
total recording duration is 3 seconds.
Disturbance recordings are not erasable. They are managed
in a circular list: when this is full, the oldest recording is
erased.
The data registered in non volatile memory are available for
1 year without auxiliary power, thanks to a back-up battery
housed in the front face.
When the disturbance recordings are extracted from relay
P220 using the MiCOM S1 support software, they are stored
in the COMTRADE format.
4.12.3 The SW MONITORING submenu

In this menu the operator with access to data relating to the cut-off device:
Summation of the amps exponent n switched by the cut-off device for each
phase.
Total number of operations of relay No 1
Opening time of the cut-off device.

NOTE:
These data are those calculated by the relay P220 whilst in

the SW SUPERVISION menu the operator with access to the
adjustment of the parameters to generate alarm data when a
threshold is exceeded.
The way in which relay P220 calculates its data is explained in
the section SW SUPERVISION ( 4.11.11).
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
4.13
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 51/54
ALARM messages
The management of the alarms is carried out directly on the front face screen. The
display of alarm messages takes priority over that of the value by default (selected in
CONFIG. SELECT submenu), so that as soon as an alarm is detected by the, the
message is displayed on the MiCOM P220 relay screen.
The alarm messages are classified into 2 categories:
Motor alarm message
Relay hardware or software fault, or RTD/thermistor failure message
The display of a HARDWARE ALARM message takes priority over the display of a
MOTOR ALARM message.
NOTE:
Upon loss of auxiliary power supply, the alarm messages

disappear. They are restored upon return of the power supply.
4.13.1 The MOTOR ALARM messages

Data considered as motor alarm are displayed in the MOTOR ALARMS menu.
If several alarms appear, they are written to memory in the order of their detection.
They are displayed in reverse chronological order (the most recent alarm first, the
oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is
indicated.
Example
This message indicates an earth fault (time delayed threshold tlo>>). This alarm is
the 2nd out of total of 7.
t I0>>
2/7
The operator can read all the alarm messages using the ! key, without needing to
key in the pass word.
The operator can acknowledge the alarms using the ! key. Keying in the password
is not necessary. The operator can acknowledge each message one at a time, or
acknowledge all the messages by going to the end of the list and acknowledging all
the messages by pressing the " key.
NOTE:
If an alarm has not been acknowledged, it will not be possible to

view the default display programmed by the operator.
4.13.2 The HARDWARE ALARM messages

The safety and availability of the MiCOM P220 relay can be improved by a cyclic
autotest procedure of both hardware and software. Each time the P220 relay is
switched on, auto-diagnostic tests are initiated: these tests deal with the output relays
(engaging / triggering tests), the microprocessor, the memories (EEPROM checksum
calculation, RAM tests) and the acquisition circuit of each analogue input.
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 52/54
The hardware faults are split into 2 groups:
Minor faults: these are faults classified as non serious (communication fault,
analogue output fault, 3.6V battery, RTD or thermistor failure and date indicator
fault).
Major faults: these are serious faults (RAM fault, EEPROM data fault, EEPROM
calibration fault, analogue signal acquisition fault, watchdog fault).
Any major fault recorded is immediately the subject of an alarm and provokes the
activation of the WATCHDOG relay (relay No0, terminals 35-36-37), as well as the
switching off of the other output relays.
The acknowledged alarms are all written to memory in the order of their appearance.
The display of the alarms is ensured in reverse chronological order (the most recent
alarm first, the least recent last). Each message is numbered and the total number of
messages is indicated in the top left hand corner of the display.
The operator can read all of the alarm messages using the ! key, without any
necessity to key in the pass word.
The acknowledgement of the relay hardware alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only
the disappearance of the cause of the alarm will provoke their acknowledgement.
The display of a hardware fault (equipment fault) takes priority over the other alarms
(non equipment fault).
NOTE:
In the case of major hardware alarm and even when the tripping
relay is configured to be latched, it drops out.
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN FT/B43
Page 53/54
5.
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
5.1
Event records
The MiCOM P220 relay registers 75 changes of state in non volatile memory and
dates them with a precision of 1 ms. For each change of state the relay indicates the
date, the time and the wording of the event.
This applies to any change of state of the logic inputs / outputs, the alteration of one
or several setting parameters, alarm or triggering data. Please refer to Chapter 6Communications for more information.
The recordings of the consignment of states can be downloaded:
either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port)

NOTE:
5.2
The data are registered in non volatile memory and are

available for one year without auxiliary power thanks to a
back-up battery housed in the front face.
These consignments are not erasable. They are managed in
a circular list: when this is full, the change of state of the
oldest is erased.
Recording of the form of the starting current

The MiCOM P220 relay records the form of current of the last start. In order to do
this, it records at each period (every 20 ms if the frequency is at 50 Hz) the maximum
value of one of the three phase currents. The values recorded are expressed in True
RMS values.
The recording is initiated following detection by the relay of an motor start up, it stops
at the end of the tlstart time delay allocated to the start up.
The file containing the recording of the form of the starting current can be repatriated
on a PC:
either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port)
or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port). The data will be
stored in COMTRADE format.
NOTE:
The data are recorded in non volatile memory and are

available for one year without auxiliary power, thanks to a
back-up battery housed in the front face.
The maximum duration of a recording is limited to 40
seconds.
P220/EN FT/B43
Technical Guide
User Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 54/54
6.
PC CONNECTION DUN PC LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS
6.1
Connection configuration
Configuration is indicated in the figure below:
P0220ENb
The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located
under the bottom hinged cover.
It provides RS232 (IEC60870 compliant) serial data communication and is intended
for use with a PC connected locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in the
figure above. This is a pin-to-pin connection which must not be used as a permanent
connection.
6.2
Configuration of the relay and PC

Once the physical connection is established, the relay and PC settings must be
checked in order to start the communication.
The default communication settings of the RS232 port are as follows:
Protocol
Modbus
Rate
19 200 bits/s
Address
Must be set in the "Communication" menu, "Address" line.
Message format
11 bit - 1 bit start, 8 bits data, 1 bit even, 1 bit stop.
Technical Guide
P220/EN HI/B43
MiCOM P220
Menu of the HMI
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 1/48
CONTENT
1.
THE OP PARAMETERS MENU
2.
CONFIGURATION MENU
2.1
CONFIG. SELECT submenu
2.2
2.3
The LED submenus
2.4
CONFIGURATION INPUTS submenu
2.5
Date Format submenu
3.
THE MEASUREMENTS MENU
10
4.
THE PROCESS SUBMENU
11
5.
THE TRIP STATISTICS MENU
12
6.
THE COMMUNICATION MENU
14
7.
THE PROTECTION MENU
15
7.1
The [49] THERMAL OVERLOD submenu
15
7.2
The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu
16
7.3
The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu
17
7.4
The [46] UNBALANCE submenu
18
7.5
The[48] EXCES LONG START submenu
19
7.6
The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu
20
7.7
The [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu
21
7.8
The [49/38] RTD submenu
22
7.9
The [49] THERMISTOR submenu
23
8.
THE AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU
24
8.1
The [66] Start number submenu
24
8.2
The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu
24
8.3
The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu
25
8.4
The INPUTS submenu
26
8.5
The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu
27
8.6
The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu
29
8.7
The AUX OUPUT RLY submenu
30
8.8
The LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu
33
8.9
The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu
34
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 2/48
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
8.10
The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu
36
8.11
The SW SUPERVISION submenu
37
9.
RECORD MENU
38
9.1
38
9.2
The DISTURB RECORD submenu
39
9.3
40
10.
MENUS CONTENT
41
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
1.
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 3/48
THE OP PARAMETERS MENU

Press the ! and " keys to move around in the OP
PARAMETERS menu.
OP PARAMETERS
PASSWORD =
****
Modification of the password : key in the old password

and confirm it. Then press the # key, key in the new
password and confirm the whole input with the # key.
The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to
indicate that the password has changed.
Displays the model of MiCOM relay.
TYPE =
P220
REFERENCE =
XXXX
SOFTWARE VERSION =
3.C
FREQUENCY=
50 Hz
Displays your reference code. It contains letters

between A and Z. To enter it, press the # key for each
letter and use the ! and " keys to move forwards
and backwards in the alphabet.
After each letter, press the $ key to enter the next letter.
At the end of the input, press the # key to confirm
your reference code.
Displays the software version code.
Acquisition of the reference frequency of the electrical

power system. There is a choice of: 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Displays the Active Group.
ACTIVE GROUP=
1
INPUT
ST =
54321
00000
OUTPUT
ST =
54321
00000
DATE
Displays the state of the binary inputs.

The binary inputs are numbered from 1 to 5 starting
from the right. The state of each binary input is
displayed immediately below:
- state 0: input inactive.
- state 1 : input active
Displays the state of the output relays. The output
relays are numbered from 1 to 5 starting from the
right. The status of each output relay is displayed
immediate below:
- state 0: input inactive.
- state 1 : input active
Selection and display of the date.
14/09/00
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 4/48
TIME
Selection and display of the time.

16:35:30
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
2.
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 5/48
CONFIGURATION MENU
Press the ! and " keys to enter the
CONFIGURATION menu
CONFIGURATION
2.1

To move about in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, use
the ! and " keys. To go into the CT RATIO, LED 5,
LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus, press the % and $
keys.
CONFIG. SELECT
CHANGE GROUP
INPUT =
EDGE
SETTING GROUP
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA RMS
START DETECTION
52A + I dem
ANALOG. OUTPUT
0 - 20 mA
DATA TYPE ANALOG

IA RMS
RTD type =
PT100
Thermist 1 type =
PTC
Thermist 2 type =
NTC
Selection of the mode of operation of the logic inputs.

Choice of: EDGE/LEVEL.
Selection and display of the configuration group.

Choice of: group 1 or group 2.
Selection and display of a default value. There is a

choice of: IA RMS or IB RMS or IC RMS or I0 RMS or
THERM ST or % I LOAD
Selection and display of the start detection criterion.
Choice of: 52A or 52A +I
Selection and display of the type of analogue output:

0-20 mA or 4-20 mA (optional)
Selection and display of the value transmitted by the

analogue output (optional). Choice of: IA RMS, IB
RMS, IC RMS, I0 RMS, THERM ST, % I LOAD, Tbef
START, Tbef TRIP (respectively time delay before start,
time delay before thermal tripping) TC RTD1, TC
RTD2, TC RTD3, TC RTD4, TC RTD5, TC RTD6.
Selection and display of the type of RTD temperature
probe (optional): PT100, Ni100, Ni120 or Cu10
Selection and display of the type of thermistor 1

(optional) : choice of PTC or NTC
Selection and display of the type of thermistor 2

(optional) : choice of PTC or NTC
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 6/48
2.2

CONFIGURATION menu
CONFIGURATION
To move around in the CT RATIO submenu, press the

! and "keys.
To go into the CONFIG. SELECT, LED 5, LED 6, LED 7
and LED 8, press the % and $ keys.
CT RATIO
PRIM PH =
****
SEC PH =
*
PRIM E =
****
SEC E =
*
Selection and display of the primary rating of the

phase CT. The value is entered on 4 figures: from 1 to
3000 in steps of 1.
Selection and display of the secondary rating of the
phase CT. The value is to be selected between either 1
or 5.
Selection and display of the primary rating of the earth
CT. The value is entered on 4 figures: from 1 to 3000
in steps of 1.
Selection and display of the secondary rating of the
earth CT. The value is to be selected between either 1
or 5.
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
2.3
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 7/48
The LED submenus

CONFIGURATION menu.
CONFIGURATION
To move around in the LED 5 submenu, press the !

and " keys. To go to the CONFIG. SELECT, CT
RATIO, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus, press the %
and $ keys.
LED 5
THERM OVERLOAD ?
YES
ALARM ?
NO
t I >> ?
NO
t Io > ?
NO
t Io >> ?
NO
t Ii > ?
NO
t Ii >> ?
NO
t I< ?
EXCES LONG
START ?
NO
NO
t Istall ?
NO
To link LED 5 with the "thermal overload" function so

that it lights up if the thermal overload function
operates, press #, select YES by using the ! and "
keys, then press # again to confirm
This links LED 5 to the thermal alarm threshold
ALARM.
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tI>>

(protection against short-circuits).
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIo>

(protection against Earth faults)
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIo>>

(protection against Earth faults)
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIi >

(protection against unbalances).
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIi >>

(protection against unbalances)
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold t I<

(protection against undercurrent / losses of load).
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIstart

(protection against excessively long starts).
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold t Istall

(protection against rotor stalling when the motor is
running)
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 8/48
LOCKED ROTOR ?
NO
This links LED 5 to the function "rotor locked on

starting"
This links LED 5 to the "emergency restart" information.
EMERG RESTART ?
NO
FORBIDDEN START ?
NO
t RTD 1, 2, 3 ALARM ?
NO
t RTD 1, 2, 3 TRIP ?
NO
t RTD 4, 5, 6 ALARM ?
NO
t RTD 4, 5, 6 TRIP ?
NO
Thermist 1, 2?
NO
This links LED 5 to the "forbidden start" information
This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD1

ALARM, tRTD2 ALARM and tRTD3 ALARM (temperature
protection: optional)
This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds
tRTD1 TRIP, tRTD2 TRIP and tRTD3 TRIP (temperature
tRTD4 ALARM, tRTD5 ALARM and tRTD6 ALARM
(temperature protection: optional)
tRTD4 TRIP, tRTD5 TRIP and tRTD6 TRIP (temperature
Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (temperature protection:
optional)
ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)
This links LED 5 to the auxiliary time delay tEXT1
EXT 1 ?
NO
EXT 2 ?
This links LED 5 to the auxiliary time delay tEXT2

NO
MOTOR STOPPED ?
NO
MOTOR RUNNING ?
NO
This links LED 5 to the indication with the information

"motor stopped"

"motor running".
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 9/48
SUCCESSFUL
START ?
2.4
CONFIGURATION INPUTS submenu

Inputs :
2.5
NO

"successful start"
54321
11111
Configuration of the mode of operation of logic inputs.

Choice: 0 or 1.
Date Format submenu

DATE FORMAT:
PRIVATE
NOTE:
Configuration of the Date format for synchronization.

Choice: PRIVATE or IEC.
If the choosen protocol for communication is Modbus, so you will

find this submenu in the "COMMUNICATION" menu.
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 10/48
3.
THE MEASUREMENTS MENU

Press the ! and " keys to move about in the
MEASUREMENTS menu.
MEASUREMENTS
IA RMS =
0.00 A
IB RMS =
0.00 A
IC RMS =
0.00 A
IN RMS =
0.00 A
Display of the current of phase A (true RMS value)

taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT RATIO
submenu)
Display of the current of phase B (true RMS value)
submenu)
Display of the current of phase C (true RMS value)
submenu)
Display of the earth current (true RMS- value) taking
into account the earth CT ratio (CT RATIO submenu)
Display of the positive sequence current
I1 POSITIVE =
0.00 A
Display of the negative sequence current
I2 NEGATIVE =
0.00 A
Display of the zero sequence current
Io ZERO =
0.00 A
FREQUENCY =
0.0 Hz
MAX PH CURRENT =
PROCESS
0.00 A
NOTE:
Display of the frequency of the power system supplying

the motor, calculated from the phase currents
Display of the maximum phase current value outside

the starting period
The 3 phase currents and the earth current are displayed as true
RMS values: taking into account up to the 10th harmonic at 50
Hz, and up to the 8th at 60 Hz.
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
4.
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 11/48
THE PROCESS SUBMENU

PROCESS menu.
PROCESS
% I FLC
0%
THERMAL STATE =
CLR ?= CL
0%
T before TH TRIP =
0s
Display of the current consumed by the motor as a

percentage of the thermal tripping current threshold
I>
Display of the thermal state of the motor (tripping at
100 %).
For the test phases of the relay P220, you can reset the
thermal state to zero by pressing the key &.
Display of the time before thermal tripping occurs,
once the thermal alarm threshold ALARM is exceeded.
Display of the temperature of the probe RTD1

(optional).
... and similarly for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and
RTD6 (optional).
Temperature
RTD 1 = C
Display of the number of starts permitted.
PERMIT START NB
0
T before START
0s
Display of the time to wait before a new start is

permitted.
Display of the current of the last start.
Last Start I =
0.00 A
Display of the duration of the last start.
Last Start Time

0s
MOTOR START NB
CLR ? = CL 0
EMERG RESTART NB
CLR ? = CL 0
MOT OPERAT HOURS

CLR ? = CL 0 h
Display of the number of starts of the motor.

To reset to zero press & key.
Display of the number of emergency starts.

To reset to zero: press & key.
Display of the number of operating hours of the motor.

To reset to zero: press & key.
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 12/48
5.
THE TRIP STATISTICS MENU

Press the ! and " keys to move about in the TRIP
STATISTICS menu.
TRIP STATISTICS
STATISTICS
CLR ? = CL
To reset all the tripping statistics to zero, press key &.

NO
TOTAL TRIP NB
0
OPERATOR TRIP NB
0
THERM TRIP
NB =
t I >> TRIP
NB =
t Io>, t Io>> TRIP

NB =
t Ii > , t Ii >> TRIP

NB =
t Istart TRIP
NB =
t Istall TRIP
NB =
LOCKED ROTOR TP
NB =
Display of the total number of tripping operations (with

and without fault)
Display of the number of deliberate tripping operations

(without fault)
Display of the number of tripping operations caused by

a thermal overload

a short-circuit

an Earth fault

an unbalance

an excessively long start

a stalled rotor while the motor is running

a locked rotor when starting
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
t I < TRIP
NB =
RTD1 TRIP
NB =
thermist 1 TRIP
NB =
EQUATION A TRIP
NB =
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 13/48

the protection against undercurrents/loss of load

the temperature protection function by probe RTD1
(optional)
...and so on for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6
(optional
the temperature protection function by thermistor 1
(optional)
...ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)
Display of the number of tripping operations on
account of the validation of equation A
ditto for equations B, C and D.
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 14/48
6.
THE COMMUNICATION MENU
If communication is under the MODBUS protocol

COMMUNICATION menu
COMMUNICATION
COM. OK =
YES
DATA RATE =
19200 Bd
PARITY =
WITHOUT
DATA BITS=
STOP BITS =
1
RELAY ADRESS =
1
Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the

MiCOM P220 relay.
To activate the communication, press the # key, select
YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again
to confirm.
Selection and display of the transmission speed.
Choice of: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200 or 38400 bauds.
Selection and display of the parity in the
communication frame. Choice of: With (even or odd)
or Without
Selection and display of the number of data bits in the
frame. Choice of: 7 or 8
Selection and display of the number of stop bits. Au

Choice : 1 or 2
Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM

P220 relay in the network. Choice from: 1 to 255
If communication is under the Courier protocol

COMMUNICATION menu.
COMMUNICATION
COM. OK =
YES
RELAY ADRESS =
Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the

MiCOM P220 relay
To activate the communication, press the # key, select
YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again
to confirm.
Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM
P220 relay in the network. Choice from: 1 to 255
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 15/48
7.
THE PROTECTION MENU
7.1
The [49] THERMAL OVERLOD submenu

Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1
menu.
PROTECTION G1
[49] THERMAL OVER

LOAD
To move about in the submenu [49] THERMAL

OVERLOAD, press the ! and "keys.
To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.
THERMAL OVERLOAD
FUNCT ?
YES
To switch on the "thermal overload" function: press the

# key, select YES by using the ! and ".
Confirm with #.
INHIBIT ?
YES
I > =
0.2 In
Ke =
Te1 =
1 mn
Te2 =
1 mn
Tr =
1 mn
RTD1 INFLUENCE ?
YES
ALARM ?
YES
To switch on the "thermal inhibition on starting"

function, press the # key, select YES using the ! and
" keys.
To confirm the selection, press the # key.
Setting of the thermal overload current threshold I>:
from 0.2 In to 1.5 In in steps of 0.01 In
Setting of the value of the negative sequence

contribution factor Ke in the thermal image :
from 0 to 10 in steps of 1
Setting of the value of the overload time constant Te1:
from 1 to 180 minutes in steps of 1 min
Setting of the starting time constant value Te2:

from 1 to 360 minutes in steps of 1 minute
Setting of the value of the cooling time constant Tr:

from 1 to 999 minutes in steps of 1 minute
To switch on the function of "influence of a RTD

temperature probe" (optional): press the # key, select
YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the
selection, press the # key.
To switch on the "thermal alarm" function: press the #
key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm
the choice, press the # key.
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 16/48
ALARM =
20 %
FORBID START ?
YES
FORBID START =
7.2
20 %
Setting of the thermal alarm threshold value ALARM:

from 20 % to 100 % in steps of 1 %
To switch on the "thermal inhibition of start" function:

press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys.
Setting of the threshold value for thermal inhibition of
start forbid:
from 20% to 100% in steps of 1%
The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu

menu.
PROTECTION G1
I>> FUNCTION ?
YES
I >> =
1.0 In
t I >> =
10 ms
To move about in the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT

submenu, press the ! and " keys..
To switch on the "short-circuit" function :
press the # key. Select YES by using the ! and "
keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.
Setting of the short-circuit current threshold value I>>:
from 1 to 12 In by steps of 0.1 In.
Setting of the time delay tI>> associated with the

threshold I>>:
from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
7.3
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 17/48
The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu

menu.
PROTECTION G1
To move about in the [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT

submenu, press the ! and " keys
[50N/51N] EARTH
FAULT
Io> FUNCTION ?
YES
Io> =
0.002 Ion
t Io> =
0 ms
Io>> FUNCTION ?
YES
Io>> =
0.002 Ion
t Io>> =
10 ms
To switch on the "earth fault" function (threshold Io>):

press the # key.
Select YES by using the ! and " keys.
Setting of the first earth fault current threshold value
Io>:
from 0,002 to 1 Ion in steps of 0,001 Ion
Setting of the time delay tIo> associated with the
threshold Io>:
from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.01
To switch on the "earth fault" function (Io>> threshold):
press the # key.
Select YES by using the ! and " keys
Setting of the second earth fault current threshold value
Io>> :
from 0.002 to 1 Ion in steps of 0.001 Ion
Setting of the time delay associated with the threshold
Io>> :
from 0 ms to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 18/48
7.4
The [46] UNBALANCE submenu

menu.
PROTECTION G1
To move about in the [46] UNBALANCE submenu,

press the ! and " keys.
[46] UNBALANCE
Ii> FUNCTION ?
YES
Ii > =
0.05 In
t Ii > =
40 ms
Ii>> FUNCTION ?
YES
Ii >> =
0.2 In
To switch on the "unbalance" function (threshold Ii>):

press the # key, select YES by using the ! and "
keys.
Setting of the first unbalance current threshold value
Ii> :
from 0.05 to 0.8 In in steps of 0.025 In
Setting of the time delay tIi> associated with the
threshold Ii> :
To switch on the unbalance function (Ii>>
threshold) : press the # key, select YES by using the !
and " keys.
Setting of the second unbalance current threshold
value Ii>>:
from 0,2 to 0,8 In in steps of 0,05 In
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
7.5
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 19/48
The[48] EXCES LONG START submenu

menu.
PROTECTION G1
[48] EXCES LONG

START
To move about in the [48] EXCES LONG START

submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other
submenus, press the % and $ keys.
EXCES LONG START

FUNCT ?
YES
To switch on the "excessively long start" function: press

the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys.
Istart DETECTION
=
1.0 I
t Istart =
14 s
Setting of the Istart detection threshold :

from 1 to 5 I pain steps of 0,5 I
Setting of the time delay tIstart associated with the

threshold Istart:
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 20/48
7.6
The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu

PROTECTION G1

menu.
[51LR-50S] BLOCK
ROTOR
BLOQUE
To move about in the [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR

submenu, press the ! and " keys.
BLOCKED ROTOR
FUNCT ?
To switch on the "blocked rotor" function: press the #

key: select YES by using the ! and " keys.
YES
t Istall =
0,1 s
Setting of the blocked rotor time delay tIstall associated

with the Istall current threshold:
from 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s
YES
To switch on the "stalled rotor with motor running"

function : press the # key, select YES by using the !
and " keys.
Istall DETECTION
=
1.0 I
Setting of the stalled rotor detection current threshold

Istall:
from 1 to 5 I in steps of 0.5 I
LOCKED ROTOR AT
START ?
YES
To switch on the "locked rotor at start" function: press

the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys
To confirm the selection, press the # key
STALLED ROTOR?
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
7.7
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 21/48
The [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu

menu.
PROTECTION G1
To move about in the [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu,

press the ! and " keys
To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys
[37] LOSS OF LOAD
I< FUNCTION ?
YES
I<=
0.1 In
tI<=
0.2 s
T inhib =
50 ms
To switch on the "undercurrent" function: press the #

key, select YES by using the ! and " keys.
Setting of the undercurrent threshold value I < :
from 0.1 to 1 In in steps of 0.01 In
Setting of the tI < time delay associated with the

threshold I < :
from 0.2 to 100 s in steps of 0.1 s
Setting of the inhibition time of the "undercurrent / loss
of load" function on starting, Tinhib :
from 50 ms to 300 s in steps of 0.1 s
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 22/48
7.8
The [49/38] RTD submenu

menu.
PROTECTION G1
To move about in the [49/38] RTD submenu, press the

! and " keys.
[49/38] RTD
SENSORS
RTD 1 FUNCTION ?
YES
RTD 1 ALARM =
0C
t RTD 1 ALARM =
0.0 s
RTD 1 TRIP =
0C
t RTD 1 TRIP =
0.0 s
To switch on the temperature protection function using

probe RTD1: press the # key, and select YES by using
the ! and " keys.
Setting of the alarm temperature threshold value for
RTD1 ALARM:
from 0 to 200 C in steps of 1 C
Setting of the time delay tRTD1 ALARM associated with
the RTD1 ALARM threshold :
Setting of the tripping temperature threshold value for
RTD1 TRIP:
from 0 to 200C in steps of 1C
Setting of the time delay tRTD1 TRIP associated with the
RTD1 TRIP threshold :
from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0,1 s
...and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5
and RTD6
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
7.9
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 23/48
The [49] THERMISTOR submenu

menu.
PROTECTION G1
To move about in the [49] THERMISTOR submenu,

press the ! and " keys. To enter the other
submenus, press the % and $ keys.
[49] THERMISTOR
Thermistor 1 ?
YES
Thermist 1 =
0.1 k
Thermistor 2 ?
YES
Thermist 2 =
0.1 k

thermistor 1: press the # key, select YES by using the
! and " keys.
Setting of the resistance threshold value for
Thermistor1:
thermistor 2: press the # key: select YES by using the
! and " keys.
Setting of the resistance threshold value for
Thermistor2:
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 24/48
8.
THE AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU
8.1
The [66] Start number submenu

Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL
menu.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
To move about in the [66] START NUMBER submenu,

[66] START NUMBER
START NB LIMITAT
FUNCT ?
YES
Treference =
10 mn
HOT START NB =
0
COLD START NB =
T interdiction =
1 mn
8.2
To switch on the "number of starts limitation" function:

press the # key, select YES by using the ! and "
keys.
Setting of the reference time Treference during which
the starts are counted:
from 10 to 120 min in steps of 5 min
Setting of the threshold of the number of hot starts:
from 0 to 5 in steps of de 1
Setting of the threshold of the number of cold starts :

from 0 to 5 in steps of de 1
Setting of the time delay during which starting is

forbidden Tinterdiction:
The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu

menu.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
To move about in the MIN TIME BETW 2 START

MIN TIME BETW 2

START
TIME BETW START

FUNCT ?
YES
T betw 2 start =
1 mn
To switch on the "minimum time between two starts"

function: press the # key, select YES by using the !
and " keys
Setting of the minimum time between two starts Tbetw
2 starts :
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
8.3
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 25/48
The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL
REACCEL AUTHORIZ
REACCEL AUTHORIZ
FUNCT ?
YES
VOLT DIP DURAT

Treacc =
0.2 s

menu.
To move about in the REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu,

To switch on the "re-acceleration authorisation"
function: press the # key, and select YES by using the
! and " keys.
Setting of the re-acceleration time delay Treacc :
from 0.2 s to 10 s in steps of 0.05 s
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 26/48
8.4
The INPUTS submenu

menu.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
To move about in the INPUTS submenu, press the !

and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the %
and $ keys. .
INPUTS
INPUT 3 =
NONE
INPUT 4 =
NONE
INPUT 5 =
NONE
t EXT 1 =
0s
t EXT 2 =
0s
t EXT 3 =
0s
t EXT 4 =
0s
To programme the inputs numbered 3, 4 and 5, press

the # key, then press the ! and " keys to scroll
through the possible allocations :
- none (no allocation) : NONE
-emergency start : EMERG ST
-change of configuration : SET GROUP
-voltage dip : VOLT. DIP
-triggering of the disturbance recording : DIST TRIG
- external acknowledgement : EXT RESET
- external auxiliary1 : EXT 1
- external auxiliary 2 : EXT 2
To confirm your selection, press the # key.
Setting of the time delay tEXT1 associated with the
input EXT 1 :
input EXT 2 :
input EXT 3 :
input EXT 4 :
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
8.5
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 27/48
The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL
AND LOGIC EQUATION
THERM OV
DCBA
0000
ALARM
DCBA
0000
FORBID
START
DCBA
0000
I >>
DCBA
0000
t I >>
DCBA
0000
Io>
DCBA
0000
t Io>
DCBA
0000
Io>>
DCBA
0000
t Io>>
DCBA
0000

menu.
To move about in the AND LOGIC EQUATION

To allocate the "thermal tripping information"
(protection against thermal overloads) to one (or more)
of the equations A, B, C and D :
press the # key, allocate the value 1 under the letter
by pressing the ! and " keys to increase or decrease,
then confirm the selection using the #.
Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold ALARM
Allocation of the thermal threshold for prohibiting

starting forbid
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold I >> (shortcircuit)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tI >> (shortcircuit)
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io> (earth

fault)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo> (earth

fault)
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io >> (earth

fault)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo>> (earth

fault)
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 28/48
t Ii >
DCBA
0000
t Ii >>
DCBA
0000
EXCES LG
START
DCBA
0000
t Istall
DCBA
0000
LOCKED
ROTOR
DCBA
0000
tI<
DCBA
0000
START NB
LIMIT
DCBA
0000
T betw 2
Start
DCBA
0000
t RTD 1
ALARM
DCBA
0000
t RTD 1
TRIP
DCBA
0000
Thermist1
DCBA
0000
EXT1
DCBA
0000
Allocation of the time delayed threshold tIi>

(unbalance)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi>>

(unbalance)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstart

(excessively long starts)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (stalling

of the rotor when the motor is running)
Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start"
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold I <

(undercurrent/loss of load)
Allocation of the function "limitation of the number of

starts"
Allocation of the function Tbetw 2 start (function of the

minimum time between 2 starts)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 ALARM

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 TRIP

and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD 5
and RTD6 (optional)
Allocation of the threshold Thermistor1: (temperature
Allocation of the input EXT1 (instantaneous or with time
delay)
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
8.6
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 29/48
EXT2
DCBA
0000
EXT3
DCBA
0000
EXT4
DCBA
0000
SUCCESS
START
DCBA
0000

delay)

delay)

delay)
Allocation of the information "successful start"
The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu

menu.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
AND LOGIC EQUAT

T DELAY
To move about in the AND LOGIC EQUATION T

DELAY submenu, press the ! and " keys.
EQU. A T operat =
0 mn
Setting of the time delay Toperat allocated to the logic

equation A:
from 0 to 60 min in steps of 0.1 s
EQU. A T reset =
0 mn
Setting of the time delay Treset allocated to the logic

equation A:
from 0 to 60 min in steps of 0.1 s
... and so on for the logic equations B, C and D
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 30/48
8.7
The AUX OUPUT RLY submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL
AUX OUTPUT RLY
THERM OV.
5432
0000
ALARM
5432
0000
FORBID.
START
5432
0000
I >>
5432
0000
t I >>
5432
0000
Io>
5432
0000
t Io>
5432
0000
Io>>
5432
0000
t Io>>
5432
0000

menu.
To move about in the AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu,

press the ! and " keys
To allocate the "thermal tripping" information
(protection against thermal overloads) to one (or more)
of the outputs Nos. 2 to 5 :
press the # key, allocate the value 1 under the letter
by pressing the ! and " keys to increase or decrease,
then confirm the selection using the # key.
Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold ALARM
Allocation of the thermal threshold for prohibiting

starting forbid
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold I >> (shortcircuit)
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io> (earth

fault)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo> (earth

fault)
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io >> (earth

fault)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo>> (earth

fault)
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 31/48
t Ii >
5432
0000
t Ii >>
5432
0000
EXCES LG
START
5432
0000
t Istall
5432
0000
LOCKED
ROTOR
5432
0000
tI<
5432
0000
START NB
LIMIT
5432
0000
T betw 2
start
5432
0000
t RTD 1
ALARM
5432
0000
t RTD 1
TRIP
5432
0000
Thermist1
5432
0000
EXT1
5432
0000
Allocation of the time delayed threshold tIi>

(unbalance)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi>>

(unbalance)

(excessively long starts)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (stalling

of the rotor when the motor is running
Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold I <

(undercurrent / loss of load)
Allocation of the function "limitation of the number of

starts"
Allocation of the function Tbetw 2 start (functions of the

minimum time between 2 starts)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 ALARM


and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5
and RTD6 (optional)
Allocation of the threshold Thermistor 1: (temperature
delay)
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 32/48
EXT2
5432
0000
EXT3
5432
0000
EXT4
5432
0000
CLOSE
ORDER
5432
0000
TRIP
ORDER
5432
0000
ORDER 1
5432
0000
ORDER 2
5432
0000
SUCCESS
START
5432
0000
t EQU. A
5432
0000
t EQU. B
5432
0000
t EQU. C
5432
0000
t EQU. D
5432
0000

delay)

delay)

delay)
Allocation of the closing command (order given by a

supervisor via the RS485)
Allocation of the tripping command (order given by a

supervisor via the RS485)
Allocation of the command ORDER 1 (any order given

by a supervisor via the RS485)
Allocation of the command ORDER 2 (any order given

by a supervisor via the RS485)
Allocation of the "successful start" information
Allocation of the logic equation A
Allocation of the logic equation B
Allocation of the logic equation C
Allocation of the logic equation D
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
8.8
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 33/48
SW OPER
TIME
5432
0000
SW OPER
NB
5432
0000
SAn
5432
0000
ACTIVE GR
5432
0000
Allocation of the circuit breaker operating time

threshold
Allocation of the threshold of the number of operations

performed by the circuit breaker
Allocation of the threshold of the sum of amperes to

the power of n interrupted by the circuit breaker
Allocation of the active group
The LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu

Latching configuration of ouput relay n2.
OUTPUT 2
NO
OUTPUT 3
NO
OUTPUT 4
NO
OUTPUT 5
NO
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 34/48
8.9
The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu

menu.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
To move about in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu,

TRIP OUTPUT RLY
THERM OVERLOAD ?
YES
t I >> ?
YES
t Io> ?
YES
t Io>> ?
YES
t Ii > ?
YES
t Ii >> ?
YES
EXCES LONG
START ?
YES
t Istall ?
YES
To allocate the thermal tripping information

(protection against thermal overloads) to the trip output
relay (output relay n 1), press the # key, select YES
using the ! and " keys, then confirm the selection
using the # key.
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo > (earth

fault)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo >> (earth

fault)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi >

(unbalance)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi >>

(unbalance)

(excessively long start)
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (rotor

stalled while motor is running)
Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start"
LOCKED ROTOR ?
YES
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
tI<?
t RTD1 ?
TRIP
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 35/48
YES
YES
Thermist 1 ?
YES
EXT 1 ?
YES
EXT 2 ?
NO
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tI <

(undercurrent / loss of load)

and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5
and RTD6 (optional)
Allocation of the threshold Thermistor1: (temperature
delay)

delay)
Allocation of the logic equation A
EQUATION A ?
YES
EQUATION B ?
Allocation of the logic equation B

NO
Allocation of the logic equation C
EQUATION C ?
NO
Allocation of the logic equation D
EQUATION D ?
NO
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 36/48
8.10
The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu

menu
AUTOMAT. CTRL
To move about in the LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu,

press the ! and " key.
To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys
LATCH TRIP ORDER
LATCH t I>> ?
YES
LATCH t Io>> ?
YES
LATCH t Ii >> ?
YES
Latching of the output relay n1 (trip output relay) on

exceeding the time delayed short-circuit threshold tI> :
press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys,
then confirm the selection using the # key.
Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIo
>> (earth fault)
Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIi

>> (unbalance)
Latching on validation of equation A
LATCH EQUA A ?
YES
Latching on validation of equation B
LATCH EQUA B ?
NO
Latching on validation of equation C
LATCH EQUA C ?
NO
Latching on validation of equation D
LATCH EQUA D ?
NO
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
8.11
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 37/48
The SW SUPERVISION submenu

menu
AUTOMAT. CTRL
To move about in the SW SUPERVISION submenu,

SW SUPERVISION
SW OPERATING
TIME ?
YES
SW OPERATING TIME=
150 ms
SW OPERATION NB ?
YES
SW OPERATION NB =
150
SAn?
YES
SAn=
0 E6
To switch on the circuit breaker operating time

threshold function: press the # key, and select YES by
using the ! and " keys.
To confirm the selection, press the # key again
Setting of the operating time threshold SW OPERATING
TIME :
from 50ms to 1s in steps of 50ms
Switching on the threshold of the number of operations
performed by the circuit breaker: select YES
Setting of the threshold of the number of operations :

Switching on the threshold of the sum of amperes to

the power n interrupted by the circuit breaker: select
YES
Setting of the threshold of the sum of amperes to the
power n interrupted :
from 106 to 4 000x106 in steps of 106
E6 means 106.
Setting of the exponent n :1 or 2
n=
1
Setting of TRIP T: from 0.2 to 5 s in steps of 0.1 s
TRIP T =
0.1 s
Setting of CLOSE T: from 0.2 to 5 s in steps of 0.1 s
CLOSE T =
0.1 s
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 38/48
9.
RECORD MENU
9.1

Press the ! and " keys to enter the RECORD menu.
RECORD
To move about in the FAULT RECORD submenu, press

the ! and " keys.
To enter DISTURB RECORD submenu, press the % and
$ keys.
FAULT RECORD
FAULT NUMBER
OCCUR FAULT HOUR

16 : 39 : 23 : 82
OCCUR FAULT DATE

01/09/98
ACTIVE SET GROUP
PHASE IN FAULT
PHASE A
FAULT DETECTED
BY
I>>
MAGNITUDE
Displays the fault number. To display the information

on one of the last 5 faults, press the # key, and select
the number (1 to 5) by using the ! and " keys, then
press the # key again to confirm the selection
Displays the time of the fault
Displays the date of the fault
Displays the active configuration group (1 or 2) at the

time of the fault
Displays the faulty phase or phases: phase A, phase B

or phase C
Displays the origin of the fault: here it is exceeding the

instantaneous threshold I >>
Displays the amplitude of the fault

1.917 kA
IA MAGNITUDE
1.917 kA
IB MAGNITUDE
1.997 kA
Displays the value of the current of phase A (IA) at the

time of the fault (true RMS value)
Displays the value of the current of phase B (IB) at the

Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 39/48
IC MAGNITUDE
1.931 kA
IN MAGNITUDE
0.03 A
9.2
Displays the value of the current of phase C (IC) at the

Displays the value of the earth current IN at the time of

the fault (true RMS value)
The DISTURB RECORD submenu

RECORD
To move about in the DISTURB RECORD submenu,

To enter FAULT RECORD submenu, press the % and $
keys.
DISTURB RECORD
PRE-TIME =
0.1 s
POST-TIME =
0.1 s
DISTUR REC TRIG =

ON INST.
Setting of the "pre-time" time :

from 0,1 to 3 s in steps of 0,1 s
Setting of the "post-time" time delay :

from 0,1 to 3 s in steps of 0,1 s
Selection of the criterion for starting the disturbance

recording :
- on exceeding certain instantaneous thresholds
(I>, Io> et Io>>) : ON INST.
- on tripping of the n1 relay (trip output relay) :
ON TRIP
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 40/48
9.3

RECORD
SW MONITORING
To reset to zero the sum of the amperes to the power

of n interrupted: press the & key
SA
CLR ? = CL
S A IA =
0 E00
S A IB =
0 E00
S A IC =
0 E00
SW OPERATION NB =
CLR ?=CL
0
SW OPERAT TIME =
100 ms
NOTE:
To move about in the SW MONITORING submenu,

Displays the sum of the square amperes interrupted by

the circuit breaker for the current of phase IA.
Displays the sum of the amperes to the power n

interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of
phase IB.
Displays the sum of the amperes to the power n
interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of
phase IC.
Displays the number of operations performed by the
circuit breaker. To reset to zero: press the & key
Displays the opening time of the circuit breaker.
If the user has set the exponent n to the value 1 in the SW

MONITORING submenu, the term SA shall replace the term SA2
to indicate the sum of the amperes interrupted in place of the
sum of the square amperes interrupted.
TIME
16 : 35 : 30
14/09/00
54321
00000
OUTPUT
ST =
DATE
54321
00000
INPUT
ST =
Active Group =
FREQUENCY =
50 Hz
SOFTWARE VERSION
4.C
=
REFERENCE =
XXXX
PT100
Thermist 2 Type =
NTC
Thermist 1 Type =
PTC
RTD Type =
DATA TYPE ANALOG

IA RMS
ANALOG. OUTPUT
0 - 20 mA
START DETECTION.
52 A + I
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA RMS
SETTING GROUP
1
****
****
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
EMERG
RESTART ?
FORBIDDEN
START ?
t RTD 1, 2, 3
ALARM ?
t RTD 1, 2, 3
TRIP ?
t RTD 4, 5, 6
ALARM ?
t RTD 4, 5, 6
TRIP ?
Y/N
t Istall?
LOCKED
ROTOR ?
Y/N
Y/N
t I< ?
EXCES LONG
START ?
Y/N
t Ii >> ?
Y/N
t I0 >> ?
Y/N
Y/N
t Ii > ?
Y/N
t I0 > ?
ALARM ?
t I >> ?
Y/N
Y/N
THERM
OVERLOAD ?
LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8
Y/N
Y/N
SUCCESSFUL
START ?
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
MOTOR
RUNNING ?
MOTOR
STOPPED ?
EXT 2 ?
EXT 1 ?
Thermist
1, 2 ?
MiCOM P220 - Menu content
SEC E =
PRIM E =
SEC PH =
Change GROUP
Input =
EDGE
P220-4
PRIM PH =
CONFIG. SELECT
PASSWORD =
****
TYPE =
CT RATIO
CONFIGURATION
Inputs:
54321
11111
CONFIGURATION INPUT
Date format =
Private
DATE FORMAT
10.
OP PARAMETERS
DEFAULT DISPLAY
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 41/48
MENUS CONTENT
MAX PH CURRENT =
PROCESS 0.00 A
FREQUENCY =
0.0 Hz
Io ZERO =
0.00 A
I2 NEGATIVE =
0.00 A
0s
MOT OPERAT HOURS

CLR ? = CL
0h
I < TRIP
NB =
EQUATION D TRIP
NB =
0
EQUATION C TRIP
NB =
0
EQUATION B TRIP
NB =
0
EQUATION A TRIP
NB =
0
Thermist 2 TRIP
NB =
0
Thermist 1 TRIP
NB =
0
RTD 1 TRIP
NB =
RTD 2 TRIP
NB =
..........
RTD 6 TRIP
NB =
1
RELAY ADDRESS =
1
STOP BITS =
PARITY =
WITHOUT
DATA RATE =
19200 Bd
COM. OK =
YES
COMMUNICATION
DATA BITS =
LOCKED ROTOR TP
NB =
0
t Istall TRIP
NB =
t Istart TRIP
NB =
t Ii>, t Ii >> TRIP

NB =
0
t I0>, t I0 >> TRIP

NB =
0
t I >> TRIP
NB =
0
THERM TRIP
NB =
0
OPERATOR TRIP NB
0
TOTAL TRIP NB
0
STATISTICS
CLR ? = CL
TRIP STATISTICS
Page 42/48
EMERG RESTART NB
CLR ? = CL
MOTOR START NB
CLR ? = CL
0
Last Start Time

0s
Last Start I =
0.0 A
T before START
PERMIT START NB
0
Temperature
RTD 1 =
C
RTD 2 =
C
......
RTD 6 =
C
IN RMS =
0.00 A
I1 POSITIVE =
0.00 A
T before TH TRIP =
0s
IC RMS =
0.00 A
THERMAL STATE =
CLR ? = CL 0 %
IB RMS =
0.00 A
0%
% I FLC
PROCESS
IA RMS =
0.00 A
MEASUREMENTS
DEFAULT DISPLAY
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
1 mn
1 mn
1 mn
0.2 In
YES
20 %
YES
FORBID START =
20 %
FORBID START ?
YES
ALARM =
ALARM ?
RTD INFLUENCE ?
YES
Tr =
Te2 =
Te1 =
Ke =
I > =
INHIBIT ?
THERMAL OVERLOAD
YES
FUNCTION ?
[49] THERMAL
OVERLOAD
PROTECTION
G1/G2
t I>> =
I>> =
10 ms
1.0 In
I>> FUNCTION ?
YES
[50/51] SHORTCIRCUIT
DEFAULT DISPLAY
0 ms
0.002 Ion
0 ms
0.05 In
li>> =
0.2 In
li>> FUNCTION ?
YES
t li> =
li> =
Ii> FUNCTION ?
YES
[46] UNBALANCE
t Istart =
14 s
Istart DETECTION
=
1.0 I
EXCES LONG START

FUNCT ?
YES
[48] EXCES LONG

START
MiCOM 220 - Menu content
10 ms
0.002 Ion
t I0 >> =
I0>> =
I0>> FUNCTION ?
YES
t I0 > =
I0> =
I0> FUNCTION ?
YES
[50N/51N] EARTH
FAULT
0.1 s
LOCKED ROTOR AT
START ?
YES
Istall DETECTION
=
1.0 I
STALLED ROTOR ?
YES
t Istall =
BLOCKED ROTOR
FUNCT ?
YES
[51LR/50S] BLOCK
ROTOR
T inhib =
t I< =
I< =
50 ms
0.2 s
0.1 In
I< FUNCTION ?
YES
[37] LOSS OF LOAD
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 43/48
t RTD 6 TRIP=
0.0 s
t RTD 1 TRIP =
0.0 s
t RTD 2 TRIP =
0.0 s
........
Thermist 2 =
0.1 k
RTD 1 TRIP =
0C
YES
Thermistor 2 ?
t RTD 1 ALARM =
0.0 s
YES
Thermist 1 =
0.1 k
Thermistor 1 ?
[49] THERMISTOR
RTD 1 ALARM =
0C
RTD 1 FUNCTION ?
YES
[49/38] RTD
SENSORS
PROTECTION
G1/G2
DEFAULT DISPLAY
MiCOM 220 - Menu content
EXT 4 =
EXT 3 =
EXT 2 =
T interdiction =
1 mn
0s
0s
0s
0s
EXT 1 =
INPUT 4 =
NONE
VOLT DIP DURAT

Treacc =
0.2 s
COLD START NB =
0
INPUT 3 =
NONE
REACCEL AUTHORIZ
FUNCT ?
YES
INPUT 5 =
NONE
INPUTS
REACCEL AUTORIZ
HOT START NB =
0
T betw 2 start =
1 mn
TIME BETW START

FUNCT ?
YES
START NB LIMITAT
FUNCT ?
YES
Treference =
10 mn
MIN TIME BETW 2

START
[66] START NUMBER
AUTOMAT. CTRL
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 44/48
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
ALARM
FORBID
START
I >>
t I >>
I0 >
t0>
I0 >>
t I0 >>
t Ii>
THERM OV. D C B A
0000
AND LOGIC
EQUATION
AUTOMAT. CTRL
DCBA
0000
t RTD 6
TRIP
SUCCESS
START
EXT 4
EXT 3
EXT 2
EXT 1
Thermist 2
Thermist 1
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
EQU. D T reset =
0 mn
EQU. D T operat =
0 mn
EQU. C T reset =
0 mn
EQU. C T operat =
0 mn
EQU. B T reset =
0 mn
EQU. B T operat =
0 mn
EQU. A T reset =
0 mn
EQU. A T operat =
0 mn
AND LOGIC EQUAT

T DELAY
MiCOM P220 -Menu content
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
DCBA
0000
t RTD 1
TRIP
t RTD 2
TRIP
......
t RTD 1
ALARM
T betw 2
Start
START NB
LIMIT
tI<
LOCKED
ROTOR
t Istall
EXCES LG
START
t li>>
DEFAULT DISPLAY
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
I >>
t I >>
I0 >
t I0 >
I0 >>
5432
0000
5432
0000
t li>>
EXCES LG
START
5432
0000
t Ii>
5432
0000
5432
0000
FORBID.
START
t I0 >>
5432
0000
ALARM
THERM OV. 5 4 3 2
0000
AUX OUTPUT RLY
EXT 1
Thermist 2
Thermist 1
t RTD 1
TRIP
t RTD 2
TRIP
.......
t RTD 6
TRIP
t RTD 1
ALARM
T betw 2
start
START NB
LIMIT
tI<
LOCKED
ROTOR
t Istall
4
0
4
0
32
00
32
00
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5
0
5
0
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 45/48
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
EXT 2
EXT 3
EXT 4
CLOSE
ORDER
TRIP
ORDER
ORDER 1
ORDER 2
SUCCESS
START
t EQU. A
t EQU. B
t EQU. C
AUX OUTPUT RLY
AUTOMAT. CTRL
5432
0000
5432
0000
5432
0000
SW OPER
TIME
SW OPER
NB
SAn
Active Group 5 4 3 2
0000
5432
0000
t EQU. D
DEFAULT DISPLAY
NO
NO
NO
NO
tI<?
YES
LOCKED ROTOR ?
YES
EQUATION D ?
YES
EQUATION C ?
YES
EQUATION B ?
YES
EQUATION A ?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
t Istall ?
EXT 1 ?
Thermist 2 ?
Thermist 1 ?
YES
YES
EXT 2 ?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
EXCES LONG ?
START
YES
t Ii >> ?
t Ii > ?
t I0 >> ?
t I0 >?
t I >> ?
LATCH EQUA D ?
YES
LATCH EQUA C ?
YES
LATCH EQUA B ?
YES
LATCH EQUA A ?
YES
LATCH t Ii >> ?
YES
LATCH t I0 >> ?
YES
LATCH t I >> ?
YES
YES
THERM OVERLOAD ?
YES
t RTD 1
TRIP
t RTD 2
TRIP
.......
t RTD 6
TRIP
LATCH TRIP ORDER
TRIP OUTPUT RLY
Page 46/48
Output 5
Output 4
Output 3
Output 2
LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
200 ms
14 E6
YES
CLOSE T =
200 ms
TRIP T =
n=
SAn=
SAn?
SW OPERATION NB
=
150
SW OPERATION NB ?
YES
SW OPERATING
TIME =
150 ms
SW OPERATING
TIME ?
YES
SW SUPERVISION
AUTOMAT. CTRL
IN MAGNITUDE
0.03 A
IC MAGNITUDE
1.931 kA
IB MAGNITUDE
1.997 kA
IA MAGNITUDE
1.917 kA
MAGNITUDE
1.917 kA
FAULT DETECTED
BY
I>>
PHASE IN FAULT
Phase A
ACTIVE SET GROUP

1
OCCUR FAULT DATE

01/09/98
OCCUR FAULT HOUR

16:39:23:82
FAULT NUMBER
FAULT RECORD
RECORD
0.1 s
0.1 s
DISTUR REC TRIG =

ON INST.
POST-TIME =
PRE-TIME =
DISTURB RECORD
DEFAULT DISPLAY
E06
E06
E06
Menu content
MiCOM P220
SW OPERAT TIME =
100 ms
CLR ? = CL
SW OPERATION NB =
S A IC =
S A IB =
S A IA =
SA
CLR ? = CL
SW MONITORING
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
P220/EN HI/B43
Page 47/48
P220/EN HI/B43
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
MiCOM P220
Page 48/48
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
P220/EN GC/B43
MiCOM P220
MODBUS COMMUNICATION
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 1/94
CONTENTS
1.
MODBUS PROTOCOL
1.1
MODBUS communication characteristics
1.1.1
MODBUS network characteristics
1.1.2
Parameters of the MODBUS connection
1.1.3
Synchronisation of exchanges messages
1.1.4
Message validity check
1.1.5
Address of the MiCOM relays
1.2
MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays
1.3
Presentation of the MODBUS protocol
1.3.1
Frame size received by the MiCOM P220 relay
1.3.2
Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P220 relay
1.3.3
Messages validity check
1.4
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records
1.4.1
Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM.
1.4.2
Service request
1.4.3
Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel
10
1.4.4
Request to retrieve an index frame
10
1.5
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records
10
1.5.1
Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event
10
1.5.2
Request to retrieve a dedicated event
11
1.6
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records
11
1.6.1
Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record
11
1.6.2
Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record
11
1.7
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the start-up current form record 12
1.7.1
Request to know the number of current values stored into the saved memory
12
1.7.2
Request to retrieve the start-up current form record data
12
1.8
MiCOM P220 database organisation
13
1.8.1
Description of the MODBUS application mapping
13
1.8.2
Page 0 : Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements
14
1.8.3
Page 1 : Remote settings for general parameters
17
1.8.4
Page 2 : Remote settings for protection functions group No1
23
1.8.5
26
1.8.6
Page 4 : Remote controls
29
1.8.7
Pages 5 and 6 : reserved
29
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 2/94
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
1.8.8
Page 7 : MiCOM P220 relay status word
29
1.8.9
Page 8 : Synchronisation
29
1.8.10 Page 9 to 21h : Disturbance record data (25 pages)
30
1.8.11 Page 22h : Index frame for the disturbance records
31
1.8.12 Page 23 to 33h : Start-up current form record data
31
1.8.13 Page 34h : Index frame for the start-up current form record
31
1.8.14 Page 35h : Event record data
32
1.8.15 Page 36h : Data of the oldest event
33
1.8.16 Page 37h : Fault value record data
33
1.8.17 Pages 38h 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel 33
1.8.18 Page 3Dh : Number of available disturbance records
34
1.8.19 Page 3Eh : Data of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record
34
1.9
Description of the mapping format
34
2.
K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE
49
2.1
K-BUS
49
2.1.1
K-Bus transmission layer
49
2.1.2
K-Bus connection
49
2.1.3
Auxiliary equipment
50
2.2
Relay courier database
50
2.3
Setting changes
50
2.4
Systems integration data
50
2.4.1
Address of the relay
50
2.4.2
Measured values
51
2.4.3
Status word
51
2.4.4
Control status word
51
2.4.5
Logic input status word
51
2.4.6
Output relay status word
51
2.4.7
Control information
52
2.4.8
Protection Indication
52
2.4.9
Measurement control
54
2.4.10 Change of remote measurements
54
2.5
Event extraction
54
2.5.1
Automatic event extraction
54
2.5.2
Event types
55
2.5.3
Event format
55
2.5.4
Manual record extraction
55
2.6
Disturbance record extraction
56
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 3/94
3.
LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY
57
4.
LIST OF FAULTS CREATED BY THE RELAY
60
5.
COURIER DATABASES
61
6.
IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
89
6.1
Physical connection and link layer
89
6.2
Initialisation
89
6.3
Time synchronisation
90
6.4
Spontaneous events
90
6.5
General interrogation
90
6.6
Cyclic measurements
90
6.7
Commands
90
6.8
Disturbance records
90
6.9
Blocking of monitor direction
90
7.
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASES
91
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 4/94
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
1.
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 5/94
MODBUS PROTOCOL
The MiCOM P220 relay offers MODBUSTM RTU mode communication via a rear
RS485 port.
1.1
MODBUS communication characteristics
1.1.1
MODBUS network characteristics

The MODBUS protocol is based on the master-slave principle with the MiCOM P220
relay as slave.
The MODBUS protocol allows the master to read and to write one or several bits, one
or several words and to remote the event logging data.
The access to the network can be :
either according to a query/response principle
Master
Response
Query
Equipment
Slave
Equipment
Slave
Equipment
Slave
P0211ENa
or according to a broadcast message sent from the master to all the slaves.
Broadcast
message
Equipment
Slave
Master
Equipment
Slave
Equipment
Slave
P0212ENa
in that case :
compulsory, the broadcast message is a writing order,
the slaves return no response,
the protocol is RTU mode. Each byte of the data frame is coded according to a
hexadecimal base.
At the end of each frame, two bytes of CRC16 validity checksum are applied on
the whole of the frame content.
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 6/94
1.1.2
Parameters of the MODBUS connection

The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows :
Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz).
MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode.
The baud rate can be configured by operator dialogue in the front panel of the
relay :
Baud rate
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
Transmission mode of the configurable parameters by operator dialogue :

Transmission mode
1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop : total 10 bits
1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits
1 start / 7 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits
1 start / 7 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits
1.1.3
Synchronisation of exchanges messages

Any character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a
transmission time of 3 bytes is considered as a frame start.
1.1.4
Message validity check

The validation of a trame is performed with a 16-bit cyclical redundancy check (CRC).
The generator polynomial is :
1 + x + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
1.1.5
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 7/94
Address of the MiCOM relays

The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1
and 255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages.
1.2
MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays

The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are :
Function 1 or 2 : Reading of n bits
Function 3 or 4 : Reading of n words
Function 5 : Writing of 1 bit
Function 6 : Writing of 1 word
Function 7 : Fast reading of 8 bits
Function 8 : Reading of the diagnosis counters
Function 11 : Reading of the Event counter
Function 15: Writing of n bits
Function 16 : Writing of n words
1.3
Presentation of the MODBUS protocol

MODBUS is a master-slave protocol whereby every exchange involves a master query
and a slave response.
1.3.1
Frame size received by the MiCOM P220 relay

Frame transmitted by the master (query) :
Slave number
Function code
Information
CRC16
1 byte
1 byte
n bytes
2 bytes
0 to FFh
1 to 10h
Slave number :
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
Function code :
Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16).
Information :
Contains the parameters of the selected function.
CRC16 :
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master.
NOTA:
the MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames

sent out by the master.
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 8/94
1.3.2
Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P220 relay

Frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) :
Slave number
Function code
Data
CRC16
1 byte
1 byte
n bytes
2 bytes
1 to FFh
1 to 10h
Slave number :
Function code :
Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16).
Data :
Contains the response data to master query.
CRC16 :
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the MiCOM relay.
1.3.3
Messages validity check

When the MiCOM relay receives a master query, it validates the frame :
If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. The MiCOM relay does not reply to the
query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this
is the only case of non-reply by the MiCOM relay to a master query.
If the CRC is correct but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sents to
the master a exception response.
Exception frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) :

Slave number
Function code
Error code
CRC16
1 byte
1 byte
1 byte
2 bytes
1 to 20h
81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh
LSB ... MSB
Slave number :
Function code :
The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the exception frame is the code in
which the most significant bit (bit7) is forced to 1.
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 9/94
Error code :
Among the 8 exception codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages
two of them :
code 01 : Function code unauthorised or unknown.
code 03 : A value of the data field is unauthorised (incorrect code).
Control of pages being read.
Control of pages being written.
Control of address in pages.
Length of request messages.
CRC16:
The CRC16 value is calculated by the slave.
1.4
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records

To retrieve a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact
given order :
1.4.1
1.
(optional) : Send a request to know the number of disturbance records

available in the saved RAM.
2.
To retrieve the data of one channel:

2a (compulsory) : Send a service request specifying the record number and
the channel number which have to be retrieved.
2b (compulsory) : Send requests to retrieve the data of a disturbance record
channel as many time as needed.
2c (compulsory) : send a request to retrieve the index frame.
3.
Process the same operation (as described in the item 2) for each channel.
Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM.
Slave number Function code Word address Word number
xx
03h
3Dh
00
00
24h
CRC
xx............xx
This request may be answered an error message with the error code :
EVT_NOK (0F) :
NOTA:
1.4.2
No record available.
If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will contain

zero value in the non-used words.
Service request
This request shall be send before to retrieve the sample data of a disturbance record
channel. It allows to specify the record number and the channel number which have
to be retrieved. It allows also to know the number of samples in the channel.
xx
03h
Refer to
mapping
00
0Bh
CRC
xx............xx
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 10/94
This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible :
1.4.3
CODE_DEF_RAM (02) :
Saved RAM failure.
CODE_EVT_NOK (03) :
No disturbance record available in the saved

RAM.
Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel

xx
03h
Refer to
mapping
1 to 7Dh
CRC
xx............xx
This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible :
CODE_DEP_DATA (04) :
The requested sample number is superior

than the number of samples in the specified
channel.
CODE_SERV_NOK (05) :
The record number and the channel number

have not been specified by a service request.
NOTA:
1.4.4
This type of request can retrieve up to125 words. A sample is

coded on 1 word (16 bits).
Request to retrieve an index frame

xx
03h
22h
00
00
07h
CRC
xx............xx
This event request may be answered an error message with the error code :
CODE_SERV_NOK (05) :
1.5
The record number and the channel number

have not been specified by a service request.
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records

Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record :
1.5.1
Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event.
Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.
Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event

xx
03h
36h
00
00
09h
CRC
xx............xx
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) :
NOTA:
An event is being written into the saved RAM.
On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event

record acknowledgement :
- a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
- b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be
set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged.
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 11/94
b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :

set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit
13 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
1.5.2
Request to retrieve a dedicated event

xx
03h
Refer to
mapping
00
09h
CRC
xx............xx
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) :
NOTA:
1.6
An event is being written into the saved RAM.
This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records

Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record :
1.6.1
Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record.
Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.
Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record

xx
NOTA:
03h
3Eh
00
00
0Fh
CRC
xx............xx
On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault

record acknowledgement:
- a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
- b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :

set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged.
b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :
set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14
of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
1.6.2
Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record

xx
NOTA:
03h
Refer to
mapping
00
0Fh
CRC
xx............xx
This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 12/94
1.7
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the start-up current form record
To retrieve the start-up current form record, process as described below :
1.7.1
1.
Send a request to know the number of current values stored into the saved
RAM.
2.
Send a request to retrieve the start-up current from record data.
Request to know the number of current values stored into the saved memory
xx
1.7.2
03h
34H
00
00
03h
CRC
xx............xx
Request to retrieve the start-up current form record data

xx
NOTA:
03h
Refer to
mapping
04 to 7Ch
CRC
xx............xx
The number of requested words shall be a 2 multiple number as

the value of a start-up current from record sample is coded on 4
bytes. One page of the mapping can stored up to 248 words.
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 13/94
1.8
MiCOM P220 database organisation
1.8.1
Description of the MODBUS application mapping

The MODBUS mapping contains 60 pages.
Pages 0 to 8 : Contain the MiCOM P220 parameters.
Pages 9 to 3Dh : Contain the data of the event records, data of the fault value
records, data of the disturbance records and data of the start-up current form record.
These pages are explained in the following way :
Page No
Page content
Access
Page 0
Information of product, remote signalling, remote

measurements
Reading
Page 1
Remote settings for general parameters
Reading & writing
Page 2
Remote settings for protection group number 1
Reading & writing
Page 3
Remote settings for protection group number 2
Reading & writing
Page 4
Remote controls
Writing
Page 5
Reserved page
Not accessible
Page 6
Reserved page
Not accessible
Page 7
MiCOM P220 relay status word
Quick reading
Page 8
Synchronisation
Writing
Pages 9h to
21h
Disturbance record data
Reading
Page 22h
Index frame for the disturbance records
Reading
Pages 23h to Start-up current form record data

33h
Reading
Page 34h
Index frame for the start-up current form record
Reading
Page 35h
Event record data
Reading
Page 36h
Data of the oldest event
Reading
Page 37h
Fault value record data
Reading
Pages 38h to Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its

3Ch
channel
Reading
Page 3Dh
Number of available disturbance records
Reading
Page 3Eh
Data of the oldest fault value record
Reading
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 14/94
1.8.2
Page 0 : Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements

Access only for reading
Address
0000
Group
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
Description of the relay

characters 1 and 2
32 -127
F10
0001

characters 3 and 4
32-127
F10
P2
0002

characters 5 and 6
32-127
F10
20
0003
Factory reference
characters 1 and 2
32-127
F10
AL
0004
Factory reference
characters 3 and 4
32-127
F10
ST
0005
Software version
10 - xx
F21
0006 to 000C
Reserved
000D
Active group
1 to 2
000E
Reserved
000F
Status of the MiCOM

relay self-test
0010
Product
informations
Description
Remotesignaling
F1
F46
Logic inputs
0 to 31
F12
0011
Logic datas
0 to FFFF
F20
0012
Internal logics
0 to FFFF
F22
0013
Output relays
0 to 63
F13
0014
Output information:
threshold I>>
0 to FFFF
F17
0015
Output information:
threshold I0>
0 to FFFF
F16
0016
Output information:
threshold I0>>
0 to FFFF
F16
0017
Output information:
0 to FFFF
F16
0 to FFFF
F16
I2 >
0018
Output information:
I2 >>
0019
Output information : I<
0 to FFFF
F17
001A
Thermal image
Information :
0 to FFFF
F33
001B
Informations : EXT1, EXT2 0 to FFFF

timers and AND
logical gates
F36
001C
Informations : Excessive
long start/stalled rotor
0 to FFFF
F34
001D
Informations : RTDs
0 to FFFF
F4
001E
Number of available
disturbance records
0 to 5
001F and
0020
Reserved
0021
Circuit breaker
monitoring flag
F55
F43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Address
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 15/94
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
0022
Display alarm message :

tI>> PHASE
F17
0023
Display alarm message:

tI< PHASE (Mini I)
F17
0024
Display alarm messages
F41
0025
F41
0026
F41
0027 to 002F
Reserved
0030
Remotemeasurement
Phase A current IA RMS
A/100
F3
0032
Phase B current IB RMS
A/100
F3
0034
Phase Current IC RMS
A/100
F3
0036
Neutral current IN RMS
A/100
F3
0038
Negative sequence I2
current (fundamental)
A/100
F3
003A
Positive sequence I1
current (fundamental)
A/100
F3
003C
Zero sequence current

(fundamental)
A/100
F3
1/100 Hz
F1
I0 (1/3 IN)
003E
Frequency
003F and
0040
Phase current maximeter
0041 to 004F
Reserved
0050
Process
4500 to
6500
F1
Load current as % I>
F1
0051
Thermal status value
F1
0052
Reserved
0053
Time before thermal trip
Seconds
F1
0054
RTD1 temperature value
-400 to
2000
1/10 C
F2
0055
-400 to
2000
1/10 C
F2
0056
-400 to
2000
1/10 C
F2
0057
-400 to
2000
1/10 C
F2
0058
-400 to
2000
1/10 C
F2
0059
-400 to
2000
1/10 C
F2
005A
Thermistor 1 value
0 to 30000
Ohm
F1
005B
Thermistor 2 value
0 to 30000
Ohm
F1
005C
Number of authorised
start-ups
F1
005D
Time before an
authorised start-up
seconds
F1
005E
Last start current value
A/100
F1
Default
value
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 16/94
Address
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
005F
Reserved
0060
Last start time value
seconds
F1
0061
Total motor start number
F1
0062
Total emergency start

number
F1
0063
Total motor running

hours
hours
F1
0064
RTDs status
0065 to 006F
Reserved
0070
Trip Cause
Statistics
F45
Reserved
0071
Total trip number (based

on output relay No1)
F1
0072
Operator trip number

(logic inputs, pushbuttons
or remote
communication)
F1
0073
Thermal trip number
F1
0074
Earth fault trip number
F1
0075
Short-circuit trip number
F1
0076
Excessive long start trip

number
F1
0077
Stalled rotor trip number

(whilst running)
F1
0078
Locked rotor trip number

(at start)
F1
0079
Loss of load trip number
F1
007A
Unbalance trip number
F1
007B
EQUATION A trip
number
F1
007C
EQUATION B trip
number
F1
007D
EQUATION C trip
number
F1
007E
EQUATION D trip
number
F1
007F
RTD1 trip number
F1
0080
RTD2 trip number
F1
0081
RTD3 trip number
F1
0082
RTD4 trip number
F1
0083
RTD5 trip number
F1
0084
RTD6 trip number
F1
0085
Thermistor 1 trip number
F1
0086
Thermistor 2 trip number
F1
0087 to 008F
Reserved
Default
value
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Address
0090
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 17/94
Group
Fourier
Magnitude
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
IA magnitude
F1
0091
IB magnitude
F1
0092
IC magnitude
F1
0093
3.I0 magnitude
F1
IA angle
F1
0095
IB angle
F1
0096
IC angle
F1
0097
3.I0 angle
F1
0094
Fourier Angle
0098
I1 magnitude
F1
0099
I2 magnitude
F1
009A to 009F
Reserved
1.8.3
Fourier
Magnitude
Default
value
Page 1 : Remote settings for general parameters

Access for reading and writing
Address
0100
Group
Remote-settings
Description
Address
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
1 to 255
F1
0101
Reserved
0102
Password :
characters 1 and 2
0x410x5a
F10
AA
0103
Password :
characters 3 and 4
0x410x5a
F10
AA
0104
Frequency
50-60
10
Hz
F1
50
0105
Default displayed value
1-6
F26
0106
Motor start-up detection

criterion
0-1
F5
0107
Analogue output type
0 to 1
F18
0108
Data transmitted on the

analogue output
0 to 15
F7
0109
Active setting group
1-2
F1
010A
User reference :
characters 1 and 2
0x300x5a
F10
MO
010B
User reference :
characters 3 and 4
0x300x5a
F10
T1
10C
Displayed fault record

number
15
F39
010D
Thermistor 1 type
0-1
F32
010E
Thermistor 2 type
0-1
F32
010F
RTDs type
0-3
F42
0110 to 0113
Reserved
0110 to 0113
Reserved
0114
EDGE validation
configuration for logic
input
0-31
F12
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 18/94
Address
Group
Description
Values
range
0115
Latching Output Relays
0116 to 0117
Reserved
0118
Configuration of Change 0-1

of active group
0119 to 011F
Reserved
0120
Unit
Format
Default
value
F12
F47
Phases CT primary
1 to 3000
F1
0121
Phase CT secondary
1 to 5
F1
0122
Earth CT primary
1 to 3000
F1
0123
Earth CT secondary
1 to 5
F1
0124 to 012F
Reserved
0 to 7
F28
6=
19200
bauds
0130
CT Ratio
0-31
Step
Rear RS485
Data rate
Communication
0131
Parity
0 to 2
F29
0=
without
0132
Data bits
0 to 1
F30
1=8
bits
0133
Stop bit
0 to 1
F31
0 =1 bit
0134
Communication available 0 to 1
F24
1=
Communication
available
0135 to 013C
Reserved
CB operation number
F1
013E
CB operating time
sec/100
F1
013F
S An IA (phase A)
An
F3
0141
S An IB (phase B)
An
F3
F3
F48
0=Private
Led 5
2n
F19
Led 6
F19
F19
F19
013D
CB supervision
0143
S A IC (phase C)
0145
Date Format
0146 to 014F
Reserved
0150
LED allocation
0152
0 to 1
0154
Led 7
0156
Led 8
2n
0158 to 015F
Reserved
Logic input L3
0 to 2n
F15
Logic input L4
0 to 2n
F15
0162
Logic input L5
F15
0163 to 16E
Reserved
016F
Active Group: If Group 2 0-15

then Output =1
F14
F14
F14
0160
0161
0170
0171
Logic inputs
allocation
Auxiliary output Thermal overload :

relays allocation THERM OV.
Thermal alarm :
ALARM
0 to 2
0 to 15
0 to 15
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Address
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 19/94
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
0172
Thermal start inhibition

FORBID. START
0 to 15
F14
0173
I0> (instantaneous)
0 to 15
F14
0174
tI0> (time delayed)
0 to 15
F14
0175
I0>> (instantaneous)
0 to 15
F14
0176
tI0>> (time delayed)
0 to 15
F14
0177
I>> (instantaneous)
0 to 15
F14
0178
tI>> (time delayed)
0 to 15
F14
0179
tI2> (time delayed)
0 to 15
F14
017A
0 to 15
F14
017B
Excessive long start :

EXCES LG START
0 to 15
F14
017C
Stalled rotor (whilst

running):
t Istall
0 to 15
F14
017D
Locked rotor (at start):

LOCKED ROTOR
0 to 15
F14
017E
Loss of load :
t I<
0 to 15
F14
017F
Start number limitation

START NB LIMIT
0 to 15
F14
0180
Time between 2 start: T

betw 2 start
0 to 15
F14
0181
t RTD1 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
0182
t RTD1 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
0183
t RTD2 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
0184
t RTD2 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
0185
t RTD3 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
0186
t RTD3 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
0187
t RTD4 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
0188
t RTD4 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
0189
t RTD5 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
018A
t RTD5 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
018B
t RTD6 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
018C
t RTD6 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
018D
Thermist 1
0 to 15
F14
018E
Thermist 2
0 to 15
F14
018F
EXT 1
0 to 15
F14
0190
EXT 2
0 to 15
F14
0191
CLOSE ORDER
0 to 15
F14
0192
TRIP ORDER
0 to 15
F14
0193
ORDER 1
0 to 15
F14
0194
ORDER 2
0 to 15
F14
0195
SUCCESS START
0 to 15
F14
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 20/94
Address
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
0196
AND logical gate A:

t EQU. A
0 to 15
F14
0197
AND logical gate B:

t EQU. B
0 to 15
F14
0198
AND logical gate C

t EQU. C
0 to 15
F14
0199
AND logical gate D

t EQU. D
0 to 15
F14
019A
CB opening time :
SW OPER TIME
0 to 15
F14
019B
CB operation number :
SW OPER NB
0 to 15
F14
019C
Ampsn cut by CB :
S An
0 to 15
F14
019D
EXT 3
0 to 15
F14
019E
EXT 4
0 to 15
F14
019F
Reserved
Thermal overload :
THERM OV.
0 to 15
F14
01A1
Thermal alarm :
ALARM
0 to 15
F14
01A2

FORBID. START
0 to 15
F14
01A3
I0>
(instantaneous)
0 to 15
F14
01A4
tI0>
(time delayed)
0 to 15
F14
01A5
I0>> ( instantaneous)
0 to 15
F14
01A6
0 to 15
F14
01A7
I>> (instantaneous)
0 to 15
F14
01A8
tI>> (time delayed)
0 to 15
F14
01A9
tI2>
(time delayed)
0 to 15
F14
01AA
0 to 15
F14
01AB
Excessive long start :

EXCES LG START
0 to 15
F14
01AC
Stalled rotor (running):

t Istall
0 to 15
F14
01AD
Locked rotor (at start):

LOCKED ROTOR
0 to 15
F14
01AE
Loss of load : t I<
0 to 15
F14
01AF

START NB LIMIT
0 to 15
F14
01B0
Time between 2 starts :

T betw 2 start
0 to 15
F14
01B1
t RTD1 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
01B2
t RTD1 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
01B3
t RTD2 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
01B4
t RTD2 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
01A0
AND logical
gates allocation
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Address
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 21/94
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
01B5
t RTD3 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
01B6
t RTD3 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
01B7
t RTD4 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
01B8
t RTD4 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
01B9
t RTD5 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
01BA
t RTD5 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
01BB
t RTD6 ALARM
0 to 15
F14
01BC
t RTD6 TRIP
0 to 15
F14
01BD
Thermist 1
0 to 15
F14
01BE
Thermist 2
0 to 15
F14
01BF
EXT 1
0 to 15
F14
01C0
EXT 2
0 to 15
F14
01C1
SUCESS START
0 to 15
F14
01C2
EXT 3
0 to 15
F14
01C3
EXT 4
0 to 15
F14
01C4 to 01CF
Reserved
01D0
Automation
Trip output relay
Control functions assignment (relay 1)
01D1
Trip output relay

assignment (relay 1)
0 to 32767
F6
0 to 127
2n
F6
01D2
Latching of the trip output 0 to 127

relay (relay 1)
2n
F8
01D3
Function :
01
F24
01D4
Reference time :
Treference
10 120
minute
F1
10
01D5
Hot start number
0 5
F1
01D6
Cold start number
0-5
F1
01D7
Start interdiction time :

Tinterdiction
1-120
minute
F1
01D8
Function :
Time between 2 starts
0 to 1
F24
01D9
T betw 2 start
1 to 120
minute
F1
01DA
Function :
Reacceleration
authorization
0-1
F24
01DB
Voltage dip duration :

Treacc
2-100
1/10 sec
F1
01DC
Function :
CB Opening time
0-1
F24
01DD
SW OPERATING TIME
threshold
5 to 100
1/100 sec
F1
01DE
Function :
CB Operation number
0-1
F24
01DF
SW OPERATION NB
threshold
0-50000
F1
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 22/94
Address
Group
Description
Values
range
Format
Default
value
F24
10e6 A^n
F3
Step
Unit
01E0
Ampsn cut by CB :
S An
0-1
01E1
SAn threshold
0 to 4000
01E2
n exponent value
1 to 2
F1
01E3
TRIP T duration value

(remote order)
20 to 500
1/100 sec
F1
20
01E4
CLOSE T duration value

(remote order)
20 to 500
1/100 sec
F1
20
EXT1 time delay
0 to 20000
1/100 sec
F1
EXT2 time delay
0 to 20000
1/100 sec
F1
Pre-time
1 to 30
1/10 sec
F1
01E8
Post-time
1 to 30
1/10 sec
F1
01E9
Disturbance record
trigging criterion :
DISTUR REC TRIG
01
F40
01EA
EXT3 time delay
0 to 20000
1/100 sec
F1
01EB
EXT4 time delay
0 to 20000
1/100 sec
F1
01EC to 01EF
Reserved
01F0
AND logical gate A

operation time delay :
EQU. A Toperat
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
01F1
AND logical gate A

reset time delay :
EQU. A Treset
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
01F2
AND logical gate B

EQU. B Toperat
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F3
AND logical gate B

reset time delay :
EQU. B Treset
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F4
AND logical gate C

EQU. C Toperat
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F5
AND logical gate C

reset time delay :
EQU. C Treset
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F6
AND logical gate D

EQU. D Toperat
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F7
AND logical gate D

reset time delay :
EQU. D Treset
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F8 to 01FF
Reserved
01E5
Logic inputs
01E6
01E7
Disturbance
record
F1
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
1.8.4
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 23/94

Address
0200
Group
Description
Protection group Thermal overload

1
function
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
0-1
F24
0201
Thermal inhibition at
start : INHIBIT
0-1
F24
0202
Thermal current
threshold : I>
20 to 150
1/100
In
F1
20
0203
Ke factor
0 to 10
F1
0204
Thermal constant time

Te1
1 to 180
Minute
F1
0205

Te2
1 to 360
Minute
F1
0206
Cooling constant time Tr
1 to 999
Minute
F1
0207
RTD1 influence :
RTD1 INFLUENCE
0-1
F24
0208
Thermal alarm function
0-1
F24
0209
ALARM threshold
20 to 100
F1
20
020A

function
0-1
F24
020B
FORBID START
20 to 100
F1
20
020C to 020F
Reserved
0210
I>> function
0-1
F24
0211
I>> threshold
10 to 120
In/10
F1
10
0212
tI>> time delay
0 to 10000 1
1/100 s
F1
0213 to 021F
Reserved
0220
I0> function
0-1
0221
I0> threshold
2 to 1000
1/1000 I0n F1
0222
tI0> time delay
0 to 10000 1
1/100 s
F1
0223
I0>> function
0-1
F24
0224
I0>> threshold
2 to 1000
1/1000 I0n F1
0225
tI0>> time delay
0 to 10000 1
1/100 s
0226 to 022F
Reserved
0230
I2> function
0-1
F24
0231
I2> threshold
50 to 800
25
1/1000 In
F1
50
0232
tI2> time delay
4 to 20000 1
1/100 s
F1
0233
I2>> function
0-1
F24
0234
I2>> threshold
200 to 800 50
1/1000 In
F1
200
0235 to 023F
Reserved
0240
Excessive long start

function
0-1
F24
0241
Istart detection threshold
10 to 50
1/10 I
F1
10
0242
t Istart time delay
1 to 200
Second
F1
0243
Reserved
F24
F1
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 24/94
Address
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
0244
Blocked rotor function
0 1
F24
0245
t Istall time delay
1 600
1/10 sec
F1
0246
Stalled rotor function
0 1
F24
0247
Istall detection threshold
10 to 50
1/10 I
F1
10
0248
Locked rotor at start

function
0-1
F24
0249 to 024F
Reserved
0250
I< function
0-1
F24
0251
I< threshold
10 to 100
1/100 In
F1
10
0252
t I< time delay
2 to 1000
1/10 sec
F24
0253
Tinhib inhibition time
5 to 30000 5
1/100 sec
F1
0254 to 025F
Reserved
0260
RTD1 function
0-1
F24
0261
RTD1 ALARM threshold
0-200
F1
0262
t RTD1 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
0263
RTD1 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
0264
t RTD1 TRIP time delay
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
0265
RTD2 function
0 1
F24
0266
0-200
F1
0267
1/10 sec
F1
0268
RTD2 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
0269
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
026A
RTD3 function
0-1
F24
026B
0-200
F1
026C
1/10 sec
F1
026D
RTD3 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
026E
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
026F
RTD4 function
0-1
F24
0270
0-200
F1
0271
1/10 sec
F1
0272
RTD4 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
0273
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
0274
RTD5 function
0-1
F24
0275
0-200
F1
0276
1/10 sec
F1
0277
RTD5 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
0278
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
0279
RTD6 function
0-1
F24
027A
0-200
F1
027B
t RTD6 ALARM time delay 0 1000
1/10 sec
F1
027C
RTD6 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
027D
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Address
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 25/94
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
027E
Thermistor 1 function
0-1
F24
027F
Thermistor 1 threshold
1-300
1/10 k
F1
0280
0-1
F24
0281
1-300
1/10 k
F1
0282 to 28F
Reserved
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 26/94
1.8.5

Address
0300
Group
Description
Protection group Thermal overload

2
function
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
0-1
F24
F24
0301
Thermal inhibition at
start : INHIBIT
0-1
0302
Thermal current
threshold : I>
20 to 150
1/10 0 In
F1
20
0303
Ke factor
0 to 10
F1
0304

Te1
1 to 180
Minute
F1
0305

Te2
1 to 360
Minute
F1
0306
Cooling constant time Tr
1 to 999
Minute
F1
0307
RTD1 influence :
0-1
F24
RTD1 INFLUENCE
0308
Thermal alarm function
0-1
F24
0309
ALARM threshold
20 to 100
F1
20
030A

function
0-1
F24
030B
FORBID START
20 to 100
F1
20
030C to 030F
Reserved
0310
I>> function
0-1
F24
0311
I>> threshold
10 to 120
In/10
F1
10
0312
tI>> time delay
0 to 10000
1/100 s
F1
0313 to 031F
Reserved
0320
I0> function
0-1
0321
I0> threshold
2 to 1000
1/1000 I0n F1
0322
tI0> time delay
0 to 10000
1/100 s
F1
0323
I0>> function
0-1
F24
0324
I0>> threshold
2 to 1000
1/1000 I0n F1
0325
tI0>> time delay
0 to 10000
1/100 s
0326 to 032F
Reserved
0330
I2> function
0-1
F24
0331
I2> threshold
50 to 800
25
1/1000 In
F1
50
0332
tI2> time delay
4 to 20000
1/100 s
F1
0333
I2>> function
0-1
F24
0334
I2>> threshold
200 to 800
50
1/1000 In
F1
200
0335 to 033F
Reserved
0340

function
0-1
F24
0341
Istart detection threshold
10 to 50
1/10 I
F1
10
0342
t Istart time delay
1 to 200
Second
F1
0343
Reserved
F24
F1
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Address
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 27/94
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
0344
Blocked rotor function
0 1
F24
0345
t Istall time delay
1 600
1/10 sec
F1
0346
Stalled rotor function
0 1
F24
0347
Istall detection threshold
10 to 50
1/10 I
F1
10
0348

function
0-1
F24
0349 to 034F
Reserved
0350
I< function
0-1
F24
0351
I< threshold
10 to 100
1/100 In
F1
10
0352
t I< time delay
2 to 1000
1/10 sec
F24
0353
Tinhib inhibition time
5 to 30000
1/100 sec
F1
0354 to 035F
Reserved
0360
RTD1 function
0-1
F24
0361
0-200
F1
0362
1/10 sec
F1
0363
RTD1 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
0364
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
0365
RTD2 function
0 1
F24
0366
0-200
F1
0367
1/10 sec
F1
0368
RTD2 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
0369
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
036A
RTD3 function
0-1
F24
036B
0-200
F1
036C
1/10 sec
F1
036D
RTD3 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
036E
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
036F
RTD4 function
0-1
F24
0370
0-200
F1
0371
1/10 sec
F1
0372
RTD4 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
0373
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
0374
RTD5 function
0-1
F24
0375
0-200
F1
0376
1/10 sec
F1
0377
RTD5 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
0378
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
0379
RTD6 function
0-1
F24
037A
0-200
F1
037B
t RTD6 ALARM time delay 0 1000
1/10 sec
F1
037C
RTD6 TRIP threshold
0-200
F1
037D
0 to 1000
1/10 sec
F1
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 28/94
Address
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Default
value
037E
0-1
F24
037F
1-300
1/10 k
F1
0380
0-1
F24
0381
1-300
1/10 k
F1
0382 to 038F
Reserved
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
1.8.6
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 29/94
Page 4 : Remote controls

Access in writing
Address
0400
Group
Description
Remote control
Values
Step Unit Format
range
Remote control word 1 0 to 31 1
1.8.7
Pages 5 and 6 : reserved
1.8.8
Page 7 : MiCOM P220 relay status word
F9
Default
value
0
Access for quick reading

Address
0700
1.8.9
Group
Description
Quick reading
byte
Values
Step Unit Format
range
Quick reading byte
F23
Default
value
0
Page 8 : Synchronisation
Access in writing. The format of the clock synchronisation is coded on 8 bytes (4
words).
Clock
@page
byte number
Value range
Unit
Year LSB + MSB
Year
Months
1 - 12
Month
Days
1 - 31
Day
Hours
0 - 23
Hour
Minutes
0 - 59
Minute
ms LSB + MSB
0 - 59999
ms
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 30/94
1.8.10 Page 9 to 21h : Disturbance record data (25 pages)
Access in reading. Each page of the mapping contains 250 words.
Address
Contents
Format
0900 to 09FAh
250 words of disturbance record data
F58
0A00 to 0AFAh
F58
0B00 to 0BFAh
F58
0C00 to 0CFAh
F58
0D00 to 0DFAh
F58
0E00 to 0EFAh
F58
0F00 to 0FFAh
F58
1000 to 10FAh
F58
1100 to 11FAh
F58
1200 to 12FAh
F58
1300 to 13FAh
F58
1400 to 14FAh
F58
1500 to 15FAh
F58
1600 to 16FAh
F58
1700 to 17FAh
F58
1800 to 18FAh
F58
1900 to 19FAh
F58
1A00 to 1AFAh
F58
1B00 to 1BFAh
F58
1C00 to 1CFAh
F58
1D00 to 1DFAh
F58
1E00 to 1EFAh
F58
1F00 to 1FFAh
F58
2000 to 20FAh
F58
2100 to 21FAh
F58
NOTA:
The above disturbance record data pages of the mapping

contains the data for only one record channel.
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 31/94
1.8.11 Page 22h : Index frame for the disturbance records

Access in reading.
Address
2200h
Contents
Index frame for the disturbance records
Format
F50
1.8.12 Page 23 to 33h : Start-up current form record data

Access in reading.
Address
Contents
2300 to 23F8h
124 values
2400 to 24F8h
124 values
2500 to 25F8h
124 values
2600 to 26F8h
124 values
2700 to 27F8h
124 values
2800 to 28F8h
124 values
2900 to 29F8h
124 values
2A00 to 2AF8h
124 values
2B00 to 2BF8h
124 values
2C00 to 2CF8h
124 values
2D00 to 2DF8h
124 values
2E00 to 2EF8h
124 values
2F00 to 2FF8h
124 values
3000 to 30F8h
124 values
3100 to 31F8h
124 values
3200 to 32F8h
124 values
3300 to 3320h
16 values
Format
1.8.13 Page 34h : Index frame for the start-up current form record
Access in reading.
Address
3400h
Contents
Number of available values of the start-up current
form record
Format
F51
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 32/94
1.8.14 Page 35h : Event record data
Access in reading.
Address
Contents
Format
Address
Contents
Format
Address
Contents
Format
3500h
EVENT n1
F52
3519h
EVENT n26
F52
3532h
EVENT n51
F52
3501h
EVENT n2
F52
351Ah
EVENT n27
F52
3533h
EVENT n52
F52
3502h
EVENT n3
F52
351Bh
EVENT n28
F52
3534h
EVENT n53
F52
3503h
EVENT n4
F52
351Ch
EVENT n29
F52
3535h
EVENT n54
F52
3504h
EVENT n5
F52
351Dh
EVENT n30
F52
3536h
EVENT n55
F52
3505h
EVENT n6
F52
351Eh
EVENT n31
F52
3537h
EVENT n56
F52
3506h
EVENT n7
F52
351Fh
EVENT n32
F52
3538h
EVENT n57
F52
3507h
EVENT n8
F52
3520h
EVENT n33
F52
3539h
EVENT n58
F52
3508h
EVENT n9
F52
3521h
EVENT n34
F52
353Ah
EVENT n59
F52
3509h
EVENT n10
F52
3522h
EVENT n35
F52
353Bh
EVENT n60
F52
350Ah
EVENT n11
F52
3523h
EVENT n36
F52
353Ch
EVENT n61
F52
350Bh
EVENT n12
F52
3524h
EVENT n37
F52
353Dh
EVENT n62
F52
350Ch
EVENT n13
F52
3525h
EVENT n38
F52
353Eh
EVENT n63
F52
350Dh
EVENT n14
F52
3526h
EVENT n39
F52
353Fh
EVENT n64
F52
350Eh
EVENT n15
F52
3527h
EVENT n40
F52
3540h
EVENT n65
F52
350Fh
EVENT n16
F52
3528h
EVENT n41
F52
3541h
EVENT n66
F52
3510h
EVENT n17
F52
3529h
EVENT n42
F52
3542h
EVENT n67
F52
3511h
EVENT n18
F52
352Ah
EVENT n43
F52
3543h
EVENT n68
F52
3512h
EVENT n19
F52
352Bh
EVENT n44
F52
3544h
EVENT n69
F52
3513h
EVENT n20
F52
352Ch
EVENT n45
F52
3545h
EVENT n70
F52
3514h
EVENT n21
F52
352Dh
EVENT n46
F52
3546h
EVENT n71
F52
3515h
EVENT n22
F52
352Eh
EVENT n47
F52
3547h
EVENT n72
F52
3516h
EVENT n23
F52
352Fh
EVENT n48
F52
3548h
EVENT n73
F52
3517h
EVENT n24
F52
3530h
EVENT n49
F52
3549h
EVENT n74
F52
3518h
EVENT n25
F52
3531h
EVENT n50
F52
354Ah
EVENT n75
F52
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 33/94
1.8.15 Page 36h : Data of the oldest event

Access in reading.
Address
Contents
3600h
Data of the oldest event
Format
F52
1.8.16 Page 37h : Fault value record data

Access in reading.
Address
Contents
Format
3700h
Data of the fault value record n1
F53
3701h
F53
3702h
F53
3703h
F53
3704h
F53
1.8.17 Pages 38h 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel
Access in reading.
Address
Disturbance record number
Channel
Format
3800h
I A (phase A current)
F54
3801h
I B (phase B current)
F54
3802h
I C (phase C current)
F54
3803h
I N (neutral current)
F54
3804h
Frequency
F54
3805h
Logic inputs and logic outputs
F54
3900h
F54
3901h
F54
3902h
F54
3903h
F54
3904h
Frequency
F54
3905h
F54
3A00h
F54
3A01h
F54
3A02h
F54
3A03h
F54
3A04h
Frequency
F54
3A05h
F54
3B00h
F54
3B01h
F54
3B02h
F54
3B03h
F54
3B04h
Frequency
F54
3B05h
F54
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 34/94
Address
Disturbance record number
Channel
Format
3C00h
F54
3C01h
F54
3C02h
F54
3C03h
F54
3C04h
Frequency
F54
3C05h
F54
1.8.18 Page 3Dh : Number of available disturbance records

Access in reading.
Address
Contents
3D00h
Number of available disturbance records
Format
F55
1.8.19 Page 3Eh : Data of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record

Access in reading.
Address
3E00h
1.9
Contents
Data of the oldest fault value record
Format
F53
Description of the mapping format

CODE
DESCRIPTION
F1
unsigned integer numerical data 1 65535
F2
signed integer numerical data 32768 to +32767
F3
unsigned Long integer numerical data 0 to 4294967925
F4
Unsigned integer RTD/thermistor monitoring function status

Bit 0 : t RTD1 ALARM signal or Thermist1 signal
Bit 1 : t RTD1 TRIP signal or Thermist2 signal
Bit 2 : t RTD2 ALARM signal
Bit 3 : t RTD2 TRIP signal
Bits 13 to 15 : reserved
F5
Unsigned integer : Motor start-up detection criterion

Bit 0 : Closing of the CB (52A)
Bit 1 : Closing of the CB and overshoot of the Istart current threshold (52A + Istart)
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 35/94
CODE
DESCRIPTION
F6
Unsigned long : Trip output relay assignment (relay n1)

bit 0 : tI>>
bit 1 : tI0>
Bit 2 : tI0>>
Bit 3 : tI2>
Bit 4 : tI< (loss of load)
Bit 5 : THERM OVERLOAD (Thermal overload)
Bit 6 : EXCES LONG START (Excessive long start)
Bit 7 : t Istall (Stalled rotor whilst running)
Bit 8 : LOCKED ROTOR (locked rotor at start)
Bit 9 : t RTD1 TRIP or Thermist1
Bit 10 : t RTD2 TRIP or Thermist2
Bit 11 : t RTD3 TRIP
F6
Bit 0 : t I2>>
Bit 1 : EXT 1>
Bit 2 : EXT 2>
Bit 3 : Equation
Bit 4 : Equation
Bit 5 : Equation
Bit 6 : Equation
A
B
C
D
( AND logical gate A)

( AND logical gate B)
( AND logical gate C)
( AND logical gate D)
F7
Unsigned integer : Data transmitted on the analogue output

0 : IA RMS
1 : IB RMS
2 : IC RMS
3 : IN RMS
4 : THERM ST (thermal state)
5 : % I LOAD (load in % of full load current)
6 : Tbef Start (time before a permitted start)
7 : Tbef Trip (time before a thermal trip)
8 : TC RTD1
9 : TC RTD2
10 : TC RTD3
11 : TC RTD4
12 : TC RTD5
13 : TC RTD6
F8
Unsigned integer : Latching of the trip output relay (relay n1)

Bit 0 : tI>>
Bit 1 : tI0>>
Bit 2 : tI2>>
Bit 3 : Equation A
Bit 4 : Equation B
Bit 5 : Equation C
Bit 6 : Equation D
F9
Unsigned integer : Remote order

Bit 0 : Remote delocking of the trip output relay (relay n1)
Bit 1 : Remote alarm acknowledgement
Bit 2 : Remote TRIP ORDER
Bit 3 : Remote CLOSE ORDER
Bit 4 : Remote EMERGENCY START
Bit 5 : Remote order to change of active setting group
Bit 6 : Remote ORDER 1
Bit 7 : Remote ORDER 2
Bit 8 : Remote trigging of disturbance record
Bit 9 : Remote maintenance mode enabling order
Bit 10 : Remote maintenance mode disabling order
Bit 11 : Reserved
Bit 12 : Non automatic event/fault record acknowledgement on record retrieval
Bit 13 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged event record
Bit 14 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record
Bit 15 : Remote acknowledgement of the RAM memory error alarm
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 36/94
CODE
F10
DESCRIPTION
ASCII characters
32 127 = ASCII character1
32 127 = ASCII character 2
F11
Unsigned integer : reserved
F12
Unsigned integer : Logic inputs status

Bit 0 : Logic input 1 (CB/contactor status : 52a)
Bit 1 : Logic input 2 (speed switch input)
Bit 2 : Logic input 3
F13
Unsigned integer : Output relays status

Bit 0 : Output relay 1 (trip output relay)
Bit 1 : Output relay 2
Bit 5 : Watchdog relay
F14
Unsigned integer : Auxiliary output relays allocation

Bit 0 : Allocation to relay 2
F14
Unsigned integer : AND logical gates allocation

Bit 0 : Allocation to equation A
Bit 1 : Allocation to equation B
Bit 2 : Allocation to equation C
Bit 3 : Allocation to equation D
F15
Unsigned integer :Logic inputs allocation.

Bit 0 : EMERG ST (emergency start)
Bit 1 : SET GROUP (change from one protection setting group to another)
Bit 2 : VOLT. DIP (voltage dip re acceleration authorisation)
Bit 3 : DIST TRIG (trigging of a disturbance recording)
Bit 4 : EXT RESET (external reset)
Bit 5 : EXT 1 (auxiliary 1 timer)
F16
Unsigned integer : Earth fault and unbalance protection information

Bits 0 to 4: reserved
Bit 5 : Instantaneous signal (I0> or I0>>)
bit 6 : Time delayed signal (tI0> or tI0>> or tI2> or tI2>>)
F17
Unsigned integer : Short-circuit and loss of load protection information

Bit 0 : reserved
Bit 1 : Phase A signal , overshoot of the I>> threshold
Bit 2 : Phase B signal, overshoot of the I>> threshold
Bit 3 : Phase C signal, overshoot of the I>> threshold
Bit 4 : reserved
Bit 5 : Instantaneous signal I>>
Bit 6 : Time delayed signal tI>> or tI<
Bits 7 15 : reserved
F18
Unsigned integer : Analogue output type

0 : 4-20 mA
1 : 0-20 mA
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 37/94
CODE
DESCRIPTION
F19
Unsigned long : LED allocation

Bit 0 : ALARM (thermal alarm)
Bit 1 : THERM OVERLOAD (thermal overload)
Bit 2 : tI0>
Bit 3 : tI0>>
Bit 4 : t I >>
Bit 5 : tI2>
Bit 6 : tI2>>
Bit 7 : tI<
Bit 8 : EXCES LONG START
Bit 9 : t Istall (stalled rotor whilst running)
Bit 10 : LOCKED ROTOR (at start)
Bit 11 : EMERG RESTART (emergency restart)
Bit 12 : FORBIDDEN START
Bit 13 : t RTD1,2,3 ALARM
Bit 14 : t RTD1,2,3 TRIP
Bit 15 : t RTD4 ,5 ,6 ALARM
Bit 16 : t RTD4 ,5 ,6 TRIP
Bit 17 : Thermist1, 2
Bit 18 : EXT 1
Bit 19 : EXT 2
Bit 20 : MOTOR STOPPED
Bit 21 : MOTOR RUNNING
Bit 22 : SUCCESSFUL START
Bit 23 to 31 : reserved
F20
Unsigned integer : Status of the information assigned to the logic inputs

Bit 0 : Emergency start
Bit 1 : Change from one protection setting group to another
Bit 2 : Voltage dip
Bit 3 : CB/Contactor status (52a interlock) : open = 0 close = 1
Bit 4 : Trigging of a disturbance recording
Bit 5 : Speed switch signal
Bit 6 : External reset
Bit 7 : Auxiliary timer EXT 1
F21
Unsigned integer : Software version

most significant digit : software version number
lost significant digit : software version letter
10 : 1.A version
11 : 1.B version
20 : 2.A version
32 : 3.C version
41 : 4.B version
F22
Unsigned integer : Internal logics

Bit 0 : Trip output relay latched (relay n1)
Bit 1 : reserved
F23
Unsigned integer : Quick reading byte

Bit 0 : General MiCOM relay status
Bit 1 : Minor relay failure
Bit 2 : Presence of a non-acknowledged event record
Bit 3 : Clock synchronisation status
Bit 4 : Presence of a non-acknowledged disturbance record
Bit 5 : Presence of a non-acknowledged fault record
F24
0 : Function in service
1 : Function out of service
F25
2 : ASCII characters
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 38/94
CODE
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
DESCRIPTION
Default displayed value
1 : IA RMS
2 : IB RMS
3 : IC RMS
4 : I0 RMS
5 : THERM ST (Thermal state)
6 : % I LOAD (load in % of full load current)
Reserved
Unsigned integer : Baudrate
0 : 300
1 : 600
2 : 1200
3 : 2400
4 : 4800
5 : 9600
6 : 19200
7 : 38400
Unsigned integer : parity
0 : Without
1 : Even
2 : Odd
Unsigned integer : Data bits
0 : 7 data bits
1 : 8 data bits
Unsigned integer : Stop bit
0 : 1 stop bit
1 : 2 stop bits
Unsigned integer : Thermistor type
0 : PTC
1 : NTC
Unsigned integer : Thermal image information
Bit 0 : ALARM signal (thermal alarm)
Bit 1 : THERM OV. signal (thermal overload)
Bit 2: FORBID START signal (prohibited start due to thermal criteria)
Unsigned integer : Start sequence and stalled/locked rotor information
Bit 0 : Start sequence in progress signal
Bit 1 : Successful start signal
Bit 2 : Excessive long start signal
Bit 3 : Stalled rotor whilst running signal
Bit 4 : Locked rotor at start signal
Bit 5 : Overshoot of the permitted cold starts number signal
Bit 6 : Overshoot of the permitted hot starts number signal
Bit 7 : Limitation of the starts number signal
Bit 8 : Minimum time between two starts signal
Bit 9 : Prohibiting start signal
Bit 10 : Reserved
Bit 11 : Re-acceleration phase in progress signal
Bit 12 : Reserved
Bit 13 : Overshoot of the Istall threshold signal
Bit 14 : Motor running signal
Bit 15 : Reserved
Reserved
Unsigned integer : EXT1EXT4 timers and AND logical gates information
Bit 0 : EXT1 timer signal
Bit 2 : Equation A signal
Bit 3 : Equation B signal
Bit 4 : Equation C signal
Bit 5 : Equation D signal
Bit 6 : reserved
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 39/94
CODE
DESCRIPTION
F37
Reserved
F38
Reserved
F39
Unsigned integer : Displayed fault record number

0 : reserved
1 : Fault record n1
2 : Fault record n2
3 : Fault record n3
4 : Fault record n4
5 : Fault record n5
F40
Disturbance record trigging criterion

0 : ON INST : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, I0> or I0>>)
1 : ON TRIP : Relay n1 operation (trip output relay operation)
F41
Display alarm message

Bit 0 a : TH OVERLOAD (thermal overload)
Bit 1 a : tIo>
Bit 2 a : tIo>>
Bit 3 a : tIi>
Bit 4 a : tIi>>
Bit 5 a : LONG START tIstart
Bit 6 a : MECHAN JAM tIstall (whilst running)
Bit 7 a : LOCKED ROTOR (at start)
Bit 8 a : t RTD 1 TRIP
Bit 14 a : Thermist 1
Bit 15 a : Thermist 2
F41
Bit 0 b : EXT 1
Bit 1 b : EXT 2
Bit 2 b : EQUATION A
Bit 3 b : EQUATION B
Bit 4 b : EQUATION C
Bit 5 b : EQUATION D
Bit 6 b : ALARM (thermal alarm)
Bit 7 b : t RTD 1 ALARM or START
Bit 13 b : FORBIDDEN START
Bit 14 b : START NB LIMIT
Bit 15 b : T between 2 start
F41
Bit 0 c : RE-ACCELER AUTHOR

Bit 1 c : OPERATING TIME SW (CB operating time)
Bit 2 c : OPERTION NB SW (CB operating time)
Bit 3 c : SA2n ( Ampsn cut by CB)
F42
RTD type
0 : Pt100 type
1 : Ni 120 type
2 : Ni 100 type
3 : Cu 10 type
F43
Circuit breaker monitoring flag

Bit 0 : CB operating time signal
Bit 1 : CB operation number signal
Bit 2 : Ampsn cut by CB signal
F44
Reserved
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 40/94
CODE
DESCRIPTION
F45
RDT status
Bit 0 : RTD1 failure or thermistance 1 failure
Bit 1 : RTD2 failure or thermistance 2 failure
Bit 2 : RTD3 failure
Bit 6 : RTD board error
F46
Unsigned integer : Status of the MiCOM relay selftest

Bit 0 : Analogue output error
Bit 1 : Communication error
Bit 2 : EEPROM memory error
Bit 3 : Analogue signals acquisition error
Bit 4 : Internal clock error
Bit 5 : EEPROM calibration error
Bit 6 : RAM memory error
Bit 7 : RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit)
F47
Reserved
F48
F49
Reserved
Reserved
F50
1st word : Disturbance record number

2nd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec)..lsb (low significant bit)
3rd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec)..msb (most significant bit)
4th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)..lsb (low significant bit)
5th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)..msb (most significant bit)
6th word :Cause of the disturbance record trigging
1 : Relay n1 operation
2 : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, Io> or Io>>)
3 : Remote trig
4 : Trig order received through a logic input
7th word : Frequency
F51
1st word : Number of available current values of the start-up current form record
2nd word : Address of the last page containing significant record data
3rd word : Word number contained in the last page (containing significant record data)
F52
1st word : event type : Refer to format F56

2nd word : associated value type : Refer to format F56
3rd word : mapping address of the associated value
4th word : reserved
5th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the
01/01/1994lsb
6th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the
01/01/1994..msb
7th word : event occurrence date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit)
8th word : event occurrence date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit)
9th word: acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged event ; 1 = acknowledged event)
F53
1st word : Fault record number

2nd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/1994.lsb (low significant bit)
3rd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/1994.msb (most significant bit)
4th word : Fault date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit)
5th word : Fault date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit)
6th word : Fault date (season) : (0 = winter,1 = summer, 2 = non defined)
7th word : Active setting group while the fault occurrence : (1 or 2)
8th word :Faulty phase : ( 0 =none, 1 = phase A, 2 = phase B, 3 = phase C, 4 =
phases A-B, 5 = phases AC, 6 = phases B-C, 7 = phases A-B-C, 8 = earth)
9th word : Cause of the fault record : refer to format F57
10th word : Fault value magnitude (fundamental value) : refer to format F59
11th word : Phase A current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59
12th word : Phase B current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59
13th word : Phase C current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59
14th word : Earth current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59
15th word : Acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged fault record; 1 = acknowledged
fault record)
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
CODE
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 41/94
DESCRIPTION
F54
1st word : Samples number containing in the mapping

2nd word : Pre-time sample number
3rd word : Post-time sample number
4th word : Primary phase CT value
5th word : Secondary phase CT value
6th word : Primary earth CT value
7th word : Secondary earth CT value
8th word : Ratio of the internal phase CT
9th word : Ratio of the internal earth CT
10th word : Address of the last page containing samples
11th word : Word number contained in the last page (containing samples)
F55
1st word : Number of disturbance record available

2nd word : Oldest disturbance record number
3rd word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec) ..lsb (low significant bit)
4th word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec) ..msb (most significant bit)
5th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit)
6th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit)
7th word : Cause of the oldest disturbance record :
3 : Remote trig
8th word : Acknowledgement
9th word : Previous disturbance record number
10th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec) ..lsb (low significant bit)
11th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec) ..msb (most significant bit)
12th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit)
13th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit)
14th word : Cause of the previous disturbance record :
3 : Remote trig
15th word : Acknowledgement and so on regarding the other disturbance records.
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 42/94
Code
F56
Event type
Associated value type
00
"No EVENT"
01
"REMOTE CLOSING"
F9
02
"REMOTE TRIPPING"
F9
03
DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGING
F9
04
SETTING CHANGE
MODBUS address of
the modified value
05
"I >>"
(instantaneous signal)
F17
06
"I0 >"
F16
07
"I0 >>" (instantaneous signal)
F16
08
"I2 >"
F16
09
F16
10
"I <"
F17
11
"THERMAL ALARM"
F33
12
"t RTD1 ALARM"
F4
13
"t RTD2 ALARM"
F4
14
"t RTD3 ALARM"
F4
15
"t RTD4 ALARM"
F4
16
"t RTD5 ALARM"
F4
17
"t RTD6 ALARM"
F4
18
"THERMAL OVERLOAD"
F33
19
"FORBIDDEN START"
F33
20
"t I >>"
(time delayed signal)
F17
21
"t I0 >"
F16
22
"t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)
F16
23
"t I2 >"
F16
24
F16
25
"t I <"
F17
26
"REACCELERATION IN PROGRESS"
F34
27
"EMERGENCY START"
F34
28
"START-UP DETECTION"
F34
29
"MOTOR HALTED"
F34
30
"EXCESSIVE START TIME"
F34
31
"STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING"
F34
32
"LOCKED ROTOR AT START"
F34
33
"START NUMBER LIMITATION"
F34
34
"MINIMUM TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS"
F34
35
"EXT 1"
F36
36
"EXT 2"
F36
37
"EQUATION A"
F36
38
"EQUATION B"
F36
39
"EQUATION C"
F36
40
"EQUATION D"
F36
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 43/94
Code
F56
Event type
41
"t RTD1 TRIP"
F4
42
"t RTD2 TRIP"
F4
43
"t RTD3 TRIP"
F4
44
"t RTD4 TRIP"
F4
45
"t RTD5 TRIP"
F4
46
"t RTD6 TRIP"
F4
47
"THERMISTOR 1"
F4
48
"THERMISTOR 2"
F4
49
"CB OPERATING TIME ALARM"
F43
50
"CB OPERATION NUMBER ALARM"
F43
51
"CB SAn ALARM"
F43
52
"TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD"
F33
53
"TRIPPING : t I >>"
F17
54
"TRIPPING : t I0 >"
F16
55
"TRIPPING : t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)
F16
56
"TRIPPING : t I2 >"
F16
57
"TRIPPING : t I2 >>"
F16
58
"TRIPPING : t I <"
F17
59
"TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE START TIME"
F34
60
" TRIPPING : STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING"
F34
61
"TRIPPING : LOCKED ROTOR AT START"
F34
62
"TRIPPING : EXT 1"
F36
63
"TRIPPING : EXT 2"
F36
64
"TRIPPING : EQUATION A"
F36
65
"TRIPPING : EQUATION B"
F36
66
"TRIPPING : EQUATION C"
F36
67
"TRIPPING : EQUATION D"
F36
68
"TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP"
F4
69
F4
70
F4
71
F4
72
F4
73
F4
74
"TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1"
F4
75
F4
76
"ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM USING KEYPAD"
77
"ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS USING KEYPAD"
78
"REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM"
79
"REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS"
80
"CHANGE OF THE LOGIC INPUTS STATUS"
F12
81
"MAJOR RELAY FAILURE
F46
82
"MINOR RELAY FAILURE"
F46
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 44/94
Code
F56
Event type
83
"CHANGE OF THE LOGIC OUTPUTS STATUS"
F13
84
"EXT 3"
F36
85
"EXT 4"
F36
NOTE:
- The double arrow means the event is generated on event

occurrence and another is generated on event
disappearance.
- On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated
format is set to 1 .
- On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the
associated format is set to 0 .
Code
F57
Fault origin
00
" NO FAULT
01
" REMOTE TRIPPING"
02
" TRIPPING : t I >>"
03
" TRIPPING :t I0 >"
04
" TRIPPING :t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)
05
" TRIPPING :t I2 >"
06
" TRIPPING :t I2 >>"
07
" TRIPPING :t I <"
08
" TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE LONG START "
09
" TRIPPING :STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING "
10
" TRIPPING :LOCKED ROTOR AT START "
11
" TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD "
12
" TRIPPING : EXT 1"
13
" TRIPPING : EXT 2"
14
" TRIPPING : EQUATION A"
15
" TRIPPING : EQUATION B"
16
" TRIPPING : EQUATION C"
17
" TRIPPING : EQUATION D"
18
" TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP "
19
20
21
22
23
24
" TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1"
25
" TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2"
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 45/94
Conversion rules for the current values of the disturbance record

F58
* In order to obtain the phase current value at phase CT primary, apply the following formula :
Primary phase current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary phase CT value x 2 / 800
* In order to obtain the earth current value at the earth CT primary, apply the following formula :
Primary earth current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary earth CT value x 2 / 32700
Conversion rules for the current values of the fault data record
F59
* In order to obtain the phase current value at phase CT primary, apply the following formula :
Primary phase current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary phase CT value / 800
* In order to obtain the negative sequence component value of the current at phase CT primary, apply
the following formula :
Primary negative current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary phase CT value / 800
* In order to obtain the earth current value at the earth CT primary, apply the following formula :
Primary earth current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary earth CT value / 32700
Origin of Triggering of the perturbographic recorder

F60
Value1 : Trigger on Trip output relay RL1 information

Value 2 : Trigger on instantaneous thresholds
Value 3 : Trigger o n (TC) via communication
Value 4 : Trigger via a Logic Input
Value 5 : No active perturbo.
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 46/94
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 47/94
COURIER DATABASE
V4.D
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 48/94
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
2.
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 49/94
K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE

The serial communications are transmitted on K-Bus, a multi-drop network proposing
an instantaneous interface with IEC 870 - 5 - FT1.2 standards. The language and the
communication protocol used are Courier. This concept permits especially to the
generic programmes of the principal units to access to a high number of different
relay types without need to change permanently the principal unit program for each
relay type. The relays forms a distributed database in which the principal workstation
proceeds to a selective call of the slave relays in order to know all necessary
information.
Courier has a concept for the functions with a selective call system which allows not a
slave periphery to communicate directly with the central unit when one shall informs
another about a particular event. The slave workstation has to wait that the principal
workstation asks for the information. With Courier each information is given into a
box with a code of the length and the database type. In knowing the database format
the reception periphery can read them.
2.1
K-BUS
K-Bus is a communication system developed for connecting the slave peripheries in
remoting on the central unit, permitting them to execute all remote monitoring and
remote control functions using the appropriated communication language. K-Bus is
not able to permit a direct communication between the slave peripheries. Only a
communication between the central unit and the slave peripheries can be established.
The principal characteristics of the K-Bus are his profitability, his high security level,
his installation facility and his user friendliness.
2.1.1
K-Bus transmission layer

The communication port is supported on the reception levels and the voltage
transmission RS485 with galvanic isolation assured by a transformer. A selective call
protocol is used. No relay unit is allowed to transmit before having received a
validation message without any error detection. The transmission is synchronous on a
pair of isolated waves. The data are coded FM0 with a clock signal for eliminate all
CC-component, allows the signal to cross the transformers.
With the exception of the central units, each network node is passive. No defective
unit from the system can interfere with the communications established with the other
units. The message format is HDLC. The data transmission speed is 64 kbits/s.
2.1.2
K-Bus connection
The connection on the K-Bus port is realised by screwed terminals of 4 mm of MIDOS
standards or by FASTON-connectors. A cabled pair is sufficient to realise the
connection, knowing that the polarity is not important. It is recommended to use an
external screen earth linked at the end of the principal workstation only. The screen
has to be fixed with a M4 screw following the wiring scheme. The functioning of the
K-BUS network is guaranteed for 32 units connected on 1000 meters of cables.
Thanks to the data code method, the polarity of the Bus cable connection is not
important.
N.B. :
The K-Bus network has to finish with a 150 ohms resistance on

each end of the Bus. The principal workstation can be placed
anywhere on the network. This command point has to be
unique.
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 50/94
2.1.3
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Auxiliary equipment
For communication with the relay it is necessary to have at least one converter case
K-Bus/IEC870-5 of the type KITZ and a computer suitable software, an
interconnection cable RS232 for connecting the KITZ to the computer and a software
conform to the specification of the Courier protocol.
2.2
Relay courier database

The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database
being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can
take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal
values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be
part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the
contents of the column.
This data base is given in the APPENDIX 1.
2.3
Setting changes
This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:
Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits
Pre load Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that
setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this
action.
Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive
response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be
returned.
Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change.
This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting
limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this
method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are
required for each change.
2.4
Systems integration data
2.4.1
Address of the relay

The relays can have any address between 1 and 254 included. The address 255
corresponds to the global address to which all relays and all the other slave
peripheries are responding. The Courier protocol specifies that no response can be
resent from a slave periphery to a global message. This permits to avoid that all
peripheries respond at the same time creating by this way user conflict on the Bus.
Each relay possess an address settled on 255 in order to guarantee that in case of his
connection to the operating network, his address cannot create any conflict with the
address of another periphery already in exploitation. In order to permit to a new
periphery to get entirely operational, his address has to be settled. The address can
be modified manually in capturing the password, than in following the method of the
setting change through the user interface on the front plate of the relay.
The same, if the network functioning on a computer takes in charge the autoaddressing, the relay address can be settled on 0 to active the characteristic of autoaddressing of the computer software. The relay receives then the next valid address
on the Bus.
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 51/94
If the address is 255 or not known, she can be modified in sending a new address,
with a global message, to a periphery possessing a particular serial number. This
method is used for those peripheries which are not having any user interface for
reading or changing the address in process.
2.4.2
Measured values
Each measured value can be periodically extracted by a selective call of the MiCOM
relay.
2.4.3
Status word
Each response of a slave periphery contains an octet of status. This octet is resent by
the relay at the beginning of each message for signalling important data. The
principal workstation can be design for responding automatically to these important
data.
The contained indications are the following :
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 -
2.4.4
1 = recording of disturbance available for retrieval

1 = reserved
1 = reserved
1 = relay busy, no response possible in time
1 = reserved
1 = recording of events available for retrieval
1 = reserved
1 = reserved
Control status word

The Control status word is located in the cell of the menu 000D.
It is used for transmitting the control information of the slave periphery to the central
unit. Nevertheless, the relays described in this manual are protection relays, which
are not using this control characteristic.
2.4.5
Logic input status word

The logic control input status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from
the cell of menu 0020. The 2 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of
each of the 2 logic inputs. This cell is accessible only in reading.
Bit 0 : logic input 1: CB/Contactor status (52a interlock)
Bit 1 : logic input 2 : speed switch
Bit 2 : logic input 3
2.4.6
Output relay status word

The output relay status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cell
of menu 0021. The 8 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of each
of the 5 output relays. This cell is accessible only in reading.
Bit 0 : relay RL1 (TRIP)
Bit 1 : programmable relay RL2
Bit 4 : watchdog relay
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 52/94
2.4.7
Control information
The status of internal controls triggered by the auto-control program of the relays can
be observed in proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0022.
The bits 0 to 6 indicate the material controls of the product.
Bit 0 analogue output error
Bit 1 communication error
Bit 2 EEPROM memory error
Bit 3 analogue signals acquisition error
Bit 4 internal clock error
Bit 5 EEPROM calibration error
Bit 6 RAM memory error
Bit 7 RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit)
2.4.8
Protection Indication
The protection indications gives the status of different protection elements in the relay.
The fault indications are generated with these indications. They are transmitted in the
events recordings, in case of a fault recording. This is the only way to access to these
indications.
The status of internal protection indication of the relays can be observed in
proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0023, 0024 and 0025.
The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0023:
Bit position
Function protection
I>> (instantaneous signal)
Io> (instantaneous signal)
Io>> (instantaneous signal)
Ii> (instantaneous signal)
Ii>> (instantaneous signal)
I< (instantaneous signal)
tI>> (time delayed signal)
tIo> (time delayed signal)
tIo>> (time delayed signal)
tIi> (time delayed signal)
10
tIi>> (time delayed signal)
11
tI< (time delayed signal)
12
Thermal alarm
13
Thermal overload
14
Thermal base start-up inhibition ( forbidden start)
15
Reserved
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 53/94
The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0024:
Bit position
Function protection
Re-acceleration phase in progress
Start-up detection
Motor halted
Stalled rotor whilst running
Limitation of the start number (START NB LIMITATION)
Minimum time between two starts
EXT 1 timer
EXT 2 timer
10
Equation A
11
Equation B
12
Equation C
13
Equation D
14
EXT 3 timer
15
EXT 4 timer
The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0025 :
Bit position
Function protection
CB operating time alarm
CB operation number alarm
CB SA2n alarm
t RTD1 Alarm or thermist 1
t RTD2 Alarm or thermist 2
t RTD3 Alarm
t RTD4 Alarm
t RTD5 Alarm
t RTD6 Alarm
t RTD1 Trip
10
t RTD2 Trip
11
t RTD3 Trip
12
t RTD4 Trip
13
t RTD5 Trip
14
t RTD6 Trip
15
Reserved
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 54/94
2.4.9
Measurement control
The control functions through a MiCOM P220 relay can be executed on a serial link.
These functions are supported in particular on the changes of the individual relay
settings, on the changes of the setting groups, on the remote control of the circuit
breaker, as well as on the functions and the locking of the selected output relays.
The remote control is limited in the control functions selected in the table of the relays
menu. The CRC and the controls of the message length are used on each received
message. No response is given for messages received with an error detection. The
principal unit can be re-initialised in order to resent an order as often as wanted if he
is not receiving any response or if he receives a response with an error detection.
N.B. :
The control commands are generally materialised by the change

of the cell value. They dispose the same inherent security. No
response is allowed for the global orders to avoid any user
conflict of the Bus. For this type of order, a double start is used
for the verification of the message by the relay. The relay
transmits then a confirmation indicating that the control order or
the change of setting has been accepted. If this is not the case,
the relay is sending an error message.
2.4.10 Change of remote measurements

The relay is only responding to the orders of a setting change through the serial port
if the SD0 link = 1 is selected. The selection of the SD0 link = 1 is blocking all the
changes of remote setting with the exception of the SC logical links and the password
capture. When the SD0 link = 0 is selected, the remote setting are protected by the
password.
For changing the remote links, the password has to be first remote captured .
and the SD and SD0 function links have to be settled on 1.
2.5
Event extraction
Events can be extracted either automatically or manually . For automatic extraction all
events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this
includes fault. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults at
random from the stored records.
2.5.1
Automatic event extraction

This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it
is produced via the rear port.
When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this
indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest,
unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command.
The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or
Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records.
Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to
confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been
extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the
next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as below.
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
2.5.2
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 55/94
Event types
Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:
2.5.3
Change of state of output contact
Change of state of opto input
Protection element operation
Alarm condition
Setting Change
Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)
Event format
The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay:
Cell Reference
Timestamp
Cell Text
Cell Value
APPENDIX 1 contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates how the
contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records will return a Courier Type 3
event which contains the above fields together with two additional fields:
Event extraction column
Event number
These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using
the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting
which allows the fault record to be selected. This setting should be set to the event
number value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from
the relay by uploading the text and data from the column.
2.5.4
Manual record extraction

Column 02 of the database can be used for manual viewing fault records. The
contents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible
to select directly a fault record.
Fault Record Selection (Row 01) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record
using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will
be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the
details of the fault record selected (row 02 to 0A)
It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the
relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new fault
occurs.
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 56/94
2.6
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Disturbance record extraction

The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible via the Courier
interface.
Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be
extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest un-extracted record, older records will be
assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To
facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is
set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the
record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using
the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B.
As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract
disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier
mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide.
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
3.
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 57/94
LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY

Code
Event type
Cell Reference
00
"No EVENT"
01
"REMOTE CLOSING"
02
"REMOTE TRIPPING"
03
DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGING
04
SETTING CHANGE
05
"I >>"
0023
06
"I0 >"
0023
07
0023
08
"I2 >"
0023
09
0023
10
"I <"
0023
11
"THERMAL ALARM"
0023
12
"t RTD1 ALARM"
0025
13
"t RTD2 ALARM"
0025
14
"t RTD3 ALARM"
0025
15
"t RTD4 ALARM"
0025
16
"t RTD5 ALARM"
0025
17
"t RTD6 ALARM"
0025
18
" THERMAL OVERLOAD"
0023
19
"FORBIDDEN START"
0023
20
"t I >>"
0023
21
"t I0 >"
0023
22
0023
23
"t I2 >"
0023
24
0023
25
"t I <"
0023
26
"REACCELERATION IN PROGRESS"
0024
27
"EMERGENCY START"
0024
28
"START-UP DETECTION"
0024
29
" MOTOR HALTED"
0024
30
0024
31
0024
32
0024
33
"START NUMBER LIMITATION"
0024
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 58/94
Code
Event type
Cell Reference
34
"MINIMUM TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS"
0024
35
"EXT 1"
0024
36
"EXT 2"
0024
37
"EQUATION A"
0024
38
"EQUATION B"
0024
39
"EQUATION C"
0024
40
"EQUATION D"
0024
41
"t RTD1 TRIP"
0025
42
"t RTD2 TRIP"
0025
43
"t RTD3 TRIP"
0025
44
"t RTD4 TRIP"
0025
45
"t RTD5 TRIP"
0025
46
"t RTD6 TRIP"
0025
47
"THERMISTOR 1"
0025
48
"THERMISTOR 2"
0025
49
"CB OPERATING TIME ALARM"
0025
50
"CB OPERATION NUMBER ALARM"
0025
51
"CB SAn ALARM"
0025
52
"TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD"
53
"TRIPPING : t I >>"
54
"TRIPPING : t I0 >"
55
"TRIPPING : t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)
56
"TRIPPING : t I2 >"
57
"TRIPPING : t I2 >>"
58
"TRIPPING : t I <"
59
"TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE START TIME"
60
"TRIPPING : STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING"
61
"TRIPPING : LOCKED ROTOR AT START"
62
"TRIPPING : EXT 1"
63
"TRIPPING : EXT 2"
64
"TRIPPING : EQUATION A"
65
"TRIPPING : EQUATION B"
66
"TRIPPING : EQUATION C"
67
"TRIPPING : EQUATION D"
68
69
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 59/94
Code
Event type
Cell Reference
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
"ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM USING KEYPAD" 0
77
"ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS USING KEYPAD"
78
"REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM"
79
"REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS"
80
"CHANGE OF THE LOGIC INPUTS STATUS"
0020
81
"MAJOR RELAY FAILURE"
0022
82
"MINOR RELAY FAILURE"
0022
83
"CHANGE OF THE LOGIC OUTPUTS STATUS"
0021
84
"EXT 3"
0024
85
"EXT 4"
0024
86
"OUTPUT RELAY LATCH"
0021
87
"CHANGE OF CONFIGURATION GROUP"
N.B. :
- When the cell reference is different of zero this means that the
event is generated on event occurrence and another is
generated on event disappearance.
- When the cell reference is equal to zero, only the event on
edging edge is generated.
- Sixteen bits are available in the string of characters to
describe the contain of the Courier cell:
- On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated
format is set to 1 .
- On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the
associated format is set to 0 .
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 60/94
4.
LIST OF FAULTS CREATED BY THE RELAY

Code
Event type
00
"No FAULT"
01
"REMOTE TRIPPING"
02
"t I >>"
03
"t I0 >"
04
05
"t I2 >"
06
07
"t I <"
08
09
10
11
THERMAL OVERLOAD"
12
"EXT 1"
13
"EXT 2"
14
"EQUATION A"
15
"EQUATION B"
16
"EQUATION C"
17
"EQUATION D"
18
"t RTD1 TRIP"
19
"t RTD2 TRIP"
20
"t RTD3 TRIP"
21
"t RTD4 TRIP"
22
"t RTD5 TRIP"
23
"t RTD6 TRIP"
24
"THERMISTOR 1"
25
"THERMISTOR 2"

SYSTEM DATA
Language
SYS Password
Fnlinks: NON IMPLEMENTE
SYS Description
SYS Plant Ref.
SYS Model No.
SYS Firmware No.
SYS Serial No.
SYS Frequency
SYS Comms Level
SYS Rly Address
Plant Status Word: NON IMPLEMENTE
Control Status Word: NON IMPLEMENTE
SYS Setting Grp
Load shed Stage: NON IMPLEMENTE
SYS Software Ref
Unused, reserved
SYS Logic Stat
SYS Relay Stat
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
11
12-1F
20
21
00
Menu Text
Row
COURIER DATABASES
Col
5.
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
V X.A
0: log input 1 = O/O
1: log input 2 = speed
2: log input 3
3: log input 4
4: log input 5
relay 1 (trip)
1: relay 2
2: relay 3
3: relay 4
4: relay watch-dog
ASCII Text (16 characters)

Binary flag (5 bits)
1*
Unsigned Integer
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Data
Setting
000000
XXXX Hz
1
255 *
Setting
Depend Cell Type
Setting
Setting
Data
AAAA
Values
(* : default)
Smmp
ALST
P220
Ind
ASCII Text (16 bytes)

NON IMPLEMENTE
Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)
NON IMPLEMENTE
ASCII Password(4 bytes)
Data Type
0/255/1
1
1
Passw
Level
0
50/60/10
32/127/1
65/90/1
65/90/1
Min/Max/Step
Page 61/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Col
Menu Text
SYS Alarms
SYS Pseudo-TS group 1 Stat
Row
22
23
Page 62/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Data Type
Ind
Values
Depend Cell Type
(* : default)
Data
0: Ana output err
1: Comm err
2: Eeprom err data
3: Ct error
4: Clock error
5: Eeprom err calib
6: Ram error
7: RTD/therm err
Data
I>>
1: Ie>
2: Ie>>
3: Ii>
4: Ii>>
5 : I<
6: tI>>
7: tIe>
8: tIe>>
9: tIi>
10: tIi>>
11 : tI<
12 : Thermal Alarm
13 : Thermal Overload
14 : Thermal forbid Start
Min/Max/Step
Passw
Level
1
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Col
Menu Text
Row
24
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Data Type
Ind
Values
Depend Cell Type
(* : default)
Data
0: Reacceleration
1: Start Detect
2: Motor Stopped
3: Start too long
4: Stalled Rotor
5: Locked Rotor
6: Start nb limit
7: Time between 2 Starts
8: Ext. 1
9: Ext. 2
10: Equation 1
11: Equation 2
12: Equation 3
13: Equation 4
14: Ext. 3
15: Ext. 4
Min/Max/Step
Passw
Level
1
Page 63/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Col
Menu Text
Row
25
Page 64/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Binary flag (3 or 15 bits)
Data Type
Ind
Values
Depend Cell Type
(* : default)
0: SW operating Time
Data
1: SW operating nb
2: SA 2n
3: RTD1 Alarm (if option
RTD)
3: Thermistor 1 (if
option Thermistors )
4: RTD2 Alarm (if option
RTD)
4: Thermistor 2 (if
option Thermistors )
5: RTD3 Alarm (option
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
9: RTD1 Trip (option
RTD)
RTD)
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
Min/Max/Step
Passw
Level
1
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
FAULT RECORDS
Record number
Occur fault date
Active set group
Phase in fault
Phase detected by
Magnitude
Ia Magnitude
Ib Magnitude
Ic Magnitude
In Magnitude
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
02
USER CONTROL
USR Remote Control
00
01
01
Menu Text
Row
Col
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220

IEC DATE
Courier floating point
number
number
number
number
number
Data Type
Ind
12.34 A
12.34 A
12.34 A
12.34 A
1
PHASE A
I >>
12.34 A
5*
0: Unlck Trip Cont.

1: Ack all alarms
2: Trip
3: Close
4: Emergency start
5: Config change
6: Order 1
7: Order 2
8: Dist. trig
9: Start maintenance
10: End maintenance
Values
(* : default)
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Depend Cell Type
1/5/1
0/2047/1
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
Page 65/94
P220/EN GC/B43
MEASUREMENTS
Ia RMS
Ib RMS
Ic RMS
IN RMS
I1 positive
I2 negative
I0 zero
Frequency
Max Ph current
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
03
Menu Text
Row
Col
Page 66/94
P220/EN GC/B43

number
number
number
number
number
number
number
number
number
Data Type
Ind
12.34 A
12.34 Hz
12.34 A
12.34 A
12.34 A
12.34 A
12.34 A
12.34 A
12.34 A
Values
(* : default)
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Depend Cell Type
Min/Max/Step
Passw
Level
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Row
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Col
04
STATISTICS
Total trip number
Operator trip number
Therm trip
tI>> trip
tI0>; tI0>> trip
tIi>; tIi>> trip
tIstart trip
tIstall trip
Locked rotor trip
I< trip
RTD1 trip
(if option RTD)
RTD2 trip
(if option RTD)
RTD3 trip
(if option RTD or Thermistor)
RTD4 trip
RTD5 trip
RTD6 trip
Thermistor 1 trip (if option Thermistor)
Thermistor 2 trip (if option Thermistor)
Equation A trip
Equation B trip
Equation C trip
Equation D trip
Menu Text
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220

Data Type
Ind
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
Values
(* : default)
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Depend Cell Type
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
Page 67/94
P220/EN GC/B43
00
01
05
0F
10
11
12
0C
0D
0E
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
03
04
02
Row
Col
Page 68/94
Data Type

number
Thermal state
number
Time before TH trip
Temperature RTD1 (if option RTD)
number
Temperature RTD2 (if option RTD)
number
Temperature RTD3 (if option RTD or
Thermistor)
number
Thermistor))
number
Thermistor)
number
Thermistor)
number
Temperature R1
(if option Thermistor) Courier floating point
number
Temperature R2
(if option Thermistor) Courier floating point
number
Permit start number
Time before start
Last start I
number
Last start time
Motor start number
Emergency start number
Motor operat hours
PROCESS
I FLC Per Cent
Menu Text
P220/EN GC/B43
Ind
xxx s
xxx
xxx
xxx h
xxx
xxx s
xxx A
xx k Ohm
xx k Ohm
xxx C
xxx C
xxx C
xxx C
xxx C
xxx s
xxx C
xxx %
xxx %
Values
(* : default)
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Depend Cell Type
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
0D
Thermistor 2 type
RTD type
Thermistor)
Analog output type

(if option RTD, or Thermistor, or Analog
output)
03
04
05
Indexed string
IEC870 Time & Date

number
number
number
number
Data Type
(if option RTD or
Indexed string
Indexed string
(if option Thermistor) Indexed string
(if option Thermistor) Indexed string
Thermistor 1 type
02
SW operation nb
SW operation time
04
05
TIME:
Date/Time
CONFIG. SELECT
Start detection
SA2 IC
03
00
01
00
01
SA2 IB
02
08
SW MONITORING
SA2 IA
00
01
06
Menu Text
Row
Col
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
Ind
O/O *
O/O + I
PTC *
NTC
PTC *
NTC
PT100
Ni 120
Ni 100
Cu 10
4 - 20 mA
0 - 20 mA
0.0 s
Values
(* : default)
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Depend Cell Type
0/1
0/3/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
Min/Max/Step
1
1
Passw
Level
Page 69/94
P220/EN GC/B43
20
Ke
Te1
Te2
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Group 2 visible
03
Protection group n 1: visible if

0F02=1
Thermal overload function?
Thermal Inhibition?
I >
SETTING GROUPS
Select setting group
Group 1 visible
00
01
02
0F
CT RATIO
CFG Prim Ph CT Ratio
CFG Sec Ph CT Ratio
CFG Prim E CT Ratio
CFG Sec E CT Ratio
Transmitted signal on Analog output

(if option RTD, or Thermistor, or Analog
output)
06
00
01
02
03
04
Menu Text
Row
0E
Col
Page 70/94
P220/EN GC/B43
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Ind
Binary (1 bit)
0
Binary (1 bit)
0
number
number
Indexed string
Unsigned Integer
Indexed string

Indexed string
Data Type
3*
1* min
0.5* Te1
Disabled * / Enabled
0.2 In
1*
YES
NO
YES
NO
1000 *
1*
1000 *
1*
0F01=1
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Values
Depend Cell Type
(* : default)
Setting
Ia
Ib
Ic
I0
Th State
% load
Time before Authorized
Start
Time before Thermal
Trip
0/10/1
1/64/1
0.5/2.0/0.1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0.2/1.5/0.01
0/1/1
1/2/1
0/1/1
1/3000/1
1/5/4
1/3000/1
1/5/4
0/6
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
1
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
22
21
Col
0B
0C

Ie> function?
Ie>
t Ie>
Ie>> function?
Ie>>
t Ie>>
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
t I>>
Forbid start?
Forbid start
09
0A
(if option RTD)

(if option Thermistor)
03
RTD1 Influence?
RTD3 Influence?
Alarm?
Alarm
08
I>> function?
I>>
Tr
07
00
01
02
Menu Text
Row
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Binary (1 bit)
number
number
Binary (1 bit)
number
number
Binary (1 bit)
number
number
Binary (1 bit)
number
Binary (1 bit)
number

number
Binary (1 bit)
Data Type
Ind
0.00* s
0.002 Ien*
0.00* s
0.002 Ien*
0.00* s
0.10 In *
20* %
20* %
No / Yes
Values
(* : default)
1.0 *Te1
0F01=1
0F01=1
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
200B=1 Setting
Setting
2009=1 Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
1
0.0/100/0.01
0/1/1
1
0.002/1.0/0.001 1
0.0/100/0.01
0/1/1
1
0.002/1.0/0.001 1
0.0/100/0.01
0/1/1
1.0/12/0.01
0/1/1
20/100/1
0/1/1
20/100/1
0/1/1
1.0/20.0/0.5
Min/Max/Step
Page 71/94
P220/EN GC/B43
26
25
t I<
t Inhib
03
04
Locked rotor at start?
05
[37] LOSS OF LOAD

I< function?
I<
Stalled rotor?
Istall detection
03
04
00
01
02
[51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR

Blocked rotor function?
t Istall
t Istart
03
00
01
02
[48] EXCES LONG START

Exces long start function?
Istart detection
Ii>> function?
Ii>>
04
05
00
01
02
t Ii>
03
24
[46] UNBALANCE
Ii> function?
Ii>
00
01
02
23
Menu Text
Row
Col
Page 72/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Ind
Binary (1 bit)
number
number
number
Binary (1 bit)
number
Binary (1 bit)
number
Binary (1 bit)
Binary (1 bit)
0
number
Binary (1 bit)
number
number
Binary (1 bit)
number
Data Type
0.05* s
0.2* s
0.10 In *
1.0 I
0.1 s*
1 s*
1.0 I
0.25 In*
0.04* s
0.05 In*
Values
(* : default)
0F01=1
0F01=1
0F01=1
0F01=1
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type

1
1
Passw
Level
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.05/300.0/0.05 1
0.2/100.0/0.1
0/1/1
0.1/1.0/0.01
0/1/1
0/1/1
1.0/5.0/0.5
0/1/1
0.1/60.0/0.1
1/200/1
0/1/1
1.0/5.0/0.5
0/1/1
0.2/0.8/0.05
0.04/200.0/0.01 1
0/1/1
0.05/0.8/0.025
Min/Max/Step
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
RTD1 Trip
t RTD1 Trip
RTD2 function? (if option RTD)

RTD2 Alarm
t RTD2 Alarm
RTD2 Trip
t RTD2 Trip
RTD3 function? (if option RTD or

Thermistor)
RTD3 Alarm
t RTD3 Alarm
RTD3 Trip
t RTD3 Trip

Thermistor)
RTD4 Alarm
t RTD4 Alarm
RTD4 Trip
t RTD4 Trip

Thermistor)
RTD5 Alarm
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
13
14
15
16
11
12
01
02
03
[49/38] RTD SENSORS (if option RTD

or Thermistor)
RTD1 function? (if option RTD)
RTD1 Alarm
t RTD1 Alarm
00
27
Menu Text
Row
Col
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Ind

number
number
Binary (1 bit)
0

number
number
Binary (1 bit)
0
Binary (1 bit)
0
number
number
Binary (1 bit)
0
number
number
Binary (1 bit)
0
Data Type
0* C
0* C
0.0* s
0* C
0.0* s
0* C
0.0* s
0* C
0.0* s
0* C
0.0* s
0* C
0.0* s
0* C
0.0* s
0* C
0.0* s
Values
(* : default)
0F01=1
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0/200/1
0/1/1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
0/1/1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
0/1/1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
0/1/1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
0/1/1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
Page 73/94
P220/EN GC/B43
RTD6 Trip
t RTD6 Trip
1B
1C
1D
1E
00
00
01
02
03
04
05
60
01
02
[66] START NUMBER

Start number limitation function?
Treference
Cold start number
Hot start number
T interdiction
Protection group n 2
Same characteristics than Group n1:
visible if 0F03=1
Thermistor 2?
Thermistor 2

Thermistor)
RTD6 Alarm
t RTD6 Alarm
1A
03
04
RTD5 Trip
t RTD5 Trip
18
19
[49] THERMISTOR (if option

thermistor)
Thermistor 1?
Thermistor 1
t RTD5 Alarm
17
00
Menu Text
Row
40
28
Col
Page 74/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Ind
Binary (1 bit)
0
Binary (1 bit)
number
Binary (1 bit)
number

number
number

number
number
Binary (1 bit)
0
Data Type
10 min*
0*
0*
1min*
0.1 kOhm
0.1 kOhm
0* C
0.0* s
0* C
0.0* s
0* C
0.0* s
Values
(* : default)
0.0* s
0F01=1
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0/1/1
10/120/5
0/5/1
0/5/1
1/120/1
0/1/1
0.1/30.0/0.1
0/1/1
0.1/30.0/0.1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
0/1/1
0/200/1
0.0/100.0/0.1
0.0/100.0/0.1
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
1
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
INPUTS
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
EXT 1
EXT 2
EXT 3
EXT 4
Input edge type
00
01
02
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
62
63
REACCEL AUTHORIZ
Reaccel authoriz function?
Volt dip durat Treacc
MIN TIME BETW 2 START

Time betw start function?
T betw 2 start
00
01
02
61
Menu Text
Row
Col
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Ind
Indexed String
Indexed String
number
number
number
number
Binary (1 bit)
Indexed String
Binary (1 bit)
number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Binary (1 bit)
0
Data Type
0: Up / 1: Down
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0: NONE *
1: EMERG ST.
2: SET GROUP
3: VOLT. DIP
4: DIST TRIG
5: EXT RESET
6: EXT 1
7: EXT 2
= INPUT 3
= INPUT 3
0.0s
0.2 s *
1min *
Values
(* : default)
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0/1/1
0.0/200.0/0.01
0.0/200.0/0.01
0.0/200.0/0.01
0/7/1
0/7/1
0.0/200.0/0.01
0/7/1
0/1/1
0.2/10.0/0.1
0/1/1
1/120/1
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
Page 75/94
P220/EN GC/B43
18
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
64
17
Row
Col
AND LOGIC EQUATIONS1

Therm Overload
Alarm
Forbid Start
I >>
tI >>
Io >
tIo >
Io >>
tIo >>
tIi >
tIi >>
Excess long start
t Istall
Locked rotor
tI <
Start Number limit
T betw 2 start
t RTD1 Alarm (if option RTD)
t RTD1 Trip
(if option RTD)
t RTD2 Trip
(if option RTD)
t RTD3 Alarm (if option RTD or
Thermistor)
t RTD3 Trip
(if option RTD or
Thermistor)
Thermistor)
Menu Text
AND LOGIC EQUATIONS - 4 bits:

bit 0: equation A
bit 1: equation B
bit 2: equation C
bit 3: equation D
Page 76/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Data Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ind
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
Values
(* : default)
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
65
Col
t RTD4 Trip
Thermistor)
t RTD5 Alarm
Thermistor)
t RTD5 Trip
Thermistor)
t RTD6 Alarm
Thermistor)
t RTD6 Trip
Thermistor)
Therm. 1
Therm. 2
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
EXT4
Success start
19
AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY

EQU. A Toperat
EQU. A Treset
EQU. B Toperat
EQU. B Treset
EQU. C Toperat
EQU. C Treset
EQU. D Toperat
EQU. D Treset
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
(if option thermistor)

(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
00
01
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
1D
1C
1B
1A
Menu Text
Row
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220

number
number
number
number
number
number
number
number
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Data Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ind
0.0 s*
0.0 s*
0.0 s*
0.0 s*
0.0 s*
0.0 s*
0.0 s*
0.0 s*
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
Values
(* : default)
0000 *
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0.0/3600.0/0.1
0.0/3600.0/0.1
0.0/3600.0/0.1
0.0/3600.0/0.1
0.0/3600.0/0.1
0.0/3600.0/0.1
0.0/3600.0/0.1
0.0/3600.0/0.1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
1
Page 77/94
P220/EN GC/B43
18
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
66
17
Row
Col
AUX OUTPUT RLY2

Therm Overload
Alarm
Forbid Start
I >>
tI >>
Io >
tIo >
Io >>
tIo >>
tIi >
tIi >>
Excess long start
t Istall
Locked rotor
tI <
Start Number limit
T betw 2 start
t RTD1 Trip
(if option RTD)
t RTD2 Trip
(if option RTD)
Thermistor)
t RTD3 Trip
(if option RTD or
Thermistor)
Thermistor)
Menu Text
AUX OUTPUT RLY - 4 bits:

bit 0: Output 2
bit 1: Output 3
bit 2: Output 4
bit 3: Output 5
Page 78/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Data Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ind
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
Values
(* : default)
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Col
31
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
1D
1C
1B
Latched relays
t RTD4 Trip
Thermistor)
t RTD5 Alarm
Thermistor)
t RTD5 Trip
Thermistor)
t RTD6 Alarm
Thermistor)
t RTD6 Trip
Thermistor)
Therm. 1
Therm. 2
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
EXT4
Close order
Trip order
Order 1
Order 2
Succes start
t EQUA
t EQUB
t EQUC
t EQUD
SW oper time
SW oper nb
SA2
Active group
19
1A
Menu Text
Row
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220

(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Binary (4 bits)
Data Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ind
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 * (0: group 1/ 1:
group 2)
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
0000 *
Values
(* : default)
0000 *
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
0/15/1
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
1
Page 79/94
P220/EN GC/B43
tIo > ?
tIo >> ?
tIi > ?
tIi >> ?
Exces long start ?
tIbloq ?
Locked rotor ?
tI < ?
t RTD1 trip ?
t RTD2 trip ?
t RTD3 trip ?
Thermistor)
t RTD4 trip ?
Thermistor)
t RTD5 trip ?
Thermistor)
t RTD6 trip ?
Thermistor)
Thermistor 1 ?
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
11
10
0F
0E
tI >> ?
02
(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
(if option RTD or
(if option RTD)
(if option RTD)
TRIP OUPUT RLY

Therm overload ?
00
01
67
Menu Text
Row
Col
Page 80/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Data Type
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Ind
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
Values
(* : default)
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
Min/Max/Step
Passw
Level
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
68
Col
EXT1 ?
EXT2 ?
Equation A ?
Equation B ?
Equation C ?
Equation D ?
13
14
15
16
17
18
LATCH TRIP ORDER

Latching Order
Thermistor 2 ? (if option thermistor)
12
00
01
Menu Text
Row
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Binary (7 bits)
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Data Type
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Ind
0: Latch tI>>
1: Latch tIo>>
2: Latch tIi>>
3: Latch EQUA A
4: Latch EQUA B
5: Latch EQUA C
6: Latch EQUA D
Values
(* : default)
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0/63/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
Min/Max/Step
Passw
Level
1
Page 81/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Therm alarm ?
tI >> ?
tIo > ?
tIo >> ?
tIi > ?
tIi >> ?
tI < ?
Exces long start ?
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CLOSE t
09
LED 5
Therm overload ?
n
TRIP t
07
08
00
01
SW Operating number?
SW Operating number
SA2n?
Sa2n
03
04
05
06
6A
SW SUPERVISION
SW Operating time?
SW Operating time
00
01
02
69
Menu Text
Row
Col
Page 82/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Ind
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Binary (1 bit)
0
number
Binary (1 bit)
0
Binary (1 bit)
0
number
number
number
Data Type
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0.2 s*
1*
0.2 s*
0*
0 exp+06 A *
0.05 s*
Values
(* : default)
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0.2/5.0/0.05
0/1/1
0/50000/1
0/1/1
0/4000/1
(*exp+06)
1/2/1
0.2/5.0/0.05
0/1/1
0.05/1.0/0.01
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
tIstall ?
Locked rotor ?
Emerg. restart ?
Forbidden start ?
t RTD1,2,3 alarm ? (if option RTD or

Thermistor)
t RTD1,2,3 trip ? (if option RTD or
Thermistor)
t RTD4,5,6 alarm ? (if option RTD or
Thermistor)
t RTD4,5,6 trip ? (if option RTD or
Thermistor)
Thermistor 1,2 ? (if option thermistor)
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
00
6D
Successful start ?
17
00
Motor running ?
16
6C
Motor stopped ?
15
LED 8 (= LED 5)
LED 7 (= LED 5)
LED 6 (= LED 5)
EXT 2 ?
14
00
EXT 1 ?
13
12
11
10
0F
Menu Text
Row
6B
Col
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Indexed string
Data Type
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Ind
Values
(* : default)
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
0: NO *
1: YES
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
0/1/1
Min/Max/Step
Passw
Level
1
Page 83/94
P220/EN GC/B43
DISTURBANCE REC
Record Number
Trigger Time
Available Channel Bit Mask
Channel Types
Channel Offsets
Scaling Factors
NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved

Record Length
Trigger position
Time Base
Upload Timer
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07-0F
10
11
12
13
14
15-1F
Recorder Source
Pre time
Post time
Dist. Recorder Trig
02
20
21
22
80
RECORDER CONTROL
Start/Trigger recorder
00
01
70
Menu Text
Row
Col
Page 84/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Depend Cell Type
Repeated group of
Integers
Upload Scal. Factors
Upload Offsets
dd/mm/yy hh:mm
11111
Ia
Ib
Ic
I0
Inputs/Outputs
01111
0*
Stopped
Triggered
Running *
Samples *
0.1 second
0.1 second
ON INST
ON TRIG
Values
(* : default)
Data
Data
Data
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
2
0
Ind
Integer (2 bytes)
Integer (2 bytes)
Courier Number
Binary Flag 0: digital, 1:

analogue
Repeated group of
Courier numbers
Repeated group of
Courier numbers
IEC870 Time & Date

Binary Flag
Indexed String
Unsigned integer (1 byte)
Indexed String
Courier Number
Courier Number
Indexed String
(VERSION A2 and >)

Indexed String
Data Type
1
1
1
Passw
Level
0/5/1 (according 1
to context)
0.1/3.0/0.1
0.1/3.0/0.1
0/1/1
1/2/1
Min/Max/Step
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
BF
90
Col
In Magnitude
0A
COMM SYSTEM DATA

Dist Record Cntrl Ref
Dist Record Extract Ref
Setting Transfert
Reset Demand Timers
Reset Event Report
Ic Magnitude
09
00
01
02
03
04
05
Ib Magnitude
Upload Channel Inputs/Outputs
24
08
Upload Channel 3
23
Ia Magnitude
Upload Channel 2
22
07
Upload Channel 1
21
AUTOMAT. FLT
Record number
Occur fault date
Active set group
Phase in fault
Phase detected by
Magnitude
Upload Channel 0
20
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Menu Text
Row
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Menu Cell (2)

Menu Cell (2)
?
NON IMPLEMENTE
NON IMPLEMENTE

IEC DATE
number
number
number
number
number
Repeated group of
Integer/Bin. flags
Repeated group of
Integer/Bin. flags
Repeated group of
Integer/Bin. flags
Repeated group of
Integer/Bin. flags
Repeated group of
Integer/Bin. flags
Data Type
Ind
0x7000
0x8000
12.34 A
12.34 A
12.34 A
12.34 A
1
PHASE A
I >>
12.34 A
5*
Values
(* : default)
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Depend Cell Type
1/5/1
Min/Max/Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
Passw
Level
Page 85/94
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 86/94
P220/EN GC/B43
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 87/94
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 88/94
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
6.
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 89/94
IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay
conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
6.1
Initialisation (Reset)
Time Synchronisation
Event Record Extraction
General Interrogation
Cyclic Measurements
General Commands
Physical connection and link layer

Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is
possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel
interface. Following a change, a reset command is required to re-establish
communications.
The parameters of the communication are the following :
6.2
Even Parity
8 Data bits
1 stop bit
Data rate 9600 or 19200 bauds
Initialisation
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The
relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the
difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relays
transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be
contained in the data section of this ASDU:
Manufacturer Name : AREVA
The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay
model number to identify the type of relay, eg P220.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it
will also produce a power up event.
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 90/94
6.3
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Time synchronisation
The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as
specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a
send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time
synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data.
6.4
Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function
type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are
not used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardised messages will
not be sent.
Events are categorised using the following information:
Common Address
Function Type
Information number
Paragraph 2 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The
common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay produces
more events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardised messages.
For example the relay provides 5 binary inputs however only 4 binary inputs can be
passed using the standardised messages. Using a different common address for the
5th binary allows each binary input to be indicated. The table in Paragraph 2 shows
the common address as an offset value. The common address offset will be added to
the station address in order to pass these events.
6.5
General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers,
information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI
cycle are indicated in Paragraph 2.
6.6
Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used).
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a
proportion of 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value.
6.7
Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in Paragraph 2. The relay will respond
to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative
acknowledgement of a command.
6.8
Disturbance records
The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism
defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains compatibility with the
VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no disturbance records at the
start of every GI cycle.
6.9
Blocking of monitor direction

The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
7.
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 91/94
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASES

List of events produced by the relay
Two kinds of ASDU can be generated for the events : ASDU 1 (time-tagged message)
or ASDU2 (Time-tagged message with relative time)
The list of events is the following with the associated values : INFORMATION
NUMBER, TYPE OF ASDU ,CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION and COMMON ADDRESS OF
ASDU
Status indication in monitor direction :
LED reset : INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Local Mode: INF <22>;TYP <1>; COT<1>, < ADDRESS>
Setting group 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Setting group 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Aux input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Logic input 1 : INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS>
Output relay 1: INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS>
Fault indications in monitor direction :
Instantaneous I>> : INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
Instantaneous Ie > : INF <96>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
Instantaneous Ie >> : INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
Instantaneous Ie> or Ie>> : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>

(general earth)
Instantaneous I< : INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
Instantaneous Iinv > : INF <104>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
P220/EN GC/B43
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Page 92/94
Instantaneous Iinv >> : INF <106>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
General TRIP : INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
TRIP L1 : INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
TRIP L2 : INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
TRIP L3 : INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

(OR of the instantaneous signals)
TRIP I>> : INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
TRIP Ie> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
TRIP Ie>>: INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
TRIP I< : INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
TRIP Iinv > : INF <105>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
TRIP Iinv >> : INF <107>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Thermal ALARM : INF <110>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Thermal Overload : INF <111>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Blocked Rotor : INF <109>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Blocked Rotor at Starting : INF <113>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Excess Long Start : INF <120>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
RTD ALARM : INF <122>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
RTD TRIP : INF <123>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Thermistor TRIP : INF <125>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
TRIP Logic equation 1 : INF <86>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Auto reclosure indications :
Closed Position : INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
Open Position : INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
TRIPPING contact : INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
Closing contact : INF <143>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>

N.B. :
The double arrow means the event is generated on event

occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance.
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 93/94
List of data contained in General Interrogation

Status indication in monitor direction :
Local Mode : INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, <ADDRESS>
Setting group 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
Setting group 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
Aux input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
Fault indications in monitor direction :
Instantaneous Ie> or Ie>>: INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT <9>,<ADDRESS>

(General earth)
General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>

(OR of the instantaneous signals)
Auto reclosure indications :
Closed Position : INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDRESS>
Open Position : INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDRESS>
Cyclic measurements
First measurement : ASDU 9 (INF <148>):
Only the RMS phase currents and the measured frequency are transmitted in
standard format.
The scaling factor is 2.4 for all the measurement ( e.g. 2.4* nominal values = 4096)
The other measurements in ASDU 9 are indicated as NON Significant.
P220/EN GC/B43
Page 94/94
Technical Guide
Communication
MiCOM P220
Second measurement ASDU 77 (INF<149>):

5 measurements: In, I inverse, I direct, Thermal state (%), and the Full load current
(%).
These values are conforms to the floating Format of the IEEE 32 bits. They are not
standardised.
Third measurement ASDU 77 (INF <150>):
RTD1 to RTD6 measurements if RTD option is present.
Thermistor1 and 2 measurements plus RTD3, RTD4, RTD5, RTD6 if option is present.
These values are conforms to the floating Format of the IEEE 32 bits. They are not
standardised.
List of the supported commands
LED reset . This command corresponds to the acknowledgement of all alarms

by the front plate on MiCOM P220 products : INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT
<20>
Setting group 1 : INF<23>; TYP<20>; COT <20>
Setting group 2 : INF<23>; TYP<20>; COT <20>
TRIPPING Contact : INF <142>; TYP<20>; COT <20>
Closing Contact : INF <143>; TYP<20>; COT <20>
These commands make object of an acknowledgement by ASDU 1, positive if

COT= <20> or negative if COT = <21>.
Technical Guide
P220/EN SV/B43
MiCOM P220
Default Setting Value
Technical Guide
Default Setting Values
MiCOM P220
P220/EN SV/B43
Page 1/14
CONTENTS
1.
DEFAULT SETTING VALUES
1.1
OP PARAMETERS menu
1.2
CONFIGURATION menu
1.2.1
1.2.2
CT RATIO submenu
1.2.3
LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus
1.1.4
1.1.5
Date Format submenu
1.3
COMMUNICATION Menu
1.3.1
Courier
1.3.2
MODBUSTM menu
1.4
PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus
1.4.1
[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu.
1.1.2
[50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu
1.4.3
[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu
1.4.4
[46] UNBALANCE submenu
1.4.5
[48] EXCES LONG START submenu
1.4.6
[51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu
1.4.7
[37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu
1.4.8
[49/38] RTD submenu (optional)
1.4.9
[49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional)
1.5
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu
1.5.1
[66] START NUMBER submenu
1.5.2
MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu
1.5.3
REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu
1.5.4
INPUTS submenu
1.5.5
AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu
1.5.6
AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu
10
1.5.7
AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu
10
1.5.8
11
1.5.9
TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu
12
1.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu
12
1.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu
13
1.6
CONSIGNATION Menu
13
1.6.1
DISTURB RECORD submenu
13
P220/EN SV/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 2/14
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
1.
P220/EN SV/B43
Page 3/14
DEFAULT SETTING VALUES

The MiCOM P220 relay leaves the factory with the following default setting values :
1.1
OP PARAMETERS menu
Password
AAAA
Reference
ALST
Frequency
50 Hz
Date
29/01/94
Time
00:00:00
1.2
CONFIGURATION menu
1.2.1

Change Group Input
EDGE
Setting Group
Default display
IA RMS (phase A current)
52A (closing of the CB)
4 - 20 mA
Value transmitted by the analogue output IA RMS (phase A current)

(optional)
1.2.2
RTD type (optional)
PT100
Thermistor 1 type (optional)
PTC
PTC
CT RATIO submenu
P220/EN SV/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 4/14
1.2.3
1.2.4

LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
Allocation : Thermal overload
No
No
No
No
Allocation : Thermal alarm ALARM
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tI>>
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tIo>
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tIo>>
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tIi>
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tIi>>
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tI<
No
No
No
No
Allocation : Excessive long start
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while

running)
No
No
No
No
Allocation : Locked rotor (at start)
No
No
No
No
Allocation : Emergency restart
No
No
No
No
Allocation : Forbidden start
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tALARM RTD1, tALARM RTD2, tALARM RTD3

(optional)
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tDECL RTD1, tDECL RTD2, tDECL RTD3

(optional)
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tALARM RTD4, tALARM RTD5, tALARM RTD6

(optional)
No
No
No
No
Allocation : tDECL RTD4, tDECL RTD5, tDECL RTD6

(optional)
No
No
No
No
Allocation : Thermist 1 and Thermist 2

(optional)
No
No
No
No
Allocation : EXT 1
No
No
No
No
Allocation : EXT 2
No
No
No
No
Allocation : Motor Stopped
No
No
No
No
Allocation : Motor running
No
No
No
No
Allocation : Successful start
No
No
No
No

Inputs : 54321
1.2.5
11111
Date Format submenu

Date Format
PRIVATE
Only if Courier Protocol, otherwise, this submenu will be implemented in

COMMUNICATION Menu.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
1.3
COMMUNICATION Menu
1.3.1
Courier
1.3.2
Page 5/14
Yes
Relay address
255
MODBUSTM menu
Yes
Data rate
19 200 Bauds
Parity
Without
Numbe of data bits
Number of stop bits
Relay address
Format date
Private
1.4
PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus
1.4.1
[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu.

PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
No
No
Thermal inhibition on starting function No

enabled ?
No
Thermal overload function enabled ?
1.4.2
P220/EN SV/B43
Threshold I>
0,2 In
0,2 In
Ke
Te1
1 minute
1 minute
Te2
1 minute
1 minute
Tr
1 minute
1 minute
No
No
Thermal alarm enabled ?
No
No
Thermal alrm ALARM threshold
20 %
20 %
Thermal inhibition of start enabled ?
No
No
FORDID START threshold
20 %
20 %

PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
No
No
Threshold I>>
1 In
1 In
tI>>
0 second
0 second
P220/EN SV/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 6/14
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu

PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
Io> element of the earth fault function

enabled ?
No
No
Threshold Io>
0,002 In
0,002 In
tIo>
0 second
0 second
Io>> element of the earth fault function

enabled ?
No
No
Threshold Io>>
0,002 In
0,002 In
tIo>>
0 second
0 second
PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
Ii> element of the unbalance function

enabled ?
No
No
Threshold Ii>
0,05 In
0,05 In
tIi>
0,04 second
0,04 second
Ii>> element of the unbalance function

enabled ?
No
No
Threshold Ii>>
0,2 In
0,2 In
PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
Excessive long start function enabled ?
No
No
Threshold Istart
1 I
1 I
TIstart
1 second
1 second
PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
No
No
tIstall
0,1 second
0,1 second
Stalled rotor function enabled ?
No
No
Threshold Istall
1 I
1 I
Locked rotor at start function enabled ?
No
No
PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
No
No
Threshold I<
0,1 In
0,1 In
tI<
0,2 second
0,2 second
Tinhib
0,05 second
0,05 second
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
1.4.8
P220/EN SV/B43
Page 7/14

PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
RTD1 enabled ?
No
No
ALARM RTD1
0 C
0 C
tALARM RTD1
0 second
0 second
DECL RTD1
0 C
0 C
tDECL RTD1
0 second
0 second
RTD2 enabled ?
No
No
ALARM RTD2
0 C
0 C
tALARM RTD2
0 second
0 second
DECL RTD2
0 C
0 C
tDECL RTD2
0 second
0 second
RTD3 enabled ?
No
No
ALARM RTD3
0 C
0 C
tALARM RTD3
0 second
0 second
DECL RTD3
0 C
0 C
tDECL RTD3
0 second
0 second
RTD4 enabled ?
No
No
ALARM RTD4
0 C
0 C
tALARM RTD4
0 second
0 second
DECL RTD4
0 C
0 C
tDECL RTD4
0 second
0 second
RTD5 enabled ?
No
No
ALARM RTD5
0 C
0 C
tALARM RTD5
0 second
0 second
DECL RTD5
0 C
0 C
tDECL RTD5
0 second
0 second
RTD6 enabled ?
No
No
ALARM RTD6
0 C
0 C
tALARM RTD6
0 second
0 second
DECL RTD6
0 C
0 C
tDECL RTD6
0 second
0 second
P220/EN SV/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 8/14
1.4.9

PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
Thermistor 1 enabled
No
No
Thermist 1
0,1 k
0,1 k
No
No
Thermist 2
0,1 k
0,1 k
1.5
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
Start Number Limitation function

eneabled ?
No
Treference
10 minutes
Cold start number
Hot start number
Tinterdiction
1 minute

Time Between Start function enabled ?
No
Tentre 2 dem
1 minute

Reacceleration authorization function
enabled ?
No
Treacc
0,2 second
INPUTS submenu
Allocation : input n3
NONE
NONE
NONE
Time delay EXT 1
0 second
Time delay EXT 2
0 second
Time delay EXT 3
0 second
Time delay EXT 4
0 second
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
1.5.5
P220/EN SV/B43
Page 9/14

D
Allocation : FORBID START
Allocation : I>>
Allocation : tI>>
Allocation : Io>
Allocation : tIo>
Allocation : Io>>
Allocation : tIo>>
Allocation : tIi>
Allocation : tIi>>

running)
Allocation : tI<
Allocation : Start Nb Limitation
Allocation : Tbetw 2 Start
Allocation : tDECL RTD1 (optional)
Allocation : tALARM RTD2 (optional)
Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional)
Allocation : EXT 1
Allocation : EXT 2
Allocation : EXT 3
Allocation : EXT 4
Allocation : t
ALARM RTD1
(optional)
P220/EN SV/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 10/14
1.5.6
1.5.7

EQU. A Toperat
0 second
EQU. A Treset
0 second
EQU. B Toperat
0 second
EQU. B Treset
0 second
EQU. C Toperat
0 second
EQU. C Treset
0 second
EQU. D Toperat
0 second
EQU. D Treset
0 second

5
Allocation : I>>
Allocation : tI>>
Allocation : Io>
Allocation : tIo>
Allocation : Io>>
Allocation : tIo>>
Allocation : tIi>
Allocation : tIi>>

running)
Allocation : tI<
Allocation : Tbetw 2 Start
Allocation : t
ALARM RTD1
(optional)
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
1.5.8
P220/EN SV/B43
Page 11/14
5
Allocation : EXT 1
Allocation : EXT 2
Allocation : EXT 3
Allocation : EXT 4
Allocation : Close order (com RS485)
Allocation : Trip order (com RS485)
Allocation : order 1 (com RS485)
Allocation : order 2 (com RS485)
Allocation : t EQU. A
Allocation : t EQU. B
Allocation : t EQU. C
Allocation : t EQU. D
Allocation : SW Operating Time
Allocation : SW Operation Nb
Allocation : S A n
Active Group

OUTPUT 2
No
OUTPUT 3
No
OUTPUT 4
No
OUTPUT 5
No
P220/EN SV/B43
Page 12/14
1.5.9
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220

Allocation output relay n1 : Thermal overload
No
Allocation output relay n1 : tI>>
No
Allocation output relay n1 : tIo>
No
Allocation output relay n1 : tIo>>
No
Allocation output relay n1 : tIi>
No
Allocation output relay n1 : tIi>>
No
Allocation output relay n1 : Excessive long start
No
Allocation output relay n1 : tIbloq (stalled rotor while running)
No
Allocation output relay n1 : Locked rotor (at start)
No
Allocation output relay n1 : tI<
No
Allocation output relay n1 : tDECL RTD1 (optional)
No
No
No
No
No
No
Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 1 (optional)
No
No
Allocation output relay n1 : EXT 1
No
No
Allocation output relay n1 : Equation A
No
Allocation output relay n1 : Equation B
No
Allocation output relay n1 : Equation C
No
Allocation output relay n1 : Equation D
No

Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tI>>
No
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tIo>>
No
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tIi>>
No
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa A
No
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa B
No
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa C
No
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa D
No
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN SV/B43
Page 13/14

SW Operating Time function enabled ?
No
SW Operating Time
0 ,05 second
SW Operation Number function

enabled ?
No
SW Operation Number
S A n function enabled ?
No
SAn
Exponent n value
Trip T
0,2 second
Close T
0,2 second
1.6
CONSIGNATION Menu
1.6.1

Pre-Time
0,1 second
Post-Time
0,1 second
Disturbance Rocord Trig
ON INST
P220/EN SV/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 14/14
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
P220/EN IN/B43
MiCOM P220
Installation Guide
Technical Guide
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN IN/B43
Page 1/8
CONTENT
1.
RECEPTION OF THE RELAYS
2.
3.
STORAGE
4.
UNPACKING
5.
6.
DIMENSIONS
6.1
Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals
6.2
Communication port RS485
6.3
Earthing
7.
CASE DIMENSIONS
P220/EN IN/B43
Technical Guide
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 2/8
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220
1.
P220/EN IN/B43
Page 3/8
RECEPTION OF THE RELAYS

Protection relays are generally robust. However it is appropriate to treat them with
care before installing them on site. As soon as they arrive, the relays should be
examined immediately, looking for any deterioration which could have occurred
during transport. If there is any deterioration, make a claim against the forwarding
company and inform AREVA T&D as soon as possible.
Relays not intended for immediate installation must be stored in their protective
polyethylene packaging.
2.

The usual movements of a person easily generate electrostatic energy which may
reach several thousand volts. The discharging of this voltage into devices comprising
semiconductors, when handling electronic circuits, can cause severe deterioration.
Such damage is not necessarily visible immediately. Nevertheless, it reduces the
reliability of the circuit.
Electronic circuits are completely protected against any electrostatic discharge when
inside their housing. Do not expose them to any risk by needlessly taking the
modules out of their housings.
Each module has the best possible protection for its devices consisting of
semiconductors. However, should it be necessary to withdraw the module from its
housing, please take the following precautions to preserve the great reliability and
long service life for which the equipment was designed and manufactured.
1.
Before taking the module out of its housing, touch the housing to balance your
electrostatic potential.
2.
When handling the module, hold it by its front plate, or by its frame or by the
edges of the printed circuit board. Do not touch the electronic components, the
printed circuit conductors and the connectors.
3.
Before passing the module to another person, shake hands with him or her for
example to balance your electrostatic potential.
4.
Place the module on an antistatic surface or an electrically conductive surface

with the same potential as yourself.
5.
To store or transport the module, place it in conductive packaging.
If you carry out any measurements on the internal electronic circuits of a device in
service, earth yourself to exposed conductive parts by linking yourself to the housing
by a conductive strap attached to your wrist. The resistance to earth of the conductive
strap which you attach to your wrist and to the housing must be between 500 k and
10 M. If you do not have a device of this type, you must remain permanently in
contact with the housing to prevent any static energy accumulating. The instruments
used to take the measurements must be earthed to the housing insofar as this is
possible.
For further information on the procedures for safe working with all the electronic
equipment, please consult standards BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. In a special handling
area we strongly advise you to undertake a detailed analysis of the electronic circuits
and working conditions according to the BS and IEC standards mentioned above.
P220/EN IN/B43
Page 4/8
3.
Technical Guide
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220
STORAGE
If the relays do not have to be installed immediately on reception, they must be stored
protected against dust and humidity in their original carton. If dehumidifying crystals
are placed in the relay packaging, it is advisable not to remove them. The effect of
the dehumidifying crystals is reduced if the packaging is exposed to ambient
conditions. To restore their original effectiveness, you need only to heat the crystals
slightly for around an hour, before replacing them in their delivery carton.
As soon as the packaging is opened, the dust which has accumulated on the carton
risks settling on the relays. In the presence of moisture, the carton and the packaging
can become humidified to the point where the effectiveness of the dehumidifying
crystals is reduced.
The temperature for storage should remain between - 25 C and + 70 C.
4.
UNPACKING
When unpacking and installing relays, take great care to avoid damaging the parts
and changing the settings. Relays must be handled only by people who are experts
in this field. As far as possible, the installation must remain clean, dry, free from dust
and free from excessive vibration. The site must be well lit to facilitate inspection.
Relays removed from their housings must not be exposed to dust or humidity. To this
end, it is necessary to take great care when installing relays whilst construction work is
taking place on the same site.
5.

The relays are supplied either individually or mounted in a cubicle. If separate relays
have to be installed according to a particular drawing, please follow the mounting
details indicated in publication R7012. If a MMLG test unit has to be incorporated,
position it to the right of the set of relays (looking at them from the front). The
modules must still be protected in their metal housings during installation on a
cubicle. The design of the relays makes it possible to reach the mounting holes easily
without taking off the cover. For individually mounted relays, a positioning diagram
is normally supplied to indicate the centre of the holes and the layout of the cubicle.
The corresponding dimensions are also indicated in publication N 1509.
Technical Guide
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN IN/B43
Page 5/8
6.
DIMENSIONS
6.1
Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals

The individual equipment are delivered with sufficient M4 screws to connect the relay
via annular terminals, with a maximum recommended of two annular terminals per
contact.
If necessary, AREVA can provide annular terminals to crimp. 5 references exist
according to the section of the wire (see below). Each reference corresponds to a
sachet of 100 terminals.
Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8 (wire size 0.75 - 1.5mm)
AREVA T&D reference: ZB9128 015
Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8mm (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm)

AREVA T&D reference: ZB9128 016
P0166ENb
M4 90 Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 0.25 - 1.65mm)

AREVA T&D reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 901
M4 90 Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm)

AREVA T&D reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 900
P0167ENb
M4 90 Ring Tongue Terminal (wire size 2.53-6.64 mm)/12-10AWG.

Reference AREVA T&D, Stafford part number ZB9124 904 Not isolated.
P220/EN IN/B43
Technical Guide
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 6/8
To insure the insulation of the terminals and to respect the security and safety
instructions, an isolated sleeve can be used.
We recommend the following cable cross-sections:
Auxiliary sources
Vaux : 1.5 mm
Communication Port
see paragraph 6.2
Other circuits
1.0 mm
Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the maximum wire cross-section
which can be used for the connector blocks (for current inputs and signals) is of
6mm by using non -insulated annular terminals. When only pre- insulated terminals
can be used, the maximum wire cross-section is reduced to 2, 63 mm per annular
terminal. If a more significant wire cross-section is necessary, two wires can be put in
parallel, each one finished by a separate annular terminal.
All the terminal blocks used for connections, except of the port RS485, must be able
to withstand a nominal voltage of minimum 300V peak value.
We recommend to protect the auxiliary source connection by using a fuse of type NIT
or TIA with a breaking capacity of 16A. For security reasons, do never install fuses in
current transformers circuits. The other circuits must be protected by fuses.
6.2
Communication port RS485

Connections to RS485 is made using annular terminals. It is recommended that a two
core screened cable, is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or a200nF total
cable capacitance.
Each core :
16/0.2 mm copper conductor, PVC insulated.
Nominal conductor area :
0.5 mm per core
Screen :
Overall braid, PVC sheathed
Linear capacitance between conductor and earth : 100pF/m
Refer to chapter 2 paragraph 2.7.5 of this technical guide to get the RS232/RS485
converter references.
6.3
Earthing
Each equipment must be connected to a local earth terminal by the intermediary of a
M4 earth terminals. We recommend a wire of minimal section of 2,5 mm, with
annular terminals on the side of the equipment. Because of the limitations of the
annular terminals, the possible maximum section is of 6mm by wire. If a larger
section is necessary, one can use cables connected in parallel, each one ending with
an annular terminal separated on the side of the equipment. One can also use a
metal bar.
NOTE:
To prevent any electrolytic risk between copper conductor or

brass conductor and the back plate of the equipment, it is
necessary to take precautions to isolate them one from the other.
This can be done in several ways, for example by inserting
between the conductor and the case a plated nickel or insulated
ring washer or by using a tin terminals.
Technical Guide
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220
7.
P220/EN IN/B43
Page 7/8
CASE DIMENSIONS
MiCOM P220 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting.
Weight : about 2.5 Kg
External size :
Height
Width
Depth
NOTE :
Case
Front panel
Case
Front panel
Case (flush part)
Case + Front panel
152.2 mm
177 mm
148,1 mm
155 mm
140,8 mm
166 mm
For flush mounting, use the screws supplied by AREVA or others

with head diameter smaller than the hole of the front face.
In contrary, the active part will not be able to be plugged
properly (do not add washers).
P220/EN IN/B43
Technical Guide
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 8/8
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
P220/EN CM/B43
MiCOM P220
Commissioning and Maintenance

of the MiCOM P220 Relay
Technical Guide
Commissioning & Maintenance
MiCOM P220
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 1/32
CONTENT
1.
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING
2.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING
2.1
Important notes
2.1.1
Warning concerning the test methodology
2.1.2
Injection test boxes
2.1.3
Additional test equipments
2.1.4
Communication
2.2
Commissioning test records
3.
PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS
3.1
Allocation of terminals
3.2
3.3
Visual inspection
3.4
Earthing
3.5
Current transformers (CTs)
3.5.1
Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults.
3.5.2
Cable shields and core balance CT
3.5.3
Phase CTs orientation
3.6
Auxiliary supply
4.
COMMISSIONING
4.1
Settings
4.2
Measurements
4.3
Thermal replica
4.3.1
Test wiring diagram
4.3.2
Alarm threshold ALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te1 test.
4.3.3
Alarm threshold ALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te2 test. 10
4.3.4
Cooling down constant time Tr test.
10
4.3.5
FORBID START threshold test.
11
4.3.6
Numerical example
12
4.4
Phase overcurrent: I>>
13
4.4.1
Test wiring diagram
13
4.4.2
I>> threshold
13
4.5
Earth overcurrent : Io>, Io>>
14
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 2/32
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
4.5.1
Test wiring diagram
14
4.5.2
Io> threshold
15
4.5.3
Io>> threshold
15
4.6
Negative phase sequence threshold(46)
16
4.6.1
Test wiring diagram
16
4.6.2
I2> threshold
17
4.6.3
I2>> threshold
17
4.7
Automation functions
18
4.7.1
Latching of relay outputs
18
4.7.2
Wiring diagram
19
4.8
Commissioning parameters data base
20
4.8.1
PROTECTION Menu
20
4.8.2
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu
21
5.
INTRODUCTION
22
6.
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
22
7.
MAINTENANCE CHECKS
23
7.1
Alarms
23
7.2
Opto-isolators
23
7.3
Output Relays
23
8.
METHOD OF REPAIR
24
9.
CHANGING THE BATTERY
25
10.
TYPES OF FAULTS
26
10.1
Equipment failure
26
10.1.1 Minor faults
26
10.1.2 Major faults
26
10.2
27
Problem solving
10.2.1 Password lost or not accepted
27
10.2.2 Communication
27
11.
LIST OF THE RELAY ALARM MESSAGES
28
12.
LIST OF THE MOTOR ALARM MESSAGES
29
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
1.
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 3/32
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING

BEFORE COMMISSIONING THE RELAY, THE SAFETY SECTION OF THE MANUAL MUST BE
READ.
When commissioning the MiCOM relay for the first time, 1/4 hour should be allowed
to become familiar with the menu (MENU OF THE HMI section).
With a laptop computer and AREVA setting software MiCOM S1, the user can
configure the MiCOM P220 relay and save this setting on to a floppy disk. This file
can subsequently be downloaded via the RS232 front port or via the RS 485 link on
the rear of the MiCOM relays.
2.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING
2.1
Important notes
2.1.1
Warning concerning the test methodology

The test methodology described in this document tries as much as possible not to
modify the settings of the MiCOM P220 relay once these have been set so as to help
the tests and avoid errors.
A reference commissioning configuration file (MiCOM P220) is provided in
Chapter 8-3.
All the tests of the MiCOM P220 relays are carried out by injecting currents to the
secondary of the earth and/or phase CTs using appropriate injection test sets
provided for this purpose.
2.1.2
Injection test boxes

For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a singlephase injection test set is more suitable for the tests and is able to perform all the tests
relating to the MiCOM P220 relay.
Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the tests with a single-phase
injection test set.
However, for certain tests, the three-phase wiring diagrams are easier to understand
and, in this case, the description is also given in three-phase format.
Single-phase injection test set
1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
Three-phase injection test set
3 currents (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
2.1.3
Additional test equipments

2 multimeters (precision 1%),
1 clip-on ammeter to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%),
Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CTs secondary
(dimensions according to the currents injected).
2.1.4
Communication
For all tests, the records can be made by using either the RS 485 rear port or the
RS232 front port of the relay.
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 4/32
2.2
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Commissioning test records

Commissioning test records are available in the Chapter 8-3.
The presentation of the Commissioning test records follows the sequence of the tests
of this chapter.
The contents of these Commissioning test records enable you to log:
The name of the relay, station and circuit/plant
The characteristics of the MiCOM P220 relay
The various settings
The results of the tests
3.
PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS
3.1
Allocation of terminals
It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram of the MiCOM P220 whilst
observing the various polarities and ground/earth connection.
3.2

Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the
recommendations in the SAFETY section.
3.3
Visual inspection
Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration
following installation.
Check the serial number under the upper flap of the front panel. Also inspect the
stated nominal values and the model number.
Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the
assembly diagram.
When the relay is withdrawn from its case, use a continuity tester to check if the
current short-circuits (phases and earth CTs) between the terminals indicated on the
wiring diagram are closed.
3.4
Earthing
Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is
used to connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure
that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing
terminals of each case.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
3.5
Page 5/32
Current transformers (CTs)

DANGER :
3.5.1
P220/EN CM/B43
NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT

TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL
AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults.

If a core balance CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must
check the following points:
3.5.2
1.
MV cable screens and core balance CT,
2.
No current flow through the MV cables.
Cable shields and core balance CT

When mounting a core balance CT around electric cables, check the connection to
the earth of the cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the
opposite direction through the core balance CT. This cancels the currents carried by
the cable shields through the core balance CT.
Electrical cables directed

to the busbar
Screen shields
P1
S1
P2
S2
Other ends
of electrical cables
P0041ENa
FIGURE 1 - SCREEN SHIELDS AND CORE BALANCE CT
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 6/32
3.5.3
Phase CTs orientation

It is necessary to check the orientation of the phase CTs by using the following
method for instance:
Have available a centre point analogue ammeter. Temporarily short-circuit the
battery by checking the diagram polarities (+ on P1 and on P2). A positive current
pulse traverses the milliammeter and the needle shall turn in a positive direction .
Proceed this test for each phase CT.
+
_
P1
S1
P2
S2
+ mA
P0043ENa
FIGURE 2 - PHASE CT ORIENTATION TEST
NOTE :
3.6
De-magnetise the CT after the test. Inject a current starting from

zero and slowly cross the CT nominal value and then decrease
slowly to zero.
Auxiliary supply
Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value
measured shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 times the auxiliary supply nominal voltage
indicated on the MiCOM P220 front panel (under the upper flap).
Cortec code
Relay auxiliary voltage range *

(Volts)
Auxiliary voltage range for the

logic inputs * (Volts)
24 60 Vdc
19 60 Vdc
48 150 Vdc
32 150 Vdc
130-250 Vdc
48 250 Vdc
100-250 Vca
* The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations is 20/+20%.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
4.
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 7/32
COMMISSIONING
The various operations described in this section are not exhaustive, but combine
functions of MiCOM P220 relay which are able to confirm that the relay is
operational. The use of appropriate AREVA T&D setting software connected to either
the RS485 rear port or the RS232 front is not obligatory. The various indications
associated with each commissioning module are described for the MiCOM P220
front panel display (LCD and LEDs).
Commissioning covers the following points:
4.1
1.
Input of settings,
2.
Validation of measurements,
3.
Validation of the thermal replica : I>, ALARM, FORBID START, Te1, Te2, Tr (49)
4.
Validation of phase protection thresholds and time delays : I>>, tI>> (50/51)
5.
Validation of earth protection thresholds and time delays : Io>, tIo>, Io>>, t
Io>> (50N/51N)
6.
Validation of the Negative Sequence thresholds I2> and I2>> (46)
7.
Validation of the automation function: latching of the relay outputs.
Settings
Input into the Commissioning Test Report file all of the settings of the MiCOM P220
relay.
4.2
Measurements
The MiCOM P220 relay measures phase and earth currents as a True RMS value up
to the 10th harmonic. The value(s) indicated take account of the phase and/or earth
CT ratio.
WARNING:
4.3
MiCOM P220 RELAY HAS 1 AND 5 AMP CURRENT INPUTS.

CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE
SELECTED RANGE
Bring forward to the Setting report the values of phase and earth CTs.
Energise the MiCOM P220 relay.
Apply to each current input (as per wiring diagram) a current and check the
values on the LCD display.
Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test report (Applied values and
relay values displayed)
Thermal replica
Assign the thermal overload protective function to the trip output contact (relay RL1)
and assign the ALARM protective function to an auxiliary output contact, RL2 for
example. Set Ke equal to 3. In order to save time during testing, it is advisible to set
all the thermal time constants to 5 minutes.
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 8/32
The thermal operating time is given by the following:
t = T ln [((Ieq / I>)2 i) / [((Ieq / I>)2 thresh] = T ln [(K2 i) /(K2 thresh)]

where :
t = operating time in seconds

T = thermal time constant value in seconds
Ieq = equivalent thermal current value
I> = thermal overload current threshold
K = Ieq / I> ratio
i = initial thermal state value ; in our case i equal to 0.
thresh = alarm threshold (settable) or tripping threshold (fixed value equal
to 1)
This test is done by a single-phase injection, it results in that the relay sees equal
current magnitudes for both positive and negative phase sequence quantities. Upon
injection of a single phase current value equal to Iinject, the relay will see current
magnitudes of Iinject/3 for both positive and negative phase sequences quantities. The
equivalent thermal current value Ieq calculated by the relay will be given by the
following:
Ieq = (Ipositive2 + Ke . Inegative2 )0.5 = [(Iinject/3)2 + 3 . (Iinject/3)2]0,5 = 2/3 . Iinject
Therefore, for an inject current value (Iinject ) equal to 3/2 . K . I> , the thermal
equivalent current seen by the relay will be equal to K . I>.
NOTE:
4.3.1
When the Ke factor is not set to 3, in order for the relay to see a
current equal to K. I>, the injected current value Iinject, ,will
need to be equal to :
[3/(1+Ke)0,5] . K . I>
Test wiring diagram

The following diagram should be followed to tests the thermal replica.
This diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals
41-42, 43-44, 45-46). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp phase inputs, perform the
same test on the 1 Amp inputs (terminals 49-50, 51-52, 53-54).
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 9/32
INJECTION
TEST SET
33
+ Vaux
- Vaux
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
34
22
SWITCH
24
L1
Binary input 1
49
1A
50
51
1A
CURRENT
1A
MiCOM
P220
52
53
1A
54
41
5A
42
43
CURRENT
5A
5A
44
45
5A
TIMERS
46
37
35
36
6
4
2
12
10
8
Stop
Stop
18
16
14
WD Watchdog powered on
RL1
Trip output
Case earth
29
RL2
Programmable output
31
RL3
Programmable output
30
32
RS 485
Communication port
P0213ENa
FIGURE 3 - THERMAL REPLICA TESTS WIRING
4.3.2
1.
The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept energise during this
test.
2.
Within the PROCESS menu, reset the thermal status value to 0.
3.
Inject a single-phase current equal to 2.7 times the I> threshold value into the
phase A relay current input, this corresponds to an overload ratio of K = 1.8
4.
Record the operating times of both alarm and trip threshold.
Checks:
1.
ALARM alarm message on the LCD display.
2.
Alarm LED flashes.
3.
ALARM LED flashes (if programmed).
4.
Operation of the RL2 output contact (if ALARM is assigned to RL2).
5.
Check RL2 operates at a time equal to Te1. ln [1,82/(1,82 - ALARM)] .
6.
Then occurrence of TH OVERLOAD alarm message on the LCD display.
7.
Trip LED flashes.
8.
THERM OVERLOAD LED flashes (if programmed).
9.
Operation of the trip output contact (relay RL1).
10.
Check RL1 operates at a time equal to 0.369 .Te1 .
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 10/32
4.3.3
1.
The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept energise during this
test.
2.
3.
phase A relay current input, this corresponds to an overload ratio of K = 2.6.
4.
Record the operating times of both alarm threshold and trip threshold.
Checks :
4.3.4
1.
ALARM alarm message on the LCD display.
2.
Alarm LED flashes.
3.
ALARM LED flashes (if programmed).
4.
Operation of the RL2 output contact (if ALARM is assigned to RL2).
5.
Check RL2 operates at a time equal to Te2 . ln [2.62/(2.62 - ALARM)] .
6.
Then occurrence of TH OVERLOAD alarm message on the LCD display.
7.
Trip LED flashes.
8.
THERM OVERLOAD LED flashes (if programmed).
9.
Operation of the trip output contact (relay RL1).
10.
Check RL1 operates at a time equal to 0.160 . Te2 .
Cooling down constant time Tr test.

1.
The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept unenergise during this
test.
2.
If required, inject a single phase current into the relay in order that the thermal
status value reaches 90%.
3.
When the injected current is removed, record the value. Note this value i.
4.
Wait several minutes in order to give time for the thermal status to reduce to
30% (e.g. f<60%). Record the value. Note this value f. Note also the time
from when the injected current was removed.
Checks :
1.
Check the time from when the injected current was removed is approximately
equal to Tr . ln (i / f ) .
CAUTION :
A TIME DIFFERENCE MAY EXIST BETWEEN THE THEORETICAL TIME VALUE

AND THE TEST TIME VALUE. CONSIDERING A TR VALUE EQUAL TO 5 MN,
THE TIME DIFFERENCE IS TYPICALLY 17 SECONDS. THIS TIME DIFFERENCE
CAN EASILY REACH100 SECONDS FOR A TR VALUE EQUAL TO 60 MN.
SINCE COOLING OF THE THERMAL REPLICA FOLLOWS A LOGARITHMIC
RULE AND THE VALUE IS DISPLAYED IN 2 DIGITS, A CHANGE IN 1%
STEPS OF TAKES TIME. THIS TIME DIFFERENCE IS DUE TO THE
RESOLUTION OF THE STEP DISPLAY, NOT THE A DRIFT IN THE RELAY
ACCURACY.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
4.3.5
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 11/32
FORBID START threshold test.

1.
Set the FORBID START order to an auxiliary output contact (RL3 for instance), not the
same than the one for which ALARM has been already assigned to.
2.
The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) shall be kept not energise during this
test.
3.
4.
phase A relay current input, which corresponds to a K = 2.6 overload ratio. Let
the current injection during a time longer than Tr. ln [2.62/(2.62 FORBID
START)] , the value is greater than the FORBID START threshold.
Checks :
1.
FORBIDDEN START alarm message on the LCD display.
2.
Alarm LED flashes.
3.
FORBIDDEN START LED flashes (if programmed).
4.
Operation of the RL3 output contact (if FORBIDDEN START is assigned to RL3) after a
time equal to Tr. ln [2.62/(2.62 FORBID START)] .
CAUTION :
THE THERMAL BASE START INHIBITION IS SELF-RESET WHEN THE VALUE

FALLS UNDER THE FORBID START THRESHOLD, SO THE CHECKING OF THE
ABOVE ITEMS SHALL BE DONE QUICKLY AFTER THE CURRENT INJECTION
STOPPAGE.
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 12/32
4.3.6
Numerical example
For each thermal replica test, the hereafter table mentions the operating time values
relevant to the following relay setting values :
I = 1 In
Ke = 3
Te1 = Te2 = Tr = 5 mn
ALARM = 90%
FORBID START = 60%.
Injected
current value Theoretical
single phase
time value
current
(in seconds)
(in Ampre)
I> threshold value
threshold
test and constant time ALARM
operating time
Te1 value test
Chapter 4.3.2

13.5 (In=5A)
operating time
I> threshold value

threshold
test and constant time ALARM

operating time
Te1 value test
Chapter 4.3.3
2.7 (In =1A)
98 s
111 s
3.9 (In =1A)
43 s

19.5 (In=5A)
operating time
48 s
Initial thermal value

Constant time Tr value
i= 90%
No injection of
test
122 s
Final thermal value f current
Chapter 4.3.4
= 60%
FORBID START threshold
value test
Chapter 4.3.5
Minimum injection
time
3.9 (In =1A)

19.5 (In=5A)
28 s
Measured time
value
(in seconds)
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
4.4
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 13/32
Phase overcurrent: I>>

One phase overcurrent threshold is available for the MiCOM P220 relay. Set the
threshold on the trip output.
4.4.1
Test wiring diagram

This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the threshold.
The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals
41-42, 43-44, 45-46). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp phase inputs, perform the
same test on the 1 Amp inputs (terminals 49-50, 51-52, 53-54).
INJECTION
TEST SET
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
33
+ Vaux
- Vaux
34
49
1A
50
51
1A
CURRENT
1A
54
41
5A
42
43
CURRENT
5A
5A
44
45
5A
TIMER
MiCOM
P220
52
53
1A
46
37
35
36
6
4
2
12
10
8
Stop
Case earth
RL1
RL2
Trip output
Programmable output
29
30
31
32
RS 485 communication port
P0214ENa
FIGURE 4 - I>> TESTS WIRING
4.4.2
I>> threshold
Values to be recorded
1.
l>> threshold for each phase
2.
tl>> time delay for each phase
I>> threshold check:

1.
If tI>> time delay is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the
value of I>> threshold.
2.
If tI>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip.
Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is close.
3.
Gradually decrease the injected current and note the value of the drop out of
the I>> threshold.
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 14/32
Checks:
1.
Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.
2.
Alarm LED flashes.
3.
Trip LED flashes.
4.
I>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).
5.
Trip output closes.
6.
I>> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tI>> time delay check :

1.
Apply a current on one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by presetting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2.
4.5
Apply a current on one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by presetting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
Earth overcurrent : Io>, Io>>

Two earth overcurrent thresholds are available in the MiCOM P220 relays. Each
threshold is adjusted independently. Set the various thresholds on the trip output.
4.5.1
Test wiring diagram

This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the Io> and
Io>> thresholds.
The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp earth current input (terminals
47-48). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp earth input, perform the same test on the
1 Amp input (terminals 55-56).
INJECTION
TEST SET
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
33
+ Vaux
- Vaux
34
P1
CURRENT
1A
S1
55
1A
P2
S2
P1
S1
56
MiCOM
P220
N
A
CURRENT
5A
47
5A
P2
N
TIMER
Stop
S2
48
37
35
36
Case earth
6
4
2
12
RL1
10
8
RL2
Trip output
Programmable output
29
30
31
32
P0215ENa
FIGURE 5 - IO> AND IO>> TESTS WIRING
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
4.5.2
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 15/32
Io> threshold
Values to be recorded :
1.
Io> threshold
2.
Time delay tIo>.
Io> threshold check:

1.
If the time delay tIo> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the
value of the Io> threshold.
2.
If the time delay tIo> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no
tripping. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip.
3.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out
Io> threshold.
Checks :
1.
Alarm message on the LCD display.
2.
Alarm LED flashes.
3.
Trip LED flashes.
4.
Io> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).
5.
Trip output closes.
6.
Io> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tIo> time delay check :
4.5.3
1.
Apply a current on the earth input and measure the time delay tIo> by presetting the current above the Io> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2.
Apply a current on the earth input and measure the time delay tIo> by presetting the current above the Io> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
Io>> threshold
Values to be recorded
1.
lo>> threshold
2.
tlo>> time delay.
Io>> threshold check : .

1.
If tIo>> time delay is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the
value of Io>> threshold.
2.
If tIo>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip.
Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is closed.
3.
Gradually decrease the injected current and note the value of the drop out
Io>> threshold.
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 16/32
Checks :
1.
Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.
2.
Alarm LED flashes.
3.
Trip LED flashes.
4.
Io>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).
5.
Trip output closes.
6.
Io>> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tIo>> time delay check : .
4.6
1.
Apply a current on to the earth and measure the time delay tIo>> by presetting the current above the Io>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2.
Apply a current on to the earth and measure the time delay tIo>> by presetting the current above the Io>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
Negative phase sequence threshold(46)

Two overcurrent thresholds based on the negative sequence component are available
in the MiCOM P220 relays. Each threshold is adjusted independently. The threshold
I2> has a definite time characteristic while the second threshold I2>> is associated
with an IDMT characteristic.
Set the various thresholds on the trip output.
4.6.1
Test wiring diagram

This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the I2> and
I2>> thresholds.
The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp earth current input (terminals
41-42). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp earth input, perform the same test on the
1Amp input (terminals 49-50).
INJECTION
TEST SET
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
33
+ Vaux
- Vaux
A
N
34
49
1A
50
51
CURRENT
1A
MiCOM
P220
52
53
54
A
N
CURRENT
5A
41
5A
42
43
44
45
46
37
35
36
TIMER
Stop
6
4
2
12
10
8
Case earth
29
RL1
RL2
Trip output
Programmable output
30
31
32
P0216ENa
FIGURE 6 - I2> AND I2>> TESTS WIRING
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 17/32
Reminder: the MiCOM P220 relay calculates the negative phase sequence
component using the formula:
I2 = 1/3 (Ia + a2 Ib + a Ic)
With a = cos (2/3) + j sin (2/3)
With a single phase injection such as the proposed figure 5: Ib = 0 and Ic = 0
And thus I2 = 1/3 Ia
In this case, the negative sequence current measured by the MiCOM P220 is equal to
one third of the injected current.
4.6.2
I2> threshold
Values to be recorded:
1.
I2> threshold
2.
Time delay tI2>.
I2> threshold check:

1.
If the time delay tI2> is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the
value of the I2> threshold.
2.
If the time delay tIo> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no
tripping. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip.
3.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out
I2> threshold.
Checks:
1.
2.
Alarm LED flashes.
3.
Trip LED flashes.
4.
I2> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).
5.
Trip output closes.
6.
I2> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tI2> time delay check:
4.6.3
1.
Apply a current on to the earth input and measure the time delay tI2> by presetting the current above the I2> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2.
Apply a current on to the earth input and measure the time delay tI2> by presetting the current above the I2> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
I2>> threshold
Values to be recorded:
1.
I2>> threshold
2.
Time delay tI2>>.
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 18/32
I2>> threshold check:
Inject a current equal to 2 x I threshold on one of the phase current inputs. Repeat the
operation for various current values (n x I threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10, for
example). Check that the values measured correspond to the following formula:
Operating time t = 1.2/ (I2 / I threshold).
Checks:
1.
2.
Alarm LED flashes.
3.
Trip LED flashes.
4.
I2>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).
5.
Trip output closes.
6.
I2>> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tI2>> time delay check:
4.7
1.
Apply a current onto the earth input and measure the time delay tI2>> by presetting the current above the I2>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2.
Apply a current onto the earth input and measure the time delay tI2>> by presetting the current above the I2>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
Automation functions
The MiCOM P220 relay has several automation functions (refer to the User Guide)
The use of these functions is optional.
4.7.1
Latching of relay outputs

All output relays of MiCOM P220 can be kept closed after the fault has disappeared
(Relay Latching function in the AUTOMATION menu).
The following test is suggested for the tIo>> threshold on the tripping output.
The other thresholds and output relays can be tested identically.
Set tIo>> threshold on the trip output with the relay latched. Leave the other
threshold tIo> not latched.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
4.7.2
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 19/32
Wiring diagram
This wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct the test relating to the trip output
latch on the tIo>> threshold. The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp
earth current input (terminals 47-48). To carry out an injection on the 1 Amp earth
input, perform the same tests on the earth 1 Amp input (terminals 55-56).
INJECTION
TEST SET
33
+ Vaux
- Vaux
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
34
13
SWITCH
15
L3
Binary input 3
P1
S1
MiCOM
P220
55
CURRENT
1A
1A
56
P2
S2
P1
S1
N
A
CURRENT
5A
47
5A
48
P2
N
TIMER
Stop
S2
37
35
36
6
4
2
Case earth
RL1
Trip output
29
30
31
32
P0217ENa
FIGURE 7 - LATCHING TEST SCHEME FOR tIO>>
Trip output latched check

1.
Inject a current equal to 1.2 x I threshold Io>> on the earth input and check
that the trip output relay is closed after tIo>>time delay.
2.
Gradually decrease the current down to zero and check that the trip output
relay is still closed.
3.
Reinitialise the trip output relay either by clearing the alarm message (alarm
menu) or by activation of the Logic Input 3 (Terminals 22-24).
Checks
1.
Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD
2.
Alarm LED flashes.
3.
Trip LED flashes.
4.
Trip output relay closes.
5.
Trip output relay opens after alarm message cleared.
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 20/32
4.8
Commissioning parameters data base

The various parameters shown below make possible to test functions of MiCOM P220
relays according to the commissioning tests (see section 4). Settings in accordance
with the commissioning tests only are given.
4.8.1
PROTECTION Menu
THERMAL OVERLOAD FUNCTION ?
NO/YES*
INHIBIT ?
NO
I>
1 In
Ke
Te1
5 mn
Te2
5 mn
Tr
5 mn
RTD1 INFLUENCE ?
NO
ALARM ?
YES
ALARM
90%
FORBID START ?
YES
FORBID START
60%
I>> FUNCTION ?
NO/YES*
I>>
1 In
tI>>
20 s
Io> FUNCTION ?
NO/YES*
Io>
0.1 Ion
tIo>
20 s
Io>> FUNCTION ?
NO/YES*
Io>>
1 Ion
tIo>>
10 s
I2> FUNCTION ?
NO/YES*
I2>
0.2 In
tI2>
20 s
I2>> FUNCTION ?
NO/YES*
I2>>
0.5 In
* During the commissioning tests, all the protective functions shall be preferably set
off (NO) excepted the one which is being tested.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
4.8.2
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 21/32
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

TRIP THERM OVERLOAD ?
YES (Trip order via output RL1)
TRIP tI>>
TRIP tIo>
TRIP tIo>>
TRIP tI2>
TRIP tI2>
ALARM
0001 (allocation to output RL2)
FORBID START
0010 (allocation to output RL3)
LATCH tI>>
NO
LATCH tIo>>
YES
LATCH tI2>>
NO
INPUT 3
EXT RESET
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 22/32
5.
INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P220 Motor protection relays are fully numerical in design,
implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays
employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give
an alarm. As a result of this, the maintenance does not need to be as extensive as
with non-numerical electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
As soon as an internal fault is detected , depending on its type (minor or major), an
alarm message is displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED
is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a
major one).
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE HANDLING AND
SAFETY SECTION
6.
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D receive regular monitoring
after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In
view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is
desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals.
AREVA protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.
MiCOM P220 relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than
earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action
can be taken. However, some periodical tests should be done to ensure that the relay
is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact.
If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customers organisation then the
recommended product checks should be included in the regular programme.
Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as:
the operating environment
the accessibility of the site
the amount of available manpower
the importance of the installation in the power system
the consequences of failure
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
7.
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 23/32
MAINTENANCE CHECKS
Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by
utilising the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to
checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents accurately and checking the
circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended that maintenance
checks are performed locally (i.e. at the plant itself).
7.1
Alarms
The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist.
If so, press the read key ! repeatedly to step through the alarms. Clear the alarms to
extinguish the LED.
7.2
Opto-isolators
The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds on
energisation using the DC auxiliary supply specified on the product.
This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P220
relay has 5 opto-isolated inputs.
The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time. Ensuring correct polarity,
connect the DC auxiliary supply to the appropriate terminals for the input being
tested.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using the OP.PARAMETERS
menu.
The opto-isolated input terminal allocations are given in the following Table:
INPUT
7.3
DC auxiliary supply to terminals
OP.PARAMETRS/INPUT value
-Vaux
+Vaux
Opto input 1
22
24
Opto input 2
26
28
Opto input 3
13
15
Opto input 4
17
19
Opto input 5
21
23
Output Relays
This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P220 relay has
6 output relays including the watchdog relay.
Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 given
in the following Table:
Output
Monitor terminals
OP.PARAMETERS/OUTPUTS value
N/C
N/O
RL1
2-4
2-6
RL2
8-10
8-12
RL3
14-16
14-18
RL4
1-3
1-5
RL5
7-9
7-11
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 24/32
8.
METHOD OF REPAIR
If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the type of the fault,
the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged.
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE HANDLING AND SAFETY SECTION. THIS
SHOULD ENSURE THAT NO DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY INCORRECT
HANDLING OF THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
The method is to replace the withdrawable part, but if it is necessary to replace the
complete relay (with the case):
BEFORE WORKING AT THE REAR OF THE RELAY, ISOLATE ALL VOLTAGE
AND CURRENT SUPPLIES TO THE RELAY.
DISCONNECT THE RELAY EARTH CONNECTION FROM THE REAR OF THE
RELAY
NOTE:
The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to

facilitate removal of the relay should replacement or repair
become necessary without having to disconnect the scheme
wiring.
The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer
shorting switches which will close when the withdrawable part is
removed.
Upper flap
Lower flap
NOTE:
P0218ENb
The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to

minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or
lost.
REMOVE THE SCREWS USED TO FASTEN THE RELAY TO THE PANEL, RACK,
ETC. THESE ARE THE SCREWS WITH THE LARGER DIAMETER HEADS THAT
ARE ACCESSIBLE WHEN THE UPPER AND LOWER FLAPS ARE OPEN.
WITHDRAW THE RELAY FROM THE PANEL, RACK, ETC. CAREFULLY
BECAUSE IT WILL BE HEAVY DUE TO THE INTERNAL TRANSFORMERS.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay, follow the above instructions in

reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the
case earth is replaced.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
9.
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 25/32
CHANGING THE BATTERY

Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the
auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained includes event, fault and
disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure.
Instructions for Replacing the Battery
Open the bottom flap on the front of the relay.
Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to prize
the battery free.
Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease
and dust.
The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the
battery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree
with those adjacent to the socket.
NOTE:
Only use a type AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of

3.6V.
Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are
making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket.
Close the bottom access cover.
Battery Disposal
The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the
disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 26/32
10.
TYPES OF FAULTS
10.1
Equipment failure
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel

(using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will
acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED.
10.1.1 Minor faults
Regarded by the MiCOM P220 relay as a minor fault is a communication failure. If
communications are weak, MiCOM P220 protection and automation modules are
not affected.
Message :
Communication fault
Cause :
Hardware or software failure of the communication module
Action :
Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.
Alternative : If communication is not used, declare communication OFF in the
COMMUNICATION menu (COM. OK = NO).
10.1.2 Major faults
Major faults for MiCOM P220 relays are all software and hardware failures except
the communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog
(WD) is closed (36-37 terminals) and all operations are stopped (protection,
automation, communication).
10.1.2.1 Hardware faults
Messages :
EEPROM failure
Cause :
Hardware failure (EEPROM components)
Action :
Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.
10.1.2.2 Software faults
Messages :
Software fault
Cause :
Failure of the software (checksum incorrect for example)
Action :
Restart the protection software
If the software fault still remain after restart, withdraw the active part and return the
module to the factory for repair.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
10.2
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 27/32
Problem solving
10.2.1 Password lost or not accepted

Problem :
Password lost or not accepted
Cause :
MiCOM P220 relay is supplied with the password set to AAAA.
This password can be changed by the user (refer to the OP PARAMETERS menu).
Action :
There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be
supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the
upper flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your AREVA local
dealer or the AREVA T&D After Sales Department.
10.2.2 Communication
10.2.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely
Problem :
The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ.
Cause :
The values accessible on the front panel via the Measurement menu are refreshed
every second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the AREVA
T&D Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing
frequency of the supervision software differs from that of the MiCOM P220 relay (1s),
there may be a difference between indicated values.
Action:
Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or
of the setting software to 1 second.
10.2.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds
Problem :
No response from MiCOM P220 relay when asked by the supervision software
without any communication fault message.
Cause :
Normally, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P220
communication parameters.
Action :
Check that the MiCOM P220 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are
in accordance with the supervision settings.
Check the MiCOM P220 network address.
Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same
LAN.Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests.
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 28/32
11.
LIST OF THE RELAY ALARM MESSAGES

HARDW ALARMS
COMM. ERROR
EEPROM ERROR
DATA
EEPROM ERROR
CALIBR.
CT ERROR
CLOCK ERROR
RAM ERROR
ANA OUTPUT
ERROR
RTD / Therm
ERROR
Heading of the HARDW ALARMS messages, default

display in case of either relay error alarm or
RTDs/thermistor failure.
To display the alarms messages, press the ! key.
Communication error (communication using the rear
RS485 port).
EEPROM memory error.
EEPROM calibration error.
Analog signal acquisition error.
Internal clock error.
RAM memory error.
Analog output error.
RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open

circuit)
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
12.
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 29/32
LIST OF THE MOTOR ALARM MESSAGES

MOTOR ALARMS
TH OVERLOAD
ALARM
FORBIDDEN
START
t I >>
PHASE
Heading of the MOTOR ALARMS messages, default

display in case of motor alarm. To display the alarms
messages, press the ! key.
Operation of the thermal overload function.
Thermal alarm element active : ALARM (selfresettable)
Start inhibition based on thermal cirterion active (self

resettable)
Operation of the short-circuit function : time

delayed element tI>>.
Display of the faulty phase.
t I0>
Operation of the earth fault function : time delayed

element t I0>
t I0>>
Operation of the earth fault function : time delayed

element t I0>>
t Ii>
Operation of the unbalance function : time delayed

element tIi>
t Ii>>
Operation of the unbalance function : time delayed

element tIi>>
LONG START
tIstart
Operation of the excessive start tim function : time

delayed element tIstart
MECHAN JAM
tIstall
Operation of the stalled rotor while running

function : time delayed element tIstall
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 30/32
LOCKED
ROTOR
t I<
PHASE
t RTD1 ALAR
t RTD1 trip
Thermist 1
Thermist 2
START NB
LIMIT
T between
2 start
RE-ACCELER
AUTHOR
EXT 1
EXT 2
EQUATION A
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Operation of the locked rotor at start function
Operation of the loss of load function : time

delayed element t I<
Display the faulty phase
Operation of the RTD1 temperature alarm element :
time delayed element tALARM RTD1 (self-resettable)
Operation of the RTD1 temperature trip element : time

delayed element tDECL RTD1
and so on for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6
Operation of the Thermist1 temperature element
Operation of the Thermist2 temperature element
Start inhibition based on the limitation of starts

number function active (self resettable)
Start inhibition based on the minimum time between 2

starts function active . (self-resettable).
Authorised motor reacceleration sequence in progress

(self-resettable)
Operation of the auxiliary timer EXT 1.
Operation of the auxiliary timer EXT 2.
And logic equation A active

and so on for the AND logic equations B, C and D
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
OPERATING
TIME SW
OPERATION
NB SW
SA2N
CLEAR ALL ALARMS
LATCHING RELAYS
P220/EN CM/B43
Page 31/32
Circuit breaker operating time has reached (or it has
exceeded) the SW OPERATING TIME time threshold.
Circuit breaker operation number has reached (or it

has exceeded) the SW OPERATION NB threshold.
The sum of amperesn has reached (or it has exceeded)

the SAn threshold.
To clear all the alarms, press the " key.
Information issued from an element which has been

affected to a latched relay.
P220/EN CM/B43
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Page 32/32
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide
P220/EN RS/B43
MiCOM P220
Test Report
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
P220/EN RS/B43
Page 1/16
CONTENT
1.
TEST REPORT
1.1
Relay reference
2.
PRODUCTS CHECKS
2.1
Relay "OFF"
2.1.1
Visual inspection
2.1.2
External wiring
2.1.3
Insulation resistor > 100M at 500Vdc
2.1.4
Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off)
2.1.5
Auxiliary supply measured
2.2
Relay "ON"
2.2.1
2.2.2
LEDs
2.2.3
Logic Inputs
2.2.4
Output relays
2.2.5
Rear communication port
3.
SETTINGS
3.1
EXPLOITATION menu
3.2
CONFIGURATION menu
3.2.1
3.2.2
CT RATIO submenu
3.2.3
3.2.4
Submenus CONFIGURATION INPUTS
3.3
COMMUNICATION menu
3.3.1
MODBUSTM
3.3.2
Courier
3.4
PROTECTION G1 and G2 menus
3.4.1
[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu
3.4.2
3.4.3
[50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.9
10
P220/EN RS/B43
Page 2/16
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
3.5
AUTOMAT. CTRL menu
10
3.5.1
10
3.5.2
10
3.5.3
10
3.5.4
INPUTS submenu
11
3.5.5
11
3.5.6
12
3.5.7
12
3.5.8
LATCHING OUTPUT RELAYS
14
3.5.9
14
14
15
3.6
CONSIGNATION menu
15
3.6.1
15
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
1.
1.1
P220/EN RS/B43
Page 3/16
TEST REPORT
Commissioning date:
____________________________________
Motor reference:
____________________________________
Circuit-breaker/Fuse-contactor reference:
____________________________________
Relay reference
MiCOM relay type
P220
Serial number
Earth current setting range
Auxiliary voltage supply
Communication protocol
Language
Have you already read the security instructions ?
Delete as appropriate
Yes/No*
P220/EN RS/B43
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
Page 4/16
2.
PRODUCTS CHECKS
2.1
Relay "OFF"
2.1.1
Visual inspection
2.1.2
2.1.3
Damaged relay ?
Yes/No *
Nominal values conform to installation ?
Yes/No *
Relay earth connection (connected)?
Yes/No *
External wiring
Wiring controlled according to scheme ?
Yes/No *
Test unit connection (verified) ?
Yes/No/No used *
Insulation resistor > 100M at 500Vdc

Yes/No/ No Tested*
2.1.4

Terminal 35 - 36
Terminal 36 - 37
2.1.5
Closed contact ?
Yes/No *
Contact resistance
-------- / No measured
Open contact ?
Yes/No *
Auxiliary supply measured

----------Vac/ dc *
2.2
Relay "ON"
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
Terminal 35 - 36
Open contact ?
Yes/No *
Terminal 36 - 37
Closed contact ?
Yes/No *
Contact resistance
-------- / No measured
LEDs
HEALTHY LED (GREEN) is ON
Yes/No *
ALARM LED (YELLOW) is ON
Yes/No *
WD LED (ORANGE) is ON
Yes/No *
TRIP LED (RED) is ON
Yes/No *
Programmable LED correct functioning
Yes/No *
Logic Inputs
Correct functioning of isolated opto inputs 1 to 5
Yes/No *
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
2.2.4
P220/EN RS/B43
Page 5/16
Output relays
Relay 1 (RL1)
Correct functioning
Contact resistance
Relay 2 (RL2)
-------- / No measured *
Yes/No *
N/C
N/O
Yes/No *
N/C
N/O
Yes/No *
N/C
N/O
Yes/No *
Correct functioning
Contact resistance
2.2.5
N/O
Correct functioning
Contact resistance
Relay 5 (RL5)
Correct functioning
Contact resistance
Relay 4 (RL4)
N/C
Correct functioning
Contact resistance
Relay 3 (RL3)
Yes/No *
N/C
N/O
Rear communication port

Communication standard
K-Bus / Courier *
Modbus *
CEI 60870-5-103 *
Communication present
Yes/No *
Protocol Converter Tested
Yes/No/ No used *
P220/EN RS/B43
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
Page 6/16
3.
SETTINGS
3.1
EXPLOITATION menu
Password
Reference
Frequency
Hz
Date
Hour
3.2
CONFIGURATION menu
3.2.1

Change group input
Setting group
Default display
Value transmitted by the analogue output (optional)
RTD type (optional)
3.2.2
CT RATIO submenu
3.2.3

LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8
Allocation : tI>>
Allocation : tIo>
Allocation : tIo>>
Allocation : tIi>
Allocation : tIi>>
Allocation : tI<
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
P220/EN RS/B43
Page 7/16
LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8
Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while running)

Allocation : Emergency restart
Allocation : Forbidden start
Allocation : tALARM RTD1, tALARM RTD2, tALARM RTD3 (optional)
Allocation : tTRIP RTD1, tTRIP RTD2, tTRIP RTD3 (optional)
Allocation : tALARM RTD4, tALARM RTD5, tALARM RTD6 (optional)
Allocation : tTRIP RTD4, tTRIP RTD5, tTRIP RTD6 (optional)
Allocation : Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (optional)
Allocation : EXT 1
Allocation : EXT 2
Allocation : Motor Stopped
Allocation : Motor running
3.2.4
Submenus CONFIGURATION INPUTS

EL
54321
3.3
COMMUNICATION menu
3.3.1
MODBUSTM
(Yes/No)
Data rate
Bauds
Parity
Number of data bits
Number of stop bits
Relay address
Date format
3.3.2
Courier
Relay address
(Yes/No)
P220/EN RS/B43
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
Page 8/16
3.4
PROTECTION G1 and G2 menus
3.4.1
[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu

PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2
Thermal overload function enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Thermal inhibition on starting function

enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
In
In
Te1
mn
mn
Te2
Te1
Te1
Tr
Te1
Te1
Threshold I>
Ke
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Thermal alarm enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Thermal alarm ALARM threshold

Thermal forbidden start function enabled ?
%
(Yes/No)
FORDID START threshold

3.4.2
%
(Yes/No)

(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Threshold I>>
In
In
tI>>
3.4.3
[50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu

Io> element of the earth fault function
enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Threshold Io>
In
In
Io>> element of the earth fault function

enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Threshold Io>>
In
In
tIo>
tIo>>
3.4.4

Ii> element of the unbalance function
enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Threshold Ii>
In
In
Ii>> element of the unbalance function

enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Threshold Ii>>
In
In
tIi>
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
3.4.5
P220/EN RS/B43
Page 9/16

Excessive long start function enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Threshold Istart
tIstart
3.4.6

PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G 2
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Stalled rotor function enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Threshold Istall
Locked rotor at start function enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
tIstall
3.4.7

(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Threshold I<
In
In
tI<
Tinhib
3.4.8

RTD1 enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
RTD1 ALARM
RTD2 enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
RTD2 ALARM
RTD3 enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
RTD3 ALARM
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
tALARM RTD1
RTD1 TRIP
tTRIP RTD1
tALARM RTD2
RTD2 TRIP
tTRIP RTD2
tALARM RTD3
RTD3 TRIP
tTRIP RTD3
RTD4 enabled ?
P220/EN RS/B43
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
Page 10/16
RTD4 ALARM
RTD5 enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
RTD5 ALARM
RTD6 enabled ?
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
RTD6 ALARM
tALARM RTD4
RTD4 TRIP
tTRIP RTD4
tALARM RTD5
RTD5 TRIP
tTRIP RTD5
tALARM RTD6
RTD6 TRIP
TTRIP RTD6
3.4.9

(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Thermist 1
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Thermist 2
3.5
AUTOMAT. CTRL menu
3.5.1

Start Number Limitation function eneabled ?
(Yes/No)
Treference
mn
Cold start number

Hot start number
Tinterdiction
3.5.2
mn

Time Between Start function enabled ?
(Yes/No)
tbetw 2 starts
3.5.3
mn

Reacceleration authorization function enabled ?
Treacc
(Yes/No)
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
3.5.4
P220/EN RS/B43
Page 11/16
INPUTS submenu
t EXT 1
t EXT 2
t EXT 3
t EXT 4
3.5.5

D
Allocation : I>>
Allocation : tI>>
Allocation : Io>
Allocation : tIo>
Allocation : Io>>
Allocation : tIo>>
Allocation : tIi>
Allocation : tIi>>
Allocation : tI<
Allocation : Tbetw 2 starts
Allocation : t
ALARM RTD1
(optional)
Allocation : tTRIP RTD1 (optional)

P220/EN RS/B43
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
Page 12/16
D

Allocation : EXT 1
Allocation : EXT 2
Allocation : EXT 3
Allocation : EXT 4
3.5.6

EQU. A Toperat
EQU. A Treset
EQU. B Toperat
EQU. B Treset
EQU. C Toperat
EQU. C Treset
EQU. D Toperat
EQU. D Treset
3.5.7

Allocation : I>>
Allocation : tI>>
Allocation : Io>
Allocation : tIo>
Allocation : Io>>
Allocation : tIo>>
Allocation : tIi>
Allocation : tIi>>
Allocation : tI<
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
P220/EN RS/B43
Page 13/16
5

Allocation : Tbetw 2 starts
Allocation : t
ALARM RTD1
(optional)

Allocation : EXT 1
Allocation : EXT 2
Allocation : EXT 3
Allocation : EXT 4
Allocation : Close order
Allocation : Trip order
Allocation : order 1
Allocation : order 2
Allocation : t EQU. A
Allocation : t EQU. B
Allocation : t EQU. C
Allocation : t EQU. D
Allocation : SW Operating Time
Allocation : SW Operation Nb
Allocation : S A n
Allocation : active group
P220/EN RS/B43
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
Page 14/16
3.5.8
LATCHING OUTPUT RELAYS

OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 5
3.5.9

Allocation output relay n1 : Thermal overload
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : tI>>
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : tIo>
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : tIo>>
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : tIi>
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : tIi>>
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : Excessive long start
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : tIstall (stalled rotor while

running)
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : Locked rotor (at start)
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : tI<
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : tTRIP RTD1 (optional)
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : Equation A
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : Equation B
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : Equation C
(Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n1 : Equation D
(Yes/No)

Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tI>>
(Yes/No)
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tIo>>
(Yes/No)
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tIi>>
(Yes/No)
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa A
(Yes/No)
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa B
(Yes/No)
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa C
(Yes/No)
Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa D
(Yes/No)
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
P220/EN RS/B43
Page 15/16

SW Operating Time function enabled ?
(Yes/No)
SW Operating Time
SW Operation Number function enabled ?
(Yes/No)
SW Operation Number
S A n function enabled ?
SAn
Exponent n value
t Trip
t Close
3.6
CONSIGNATION menu
3.6.1

Pre-Time
Post-Time
Disturbance Record Trig
(Yes/No)
P220/EN RS/B43
Technical Guide
Test Report
MiCOM P220
Page 16/16
BLANK PAGE
Publication: P220/EN T/B43

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com
T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

MiCOM P220 TechnicalGuide en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P220 TechnicalGuide en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P220

Menu of the HMI

Default Setting Value

Commissioning and Maintenance

HEALTH AND SAFETY

SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Protective fuse rating

RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA

HEALTH AND SAFETY

SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.

Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal

THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may

Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective

The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since

The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm

Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);

CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections;

Protective fuse rating;

Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where

Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the

DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Protective fuse rating

CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may

Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment

Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):

Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety

Compliance demonstrated by reference to

Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

Compliance demonstrated via the Technical

The following Product Specific Standard

ATEX Potentially Explosive

The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of

Compliance demonstrated by compliance to the Low

RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA

- Underwriters Laboratory of America

UL Recognized to UL (USA) requirements

UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements

Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements

RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT

Reception of the relay

Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

INSTALLING THE RELAYS

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220

MiCOM series relay

MiCOM P220 Functions

Relay rear description

STARTING THE MiCOM P220 IN 5 MINUTES

Check the wiring of your installation

Connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage

MINIMUM CONFIGURATION TO START UP THE MiCOM P220

COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION